© COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_crs.h"
+#include "stm32f0xx_rcc.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup CRS
+ * @brief CRS driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* CRS Flag Mask */
+#define FLAG_MASK ((uint32_t)0x700)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup CRS_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup CRS_Group1 Configuration of the CRS functions
+ * @brief Configuration of the CRS functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### CRS configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes CRS peripheral registers to their default reset values.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_DeInit(void)
+{
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CRS, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_CRS, DISABLE);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Adjusts the Internal High Speed 48 oscillator (HSI 48) calibration value.
+ * @note The calibration is used to compensate for the variations in voltage
+ * and temperature that influence the frequency of the internal HSI48 RC.
+ * @note This function can be called only when the AUTOTRIMEN bit is reset.
+ * @param CRS_HSI48CalibrationValue:
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_AdjustHSI48CalibrationValue(uint8_t CRS_HSI48CalibrationValue)
+{
+ /* Clear TRIM[5:0] bits */
+ CRS->CR &= ~CRS_CR_TRIM;
+
+ /* Set the TRIM[5:0] bits according to CRS_HSI48CalibrationValue value */
+ CRS->CR |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)CRS_HSI48CalibrationValue << 8);
+
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the oscillator clock for frequency error counter.
+ * @note when the CEN bit is set the CRS_CFGR register becomes write-protected.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the frequency error counter.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_FrequencyErrorCounterCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ CRS->CR |= CRS_CR_CEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ CRS->CR &= ~CRS_CR_CEN;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the automatic hardware adjustement of TRIM bits.
+ * @note When the AUTOTRIMEN bit is set the CRS_CFGR register becomes write-protected.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the automatic trimming.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_AutomaticCalibrationCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ CRS->CR |= CRS_CR_AUTOTRIMEN;
+ }
+else
+ {
+ CRS->CR &= ~CRS_CR_AUTOTRIMEN;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Generate the software synchronization event
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_SoftwareSynchronizationGenerate(void)
+{
+ CRS->CR |= CRS_CR_SWSYNC;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Adjusts the Internal High Speed 48 oscillator (HSI 48) calibration value.
+ * @note The calibration is used to compensate for the variations in voltage
+ * and temperature that influence the frequency of the internal HSI48 RC.
+ * @note This function can be called only when the CEN bit is reset.
+ * @param CRS_ReloadValue: specifies the HSI calibration trimming value.
+ * This parameter must be a number between 0 and .
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_FrequencyErrorCounterReload(uint32_t CRS_ReloadValue)
+{
+
+ /* Clear RELOAD[15:0] bits */
+ CRS->CFGR &= ~CRS_CFGR_RELOAD;
+
+ /* Set the RELOAD[15:0] bits according to CRS_ReloadValue value */
+ CRS->CFGR |= (uint32_t)CRS_ReloadValue;
+
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief
+ * @note This function can be called only when the CEN bit is reset.
+ * @param CRS_ErrorLimitValue: specifies the HSI calibration trimming value.
+ * This parameter must be a number between 0 and .
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_FrequencyErrorLimitConfig(uint8_t CRS_ErrorLimitValue)
+{
+ /* Clear FELIM[7:0] bits */
+ CRS->CFGR &= ~CRS_CFGR_FELIM;
+
+ /* Set the FELIM[7:0] bits according to CRS_ErrorLimitValue value */
+ CRS->CFGR |= (uint32_t)CRS_ErrorLimitValue;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief
+ * @note This function can be called only when the CEN bit is reset.
+ * @param CRS_Prescaler: specifies the HSI calibration trimming value.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNC_Div1:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNC_Div2:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNC_Div4:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNC_Div8:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNC_Div16:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNC_Div32:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNC_Div64:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNC_Div128:
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_SynchronizationPrescalerConfig(uint32_t CRS_Prescaler)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CRS_SYNC_DIV(CRS_Prescaler));
+
+ /* Clear SYNCDIV[2:0] bits */
+ CRS->CFGR &= ~CRS_CFGR_SYNCDIV;
+
+ /* Set the CRS_CFGR_SYNCDIV[2:0] bits according to CRS_Prescaler value */
+ CRS->CFGR |= CRS_Prescaler;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief
+ * @note This function can be called only when the CEN bit is reset.
+ * @param CRS_Source: .
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNCSource_GPIO:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNCSource_LSE:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNCSource_USB:
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_SynchronizationSourceConfig(uint32_t CRS_Source)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CRS_SYNC_SOURCE(CRS_Source));
+
+ /* Clear SYNCSRC[1:0] bits */
+ CRS->CFGR &= ~CRS_CFGR_SYNCSRC;
+
+ /* Set the SYNCSRC[1:0] bits according to CRS_Source value */
+ CRS->CFGR |= CRS_Source;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief
+ * @note This function can be called only when the CEN bit is reset.
+ * @param CRS_Polarity: .
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNCPolarity_Rising:
+ * @arg CRS_SYNCPolarity_Falling:
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_SynchronizationPolarityConfig(uint32_t CRS_Polarity)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CRS_SYNC_POLARITY(CRS_Polarity));
+
+ /* Clear SYNCSPOL bit */
+ CRS->CFGR &= ~CRS_CFGR_SYNCPOL;
+
+ /* Set the SYNCSPOL bits according to CRS_Polarity value */
+ CRS->CFGR |= CRS_Polarity;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the Relaod value.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval The reload value
+ */
+uint32_t CRS_GetReloadValue(void)
+{
+ return ((uint32_t)(CRS->CFGR & CRS_CFGR_RELOAD));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the HSI48 Calibration value.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval The reload value
+ */
+uint32_t CRS_GetHSI48CalibrationValue(void)
+{
+ return (((uint32_t)(CRS->CR & CRS_CR_TRIM)) >> 8);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the frequency error capture.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval The frequency error capture value
+ */
+uint32_t CRS_GetFrequencyErrorValue(void)
+{
+ return ((uint32_t)(CRS->ISR & CRS_ISR_FECAP));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the frequency error direction.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval The frequency error direction. The returned value can be one
+ * of the following values:
+ * - 0x00: Up counting
+ * - 0x8000: Down counting
+ */
+uint32_t CRS_GetFrequencyErrorDirection(void)
+{
+ return ((uint32_t)(CRS->ISR & CRS_ISR_FEDIR));
+}
+
+/** @defgroup CRS_Group2 Interrupts and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified CRS interrupts.
+ * @param CRS_IT: specifies the RCC interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_SYNCOK:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_SYNCWARN:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_ERR:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_ESYNC:
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified CRS interrupts.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_ITConfig(uint32_t CRS_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CRS_IT(CRS_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ CRS->CR |= CRS_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ CRS->CR &= ~CRS_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified CRS flag is set or not.
+ * @param CRS_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_SYNCOK:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_SYNCWARN:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_ERR:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_ESYNC:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_TRIMOVF:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_SYNCERR:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_SYNCMISS:
+ * @retval The new state of CRS_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus CRS_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t CRS_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CRS_FLAG(CRS_FLAG));
+
+ return ((FlagStatus)(CRS->ISR & CRS_FLAG));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the CRS specified FLAG.
+ * @param CRS_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_SYNCOK:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_SYNCWARN:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_ERR:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_ESYNC:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_TRIMOVF:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_SYNCERR:
+ * @arg CRS_FLAG_SYNCMISS:
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_ClearFlag(uint32_t CRS_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CRS_FLAG(CRS_FLAG));
+
+ if ((CRS_FLAG & FLAG_MASK)!= 0)
+ {
+ CRS->ICR |= CRS_ICR_ERRC;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ CRS->ICR |= CRS_FLAG;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified CRS IT pending bit is set or not.
+ * @param CRS_IT: specifies the IT pending bit to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_SYNCOK:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_SYNCWARN:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_ERR:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_ESYNC:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_TRIMOVF:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_SYNCERR:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_SYNCMISS:
+ * @retval The new state of CRS_IT (SET or RESET).
+ */
+ITStatus CRS_GetITStatus(uint32_t CRS_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CRS_GET_IT(CRS_IT));
+
+ return ((ITStatus)(CRS->ISR & CRS_IT));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the CRS specified IT pending bi.
+ * @param CRS_FLAG: specifies the IT pending bi to clear.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_SYNCOK:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_SYNCWARN:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_ERR:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_ESYNC:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_TRIMOVF:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_SYNCERR:
+ * @arg CRS_IT_SYNCMISS:
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void CRS_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t CRS_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_CRS_CLEAR_IT(CRS_IT));
+
+ if ((CRS_IT & FLAG_MASK)!= 0)
+ {
+ CRS->ICR |= CRS_ICR_ERRC;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ CRS->ICR |= CRS_IT;
+ }
+}
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_dac.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_dac.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_dac.c
@@ -0,0 +1,692 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_dac.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) peripheral
+ * applicable only on STM32F051 and STM32F072 devices:
+ * + DAC channel configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format
+ * + DMA management
+ * + Interrupts and flags management
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+ *
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### DAC Peripheral features #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] The device integrates two 12-bit Digital Analog Converters refered as
+ DAC channel1 with DAC_OUT1 (PA4) and DAC_OUT2 (PA5) as outputs.
+
+ [..] Digital to Analog conversion can be non-triggered using DAC_Trigger_None
+ and DAC_OUTx is available once writing to DHRx register using
+ DAC_SetChannel1Data() or DAC_SetChannel2Data()
+
+ [..] Digital to Analog conversion can be triggered by:
+ (#) External event: EXTI Line 9 (any GPIOx_Pin9) using DAC_Trigger_Ext_IT9.
+ The used pin (GPIOx_Pin9) must be configured in input mode.
+
+ (#) Timers TRGO: TIM2, TIM3,TIM7, TIM6 and TIM15
+ (DAC_Trigger_T2_TRGO, DAC_Trigger_T3_TRGO...)
+ The timer TRGO event should be selected using TIM_SelectOutputTrigger()
+
+ (#) Software using DAC_Trigger_Software
+
+ [..] Each DAC integrates an output buffer that can be used to
+ reduce the output impedance, and to drive external loads directly
+ without having to add an external operational amplifier.
+ To enable the output buffer use
+ DAC_InitStructure.DAC_OutputBuffer = DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable;
+
+ [..] Refer to the device datasheet for more details about output impedance
+ value with and without output buffer.
+
+ [..] DAC wave generation feature
+ Both DAC channels can be used to generate
+ 1- Noise wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Noise
+ 2- Triangle wave using DAC_WaveGeneration_Triangle
+
+ [..] The DAC data format can be:
+ (#) 8-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_8b_R
+ (#) 12-bit left alignment using DAC_Align_12b_L
+ (#) 12-bit right alignment using DAC_Align_12b_R
+
+ [..] The analog output voltage on each DAC channel pin is determined
+ by the following equation: DAC_OUTx = VREF+ * DOR / 4095
+ with DOR is the Data Output Register
+ VEF+ is the input voltage reference (refer to the device datasheet)
+ e.g. To set DAC_OUT1 to 0.7V, use
+ DAC_SetChannel1Data(DAC_Align_12b_R, 868);
+ Assuming that VREF+ = 3.3, DAC_OUT1 = (3.3 * 868) / 4095 = 0.7V
+
+ [..] A DMA1 request can be generated when an external trigger (but not
+ a software trigger) occurs if DMA1 requests are enabled using
+ DAC_DMACmd()
+ DMA1 requests are mapped as following:
+ (+) DAC channel1 is mapped on DMA1 channel3 which must be already
+ configured
+ (+) DAC channel2 is mapped on DMA1 channel4 which must be already
+ configured
+
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ (+) Enable DAC APB1 clock to get write access to DAC registers
+ using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, ENABLE)
+
+ (+) Configure DAC_OUTx (DAC_OUT1: PA4, DAC_OUT2: PA5) in analog mode
+ using GPIO_Init() function
+
+ (+) Configure the DAC channel using DAC_Init()
+
+ (+) Enable the DAC channel using DAC_Cmd()
+
+ @endverbatim
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_dac.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DAC
+ * @brief DAC driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* CR register Mask */
+#define CR_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)0x00000FFE) /* check the value of the mask */
+
+/* DAC Dual Channels SWTRIG masks */
+#define DUAL_SWTRIG_SET ((uint32_t)0x00000003) /*!< Only applicable for STM32F072 devices */
+#define DUAL_SWTRIG_RESET ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFC) /*!< Only applicable for STM32F072 devices */
+
+/* DHR registers offsets */
+#define DHR12R1_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x00000008)
+#define DHR12R2_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x00000014) /*!< Only applicable for STM32F072 devices */
+#define DHR12RD_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x00000020) /*!< Only applicable for STM32F072 devices */
+
+/* DOR register offset */
+#define DOR_OFFSET ((uint32_t)0x0000002C)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup DAC_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DAC_Group1 DAC channels configuration
+ * @brief DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### DAC channels configuration: trigger, output buffer, data format #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the DAC peripheral registers to their default reset values.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_DeInit(void)
+{
+ /* Enable DAC reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, ENABLE);
+ /* Release DAC from reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_DAC, DISABLE);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the DAC peripheral according to the specified parameters
+ * in the DAC_InitStruct.
+ * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param DAC_InitStruct: pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DAC channel.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_Init(uint32_t DAC_Channel, DAC_InitTypeDef* DAC_InitStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg1 = 0, tmpreg2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the DAC parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_TRIGGER(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_GENERATE_WAVE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_LFSR_UNMASK_TRIANGLE_AMPLITUDE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_OUTPUT_BUFFER_STATE(DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer));
+
+/*---------------------------- DAC CR Configuration --------------------------*/
+ /* Get the DAC CR value */
+ tmpreg1 = DAC->CR;
+ /* Clear BOFFx, TENx, TSELx, WAVEx and MAMPx bits */
+ tmpreg1 &= ~(CR_CLEAR_MASK << DAC_Channel);
+ /* Configure for the selected DAC channel: buffer output, trigger,
+ wave generation, mask/amplitude for wave generation */
+ /* Set TSELx and TENx bits according to DAC_Trigger value */
+ /* Set WAVEx bits according to DAC_WaveGeneration value */
+ /* Set MAMPx bits according to DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude value */
+ /* Set BOFFx bit according to DAC_OutputBuffer value */
+ tmpreg2 = (DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger | DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration |
+ DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude | \
+ DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer);
+ /* Calculate CR register value depending on DAC_Channel */
+ tmpreg1 |= tmpreg2 << DAC_Channel;
+ /* Write to DAC CR */
+ DAC->CR = tmpreg1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each DAC_InitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param DAC_InitStruct: pointer to a DAC_InitTypeDef structure which will
+ * be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_StructInit(DAC_InitTypeDef* DAC_InitStruct)
+{
+/*--------------- Reset DAC init structure parameters values -----------------*/
+ /* Initialize the DAC_Trigger member */
+ DAC_InitStruct->DAC_Trigger = DAC_Trigger_None;
+
+ /* Initialize the DAC_WaveGeneration member */
+ DAC_InitStruct->DAC_WaveGeneration = DAC_WaveGeneration_None;
+
+ /* Initialize the DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude member */
+ DAC_InitStruct->DAC_LFSRUnmask_TriangleAmplitude = DAC_LFSRUnmask_Bit0;
+
+ /* Initialize the DAC_OutputBuffer member */
+ DAC_InitStruct->DAC_OutputBuffer = DAC_OutputBuffer_Enable;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified DAC channel.
+ * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param NewState: new state of the DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note When the DAC channel is enabled the trigger source can no more be modified.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_Cmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->CR |= (DAC_CR_EN1 << DAC_Channel);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->CR &= (~(DAC_CR_EN1 << DAC_Channel));
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the selected DAC channel software trigger.
+ * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel software trigger.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_SoftwareTriggerCmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable software trigger for the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->SWTRIGR |= (uint32_t)DAC_SWTRIGR_SWTRIG1 << (DAC_Channel >> 4);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable software trigger for the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->SWTRIGR &= ~((uint32_t)DAC_SWTRIGR_SWTRIG1 << (DAC_Channel >> 4));
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables simultaneously the two DAC channels software triggers.
+ * This function is applicable only for STM32F072 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the DAC channels software triggers.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_DualSoftwareTriggerCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable software trigger for both DAC channels */
+ DAC->SWTRIGR |= DUAL_SWTRIG_SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable software trigger for both DAC channels */
+ DAC->SWTRIGR &= DUAL_SWTRIG_RESET;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the selected DAC channel wave generation.
+ * This function is applicable only for STM32F072 devices.
+ * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected
+ * @param DAC_Wave: specifies the wave type to enable or disable.
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg DAC_Wave_Noise: noise wave generation
+ * @arg DAC_Wave_Triangle: triangle wave generation
+ * @param NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel wave generation.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_WaveGenerationCmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_Wave, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_WAVE(DAC_Wave));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected wave generation for the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->CR |= DAC_Wave << DAC_Channel;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected wave generation for the selected DAC channel */
+ DAC->CR &= ~(DAC_Wave << DAC_Channel);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Set the specified data holding register value for DAC channel1.
+ * @param DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignment for DAC channel1.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignment selected
+ * @arg DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignment selected
+ * @arg DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignment selected
+ * @param Data: Data to be loaded in the selected data holding register.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_SetChannel1Data(uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t Data)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data));
+
+ tmp = (uint32_t)DAC_BASE;
+ tmp += DHR12R1_OFFSET + DAC_Align;
+
+ /* Set the DAC channel1 selected data holding register */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp = Data;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the specified data holding register value for DAC channel2.
+ * This function is applicable only for STM32F072 devices.
+ * @param DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignment for DAC channel2.
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignment selected
+ * @arg DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignment selected
+ * @arg DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignment selected
+ * @param Data: Data to be loaded in the selected data holding register.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_SetChannel2Data(uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t Data)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data));
+
+ tmp = (uint32_t)DAC_BASE;
+ tmp += DHR12R2_OFFSET + DAC_Align;
+
+ /* Set the DAC channel2 selected data holding register */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)tmp = Data;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the specified data holding register value for dual channel DAC.
+ * This function is applicable only for STM32F072 devices.
+ * @param DAC_Align: Specifies the data alignment for dual channel DAC.
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg DAC_Align_8b_R: 8bit right data alignment selected
+ * @arg DAC_Align_12b_L: 12bit left data alignment selected
+ * @arg DAC_Align_12b_R: 12bit right data alignment selected
+ * @param Data2: Data for DAC Channel2 to be loaded in the selected data holding register.
+ * @param Data1: Data for DAC Channel1 to be loaded in the selected data holding register.
+ * @note In dual mode, a unique register access is required to write in both
+ * DAC channels at the same time.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_SetDualChannelData(uint32_t DAC_Align, uint16_t Data2, uint16_t Data1)
+{
+ uint32_t data = 0, tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_ALIGN(DAC_Align));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data1));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_DATA(Data2));
+
+ /* Calculate and set dual DAC data holding register value */
+ if (DAC_Align == DAC_Align_8b_R)
+ {
+ data = ((uint32_t)Data2 << 8) | Data1;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ data = ((uint32_t)Data2 << 16) | Data1;
+ }
+
+ tmp = (uint32_t)DAC_BASE;
+ tmp += DHR12RD_OFFSET + DAC_Align;
+
+ /* Set the dual DAC selected data holding register */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)tmp = data;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the last data output value of the selected DAC channel.
+ * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @retval The selected DAC channel data output value.
+ */
+uint16_t DAC_GetDataOutputValue(uint32_t DAC_Channel)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+
+ tmp = (uint32_t) DAC_BASE ;
+ tmp += DOR_OFFSET + ((uint32_t)DAC_Channel >> 2);
+
+ /* Returns the DAC channel data output register value */
+ return (uint16_t) (*(__IO uint32_t*) tmp);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DAC_Group2 DMA management functions
+ * @brief DMA management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### DMA management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified DAC channel DMA request.
+ * When enabled DMA1 is generated when an external trigger (EXTI Line9,
+ * TIM2, TIM3, TIM6 or TIM15 but not a software trigger) occurs
+ * @param DAC_Channel: the selected DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param NewState: new state of the selected DAC channel DMA request.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note The DAC channel1 is mapped on DMA1 channel3 which must be already configured.
+ * @note The DAC channel2 is mapped on DMA1 channel4 which must be already configured.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_DMACmd(uint32_t DAC_Channel, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected DAC channel DMA request */
+ DAC->CR |= (DAC_CR_DMAEN1 << DAC_Channel);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected DAC channel DMA request */
+ DAC->CR &= (~(DAC_CR_DMAEN1 << DAC_Channel));
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DAC_Group3 Interrupts and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified DAC interrupts.
+ * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param DAC_IT: specifies the DAC interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled.
+ * This parameter can be the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_IT_DMAUDR: DMA underrun interrupt mask
+ * @note The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger arrives before the
+ * acknowledgement for the first external trigger is received (first request).
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified DAC interrupts.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_ITConfig(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_IT(DAC_IT));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected DAC interrupts */
+ DAC->CR |= (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected DAC interrupts */
+ DAC->CR &= (~(uint32_t)(DAC_IT << DAC_Channel));
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified DAC flag is set or not.
+ * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param DAC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be only of the following value:
+ * @arg DAC_FLAG_DMAUDR: DMA underrun flag
+ * @note The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger arrives before the
+ * acknowledgement for the first external trigger is received (first request).
+ * @retval The new state of DAC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus DAC_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_FLAG(DAC_FLAG));
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified DAC flag */
+ if ((DAC->SR & (DAC_FLAG << DAC_Channel)) != (uint8_t)RESET)
+ {
+ /* DAC_FLAG is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* DAC_FLAG is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the DAC_FLAG status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the DAC channel's pending flags.
+ * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param DAC_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+ * This parameter can be of the following value:
+ * @arg DAC_FLAG_DMAUDR: DMA underrun flag
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_ClearFlag(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_FLAG(DAC_FLAG));
+
+ /* Clear the selected DAC flags */
+ DAC->SR = (DAC_FLAG << DAC_Channel);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified DAC interrupt has occurred or not.
+ * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param DAC_IT: specifies the DAC interrupt source to check.
+ * This parameter can be the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_IT_DMAUDR: DMA underrun interrupt mask
+ * @note The DMA underrun occurs when a second external trigger arrives before the
+ * acknowledgement for the first external trigger is received (first request).
+ * @retval The new state of DAC_IT (SET or RESET).
+ */
+ITStatus DAC_GetITStatus(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ uint32_t enablestatus = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_IT(DAC_IT));
+
+ /* Get the DAC_IT enable bit status */
+ enablestatus = (DAC->CR & (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel)) ;
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified DAC interrupt */
+ if (((DAC->SR & (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel)) != (uint32_t)RESET) && enablestatus)
+ {
+ /* DAC_IT is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* DAC_IT is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the DAC_IT status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the DAC channel's interrupt pending bits.
+ * @param DAC_Channel: The selected DAC channel.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_1: DAC Channel1 selected
+ * @arg DAC_Channel_2: DAC Channel2 selected, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param DAC_IT: specifies the DAC interrupt pending bit to clear.
+ * This parameter can be the following values:
+ * @arg DAC_IT_DMAUDR: DMA underrun interrupt mask
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DAC_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t DAC_Channel, uint32_t DAC_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_CHANNEL(DAC_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_DAC_IT(DAC_IT));
+
+ /* Clear the selected DAC interrupt pending bits */
+ DAC->SR = (DAC_IT << DAC_Channel);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_dbgmcu.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_dbgmcu.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_dbgmcu.c
@@ -0,0 +1,218 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_dbgmcu.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Debug MCU (DBGMCU) peripheral:
+ * + Device and Revision ID management
+ * + Peripherals Configuration
+ * @verbatim
+ * @endverbatim
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_dbgmcu.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DBGMCU
+ * @brief DBGMCU driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define IDCODE_DEVID_MASK ((uint32_t)0x00000FFF)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup DBGMCU_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup DBGMCU_Group1 Device and Revision ID management functions
+ * @brief Device and Revision ID management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Device and Revision ID management functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the device revision identifier.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval Device revision identifier
+ */
+uint32_t DBGMCU_GetREVID(void)
+{
+ return(DBGMCU->IDCODE >> 16);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the device identifier.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval Device identifier
+ */
+uint32_t DBGMCU_GetDEVID(void)
+{
+ return(DBGMCU->IDCODE & IDCODE_DEVID_MASK);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DBGMCU_Group2 Peripherals Configuration functions
+ * @brief Peripherals Configuration
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Peripherals Configuration functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures low power mode behavior when the MCU is in Debug mode.
+ * @param DBGMCU_Periph: specifies the low power mode.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg DBGMCU_STOP: Keep debugger connection during STOP mode
+ * @arg DBGMCU_STANDBY: Keep debugger connection during STANDBY mode
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified low power mode in Debug mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DBGMCU_Config(uint32_t DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DBGMCU_PERIPH(DBGMCU_Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ DBGMCU->CR |= DBGMCU_Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ DBGMCU->CR &= ~DBGMCU_Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures APB1 peripheral behavior when the MCU is in Debug mode.
+ * @param DBGMCU_Periph: specifies the APB1 peripheral.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg DBGMCU_TIM2_STOP: TIM2 counter stopped when Core is halted,
+ * not applicable for STM32F030 devices
+ * @arg DBGMCU_TIM3_STOP: TIM3 counter stopped when Core is halted
+ * @arg DBGMCU_TIM6_STOP: TIM6 counter stopped when Core is halted
+ * @arg DBGMCU_TIM7_STOP: TIM7 counter stopped when Core is halted,
+ * applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg DBGMCU_TIM14_STOP: TIM14 counter stopped when Core is halted
+ * @arg DBGMCU_RTC_STOP: RTC Calendar and Wakeup counter stopped
+ * when Core is halted.
+ * @arg DBGMCU_WWDG_STOP: Debug WWDG stopped when Core is halted
+ * @arg DBGMCU_IWDG_STOP: Debug IWDG stopped when Core is halted
+ * @arg DBGMCU_I2C1_SMBUS_TIMEOUT: I2C1 SMBUS timeout mode stopped
+ * when Core is halted
+ * @arg DBGMCU_CAN1_STOP: Debug CAN1 stopped when Core is halted,
+ * applicable only for STM32F042 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified APB1 peripheral in Debug mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DBGMCU_APB1PeriphConfig(uint32_t DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DBGMCU_APB1PERIPH(DBGMCU_Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ DBGMCU->APB1FZ |= DBGMCU_Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ DBGMCU->APB1FZ &= ~DBGMCU_Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures APB2 peripheral behavior when the MCU is in Debug mode.
+ * @param DBGMCU_Periph: specifies the APB2 peripheral.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg DBGMCU_TIM1_STOP: TIM1 counter stopped when Core is halted
+ * @arg DBGMCU_TIM15_STOP: TIM15 counter stopped when Core is halted
+ * @arg DBGMCU_TIM16_STOP: TIM16 counter stopped when Core is halted
+ * @arg DBGMCU_TIM17_STOP: TIM17 counter stopped when Core is halted
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified APB2 peripheral in Debug mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DBGMCU_APB2PeriphConfig(uint32_t DBGMCU_Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DBGMCU_APB2PERIPH(DBGMCU_Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ DBGMCU->APB2FZ |= DBGMCU_Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ DBGMCU->APB2FZ &= ~DBGMCU_Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_dma.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_dma.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_dma.c
@@ -0,0 +1,891 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_dma.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Direct Memory Access controller (DMA):
+ * + Initialization and Configuration
+ * + Data Counter
+ * + Interrupts and flags management
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ (#) Enable The DMA controller clock using
+ RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA1, ENABLE) function for DMA1.
+ (#) Enable and configure the peripheral to be connected to the DMA channel
+ (except for internal SRAM / FLASH memories: no initialization is necessary).
+ (#) For a given Channel, program the Source and Destination addresses,
+ the transfer Direction, the Buffer Size, the Peripheral and Memory
+ Incrementation mode and Data Size, the Circular or Normal mode,
+ the channel transfer Priority and the Memory-to-Memory transfer
+ mode (if needed) using the DMA_Init() function.
+ (#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt(s) using the function
+ DMA_ITConfig() if you need to use DMA interrupts.
+ (#) Enable the DMA channel using the DMA_Cmd() function.
+ (#) Activate the needed channel Request using PPP_DMACmd() function for
+ any PPP peripheral except internal SRAM and FLASH (ie. SPI, USART ...)
+ The function allowing this operation is provided in each PPP peripheral
+ driver (ie. SPI_DMACmd for SPI peripheral).
+ (#) Optionally, you can configure the number of data to be transferred
+ when the channel is disabled (ie. after each Transfer Complete event
+ or when a Transfer Error occurs) using the function DMA_SetCurrDataCounter().
+ And you can get the number of remaining data to be transferred using
+ the function DMA_GetCurrDataCounter() at run time (when the DMA channel is
+ enabled and running).
+ (#) To control DMA events you can use one of the following two methods:
+ (##) Check on DMA channel flags using the function DMA_GetFlagStatus().
+ (##) Use DMA interrupts through the function DMA_ITConfig() at initialization
+ phase and DMA_GetITStatus() function into interrupt routines in
+ communication phase.
+ After checking on a flag you should clear it using DMA_ClearFlag()
+ function. And after checking on an interrupt event you should
+ clear it using DMA_ClearITPendingBit() function.
+ @endverbatim
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_dma.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DMA
+ * @brief DMA driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define CCR_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFF800F) /* DMA Channel config registers Masks */
+#define FLAG_Mask ((uint32_t)0x10000000) /* DMA2 FLAG mask */
+
+/* DMA1 Channelx interrupt pending bit masks */
+#define DMA1_CHANNEL1_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF1 | DMA_ISR_TCIF1 | DMA_ISR_HTIF1 | DMA_ISR_TEIF1))
+#define DMA1_CHANNEL2_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF2 | DMA_ISR_TCIF2 | DMA_ISR_HTIF2 | DMA_ISR_TEIF2))
+#define DMA1_CHANNEL3_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF3 | DMA_ISR_TCIF3 | DMA_ISR_HTIF3 | DMA_ISR_TEIF3))
+#define DMA1_CHANNEL4_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF4 | DMA_ISR_TCIF4 | DMA_ISR_HTIF4 | DMA_ISR_TEIF4))
+#define DMA1_CHANNEL5_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF5 | DMA_ISR_TCIF5 | DMA_ISR_HTIF5 | DMA_ISR_TEIF5))
+#define DMA1_CHANNEL6_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF6 | DMA_ISR_TCIF6 | DMA_ISR_HTIF6 | DMA_ISR_TEIF6)) /*!< Only applicable for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices */
+#define DMA1_CHANNEL7_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF7 | DMA_ISR_TCIF7 | DMA_ISR_HTIF7 | DMA_ISR_TEIF7)) /*!< Only applicable for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices */
+
+/* DMA2 Channelx interrupt pending bit masks: Only applicable for STM32F091 devices */
+#define DMA2_CHANNEL1_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF1 | DMA_ISR_TCIF1 | DMA_ISR_HTIF1 | DMA_ISR_TEIF1))
+#define DMA2_CHANNEL2_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF2 | DMA_ISR_TCIF2 | DMA_ISR_HTIF2 | DMA_ISR_TEIF2))
+#define DMA2_CHANNEL3_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF3 | DMA_ISR_TCIF3 | DMA_ISR_HTIF3 | DMA_ISR_TEIF3))
+#define DMA2_CHANNEL4_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF4 | DMA_ISR_TCIF4 | DMA_ISR_HTIF4 | DMA_ISR_TEIF4))
+#define DMA2_CHANNEL5_IT_MASK ((uint32_t)(DMA_ISR_GIF5 | DMA_ISR_TCIF5 | DMA_ISR_HTIF5 | DMA_ISR_TEIF5))
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions
+ * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides functions allowing to initialize the DMA channel
+ source and destination addresses, incrementation and data sizes, transfer
+ direction, buffer size, circular/normal mode selection, memory-to-memory
+ mode selection and channel priority value.
+ [..] The DMA_Init() function follows the DMA configuration procedures as described
+ in reference manual (RM0091).
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the DMAy Channelx registers to their default reset
+ * values.
+ * @param DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 to select the DMA and
+ * x can be 1 to 7 for DMA1 to select the DMA Channel.
+ * @note Channel 6 and 7 are available only for STM32F072 devices.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DMA_DeInit(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx));
+
+ /* Disable the selected DMAy Channelx */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR &= (uint16_t)(~DMA_CCR_EN);
+
+ /* Reset DMAy Channelx control register */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR = 0;
+
+ /* Reset DMAy Channelx remaining bytes register */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CNDTR = 0;
+
+ /* Reset DMAy Channelx peripheral address register */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CPAR = 0;
+
+ /* Reset DMAy Channelx memory address register */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CMAR = 0;
+
+ if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA1_Channel1)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel1 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_CHANNEL1_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ else if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA1_Channel2)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel2 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_CHANNEL2_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ else if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA1_Channel3)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel3 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_CHANNEL3_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ else if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA1_Channel4)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel4 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_CHANNEL4_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ else if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA1_Channel5)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel5 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_CHANNEL5_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ else if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA1_Channel6)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel6 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_CHANNEL6_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ else if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA1_Channel7)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA1 Channel7 */
+ DMA1->IFCR |= DMA1_CHANNEL7_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ else if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA2_Channel1)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel1 */
+ DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_CHANNEL1_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ else if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA2_Channel2)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel2 */
+ DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_CHANNEL2_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ else if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA2_Channel3)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel3 */
+ DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_CHANNEL3_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ else if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA2_Channel4)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel4 */
+ DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_CHANNEL4_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (DMAy_Channelx == DMA2_Channel5)
+ {
+ /* Reset interrupt pending bits for DMA2 Channel5 */
+ DMA2->IFCR |= DMA2_CHANNEL5_IT_MASK;
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the DMAy Channelx according to the specified parameters
+ * in the DMA_InitStruct.
+ * @param DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 to select the DMA and x can be 1 to 7
+ * for DMA1 to select the DMA Channel and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the DMA Channel.
+ * @note DMA1 Channel 6 and 7 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note DMA2 Channel 1 to 5 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param DMA_InitStruct: pointer to a DMA_InitTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified DMA Channel.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DMA_Init(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, DMA_InitTypeDef* DMA_InitStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_DIR(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_DIR));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_BUFFER_SIZE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_BufferSize));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_PERIPHERAL_INC_STATE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralInc));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_MEMORY_INC_STATE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryInc));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_PERIPHERAL_DATA_SIZE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralDataSize));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_MEMORY_DATA_SIZE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryDataSize));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_MODE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_PRIORITY(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Priority));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_M2M_STATE(DMA_InitStruct->DMA_M2M));
+
+/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CCR Configuration ----------------*/
+ /* Get the DMAy_Channelx CCR value */
+ tmpreg = DMAy_Channelx->CCR;
+
+ /* Clear MEM2MEM, PL, MSIZE, PSIZE, MINC, PINC, CIRC and DIR bits */
+ tmpreg &= CCR_CLEAR_MASK;
+
+ /* Configure DMAy Channelx: data transfer, data size, priority level and mode */
+ /* Set DIR bit according to DMA_DIR value */
+ /* Set CIRC bit according to DMA_Mode value */
+ /* Set PINC bit according to DMA_PeripheralInc value */
+ /* Set MINC bit according to DMA_MemoryInc value */
+ /* Set PSIZE bits according to DMA_PeripheralDataSize value */
+ /* Set MSIZE bits according to DMA_MemoryDataSize value */
+ /* Set PL bits according to DMA_Priority value */
+ /* Set the MEM2MEM bit according to DMA_M2M value */
+ tmpreg |= DMA_InitStruct->DMA_DIR | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Mode |
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralInc | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryInc |
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralDataSize | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryDataSize |
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Priority | DMA_InitStruct->DMA_M2M;
+
+ /* Write to DMAy Channelx CCR */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR = tmpreg;
+
+/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CNDTR Configuration --------------*/
+ /* Write to DMAy Channelx CNDTR */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CNDTR = DMA_InitStruct->DMA_BufferSize;
+
+/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CPAR Configuration ---------------*/
+ /* Write to DMAy Channelx CPAR */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CPAR = DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralBaseAddr;
+
+/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CMAR Configuration ---------------*/
+ /* Write to DMAy Channelx CMAR */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CMAR = DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryBaseAddr;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each DMA_InitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param DMA_InitStruct: pointer to a DMA_InitTypeDef structure which will
+ * be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DMA_StructInit(DMA_InitTypeDef* DMA_InitStruct)
+{
+/*-------------- Reset DMA init structure parameters values ------------------*/
+ /* Initialize the DMA_PeripheralBaseAddr member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralBaseAddr = 0;
+ /* Initialize the DMA_MemoryBaseAddr member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryBaseAddr = 0;
+ /* Initialize the DMA_DIR member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_DIR = DMA_DIR_PeripheralSRC;
+ /* Initialize the DMA_BufferSize member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_BufferSize = 0;
+ /* Initialize the DMA_PeripheralInc member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralInc = DMA_PeripheralInc_Disable;
+ /* Initialize the DMA_MemoryInc member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryInc = DMA_MemoryInc_Disable;
+ /* Initialize the DMA_PeripheralDataSize member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_PeripheralDataSize = DMA_PeripheralDataSize_Byte;
+ /* Initialize the DMA_MemoryDataSize member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_MemoryDataSize = DMA_MemoryDataSize_Byte;
+ /* Initialize the DMA_Mode member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Mode = DMA_Mode_Normal;
+ /* Initialize the DMA_Priority member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_Priority = DMA_Priority_Low;
+ /* Initialize the DMA_M2M member */
+ DMA_InitStruct->DMA_M2M = DMA_M2M_Disable;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified DMAy Channelx.
+ * @param DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 to select the DMA and x can be 1 to 7
+ * for DMA1 to select the DMA Channel and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the DMA Channel.
+ * @note DMA1 Channel 6 and 7 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note DMA2 Channel 1 to 5 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the DMAy Channelx.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DMA_Cmd(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected DMAy Channelx */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR |= DMA_CCR_EN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected DMAy Channelx */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR &= (uint16_t)(~DMA_CCR_EN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the DMAx channels remapping.
+ * @param DMAy: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA peripheral.
+ * @param DMAy_CHx_RemapRequest: where y can be 1 or 2 to select the DMA and x can be 1 to 7
+ * for DMA1 to select the DMA1 Channel and can be 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the DMA2 Channel.
+ * @note This function is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DMA_RemapConfig(DMA_TypeDef* DMAy, uint32_t DMAx_CHy_RemapRequest)
+{
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_LIST(DMAy));
+
+ if (DMAy == DMA1)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_DMA1_REMAP(DMAx_CHy_RemapRequest));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_DMA2_REMAP(DMAx_CHy_RemapRequest));
+ }
+
+ DMAy->RMPCR &= ~((uint32_t)0x0F << (uint32_t)((DMAx_CHy_RemapRequest >> 28) * 4));
+ DMAy->RMPCR |= (uint32_t)(DMAx_CHy_RemapRequest & 0x0FFFFFFF);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Group2 Data Counter functions
+ * @brief Data Counter functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Data Counter functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides function allowing to configure and read the buffer
+ size (number of data to be transferred).The DMA data counter can be written
+ only when the DMA channel is disabled (ie. after transfer complete event).
+ [..] The following function can be used to write the Channel data counter value:
+ (+) void DMA_SetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, uint16_t
+ DataNumber).
+ -@- It is advised to use this function rather than DMA_Init() in situations
+ where only the Data buffer needs to be reloaded.
+ [..] The DMA data counter can be read to indicate the number of remaining transfers
+ for the relative DMA channel. This counter is decremented at the end of each
+ data transfer and when the transfer is complete:
+ (+) If Normal mode is selected: the counter is set to 0.
+ (+) If Circular mode is selected: the counter is reloaded with the initial
+ value(configured before enabling the DMA channel).
+ [..] The following function can be used to read the Channel data counter value:
+ (+) uint16_t DMA_GetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx).
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the number of data units in the current DMAy Channelx transfer.
+ * @param DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 to select the DMA and x can be 1 to 7
+ * for DMA1 to select the DMA Channel and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the DMA Channel.
+ * @note DMA1 Channel 6 and 7 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note DMA2 Channel 1 to 5 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param DataNumber: The number of data units in the current DMAy Channelx
+ * transfer.
+ * @note This function can only be used when the DMAy_Channelx is disabled.
+ * @retval None.
+ */
+void DMA_SetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, uint16_t DataNumber)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx));
+
+/*--------------------------- DMAy Channelx CNDTR Configuration --------------*/
+ /* Write to DMAy Channelx CNDTR */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CNDTR = DataNumber;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the number of remaining data units in the current
+ * DMAy Channelx transfer.
+ * @param DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 to select the DMA and x can be 1 to 7
+ * for DMA1 to select the DMA Channel and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the DMA Channel.
+ * @note DMA1 Channel 6 and 7 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note DMA2 Channel 1 to 5 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @retval The number of remaining data units in the current DMAy Channelx
+ * transfer.
+ */
+uint16_t DMA_GetCurrDataCounter(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx));
+ /* Return the number of remaining data units for DMAy Channelx */
+ return ((uint16_t)(DMAy_Channelx->CNDTR));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup DMA_Group3 Interrupts and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides functions allowing to configure the DMA Interrupts
+ sources and check or clear the flags or pending bits status.
+ The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
+ the DMA controller events: Polling mode or Interrupt mode.
+ *** Polling Mode ***
+ ====================
+ [..] Each DMA channel can be managed through 4 event Flags:(y : DMA Controller
+ number x : DMA channel number ).
+ (#) DMAy_FLAG_TCx : to indicate that a Transfer Complete event occurred.
+ (#) DMAy_FLAG_HTx : to indicate that a Half-Transfer Complete event occurred.
+ (#) DMAy_FLAG_TEx : to indicate that a Transfer Error occurred.
+ (#) DMAy_FLAG_GLx : to indicate that at least one of the events described
+ above occurred.
+ -@- Clearing DMAy_FLAG_GLx results in clearing all other pending flags of the
+ same channel (DMAy_FLAG_TCx, DMAy_FLAG_HTx and DMAy_FLAG_TEx).
+ [..]In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
+ (+) FlagStatus DMA_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t DMA_FLAG);
+ (+) void DMA_ClearFlag(uint32_t DMA_FLAG);
+
+ *** Interrupt Mode ***
+ ======================
+ [..] Each DMA channel can be managed through 4 Interrupts:
+ (+) Interrupt Source
+ (##) DMA_IT_TC: specifies the interrupt source for the Transfer Complete
+ event.
+ (##) DMA_IT_HT : specifies the interrupt source for the Half-transfer Complete
+ event.
+ (##) DMA_IT_TE : specifies the interrupt source for the transfer errors event.
+ (##) DMA_IT_GL : to indicate that at least one of the interrupts described
+ above occurred.
+ -@@- Clearing DMA_IT_GL interrupt results in clearing all other interrupts of
+ the same channel (DMA_IT_TCx, DMA_IT_HT and DMA_IT_TE).
+ [..]In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
+ (+) void DMA_ITConfig(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, uint32_t DMA_IT,
+ FunctionalState NewState);
+ (+) ITStatus DMA_GetITStatus(uint32_t DMA_IT);
+ (+) void DMA_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t DMA_IT);
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified DMAy Channelx interrupts.
+ * @param DMAy_Channelx: where y can be 1 to select the DMA and x can be 1 to 7
+ * for DMA1 to select the DMA Channel and 1 to 5 for DMA2 to select the DMA Channel.
+ * @note DMA1 Channel 6 and 7 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note DMA2 Channel 1 to 5 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param DMA_IT: specifies the DMA interrupts sources to be enabled
+ * or disabled.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg DMA_IT_TC: Transfer complete interrupt mask
+ * @arg DMA_IT_HT: Half transfer interrupt mask
+ * @arg DMA_IT_TE: Transfer error interrupt mask
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified DMA interrupts.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DMA_ITConfig(DMA_Channel_TypeDef* DMAy_Channelx, uint32_t DMA_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_ALL_PERIPH(DMAy_Channelx));
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_CONFIG_IT(DMA_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected DMA interrupts */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR |= DMA_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected DMA interrupts */
+ DMAy_Channelx->CCR &= ~DMA_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified DMAy Channelx flag is set or not.
+ * @param DMA_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @note The Global flag (DMAy_FLAG_GLx) is set whenever any of the other flags
+ * relative to the same channel is set (Transfer Complete, Half-transfer
+ * Complete or Transfer Error flags: DMAy_FLAG_TCx, DMAy_FLAG_HTx or
+ * DMAy_FLAG_TEx).
+ *
+ * @retval The new state of DMA_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus DMA_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t DMAy_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_GET_FLAG(DMAy_FLAG));
+
+ /* Calculate the used DMAy */
+ if ((DMAy_FLAG & FLAG_Mask) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ /* Get DMA2 ISR register value */
+ tmpreg = DMA2->ISR ;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Get DMA1 ISR register value */
+ tmpreg = DMA1->ISR ;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified DMAy flag */
+ if ((tmpreg & DMAy_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ /* DMAy_FLAG is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* DMAy_FLAG is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the DMAy_FLAG status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the DMAy Channelx's pending flags.
+ * @param DMA_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination (for the same DMA) of the following values:
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error flag.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_FLAG_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_FLAG_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error flag, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ *
+ * @note Clearing the Global flag (DMAy_FLAG_GLx) results in clearing all other flags
+ * relative to the same channel (Transfer Complete, Half-transfer Complete and
+ * Transfer Error flags: DMAy_FLAG_TCx, DMAy_FLAG_HTx and DMAy_FLAG_TEx).
+ *
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DMA_ClearFlag(uint32_t DMAy_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_CLEAR_FLAG(DMAy_FLAG));
+
+/* Calculate the used DMAy */
+ if ((DMAy_FLAG & FLAG_Mask) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ /* Clear the selected DMAy flags */
+ DMA2->IFCR = DMAy_FLAG;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Clear the selected DMAy flags */
+ DMA1->IFCR = DMAy_FLAG;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified DMAy Channelx interrupt has occurred or not.
+ * @param DMA_IT: specifies the DMA interrupt source to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @note The Global interrupt (DMAy_FLAG_GLx) is set whenever any of the other
+ * interrupts relative to the same channel is set (Transfer Complete,
+ * Half-transfer Complete or Transfer Error interrupts: DMAy_IT_TCx,
+ * DMAy_IT_HTx or DMAy_IT_TEx).
+ *
+ * @retval The new state of DMA_IT (SET or RESET).
+ */
+ITStatus DMA_GetITStatus(uint32_t DMAy_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_GET_IT(DMAy_IT));
+
+ /* Calculate the used DMA */
+ if ((DMAy_IT & FLAG_Mask) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ /* Get DMA2 ISR register value */
+ tmpreg = DMA2->ISR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Get DMA1 ISR register value */
+ tmpreg = DMA1->ISR;
+ }
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified DMAy interrupt */
+ if ((tmpreg & DMAy_IT) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ /* DMAy_IT is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* DMAy_IT is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the DMAy_IT status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the DMAy Channelx's interrupt pending bits.
+ * @param DMA_IT: specifies the DMA interrupt pending bit to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination (for the same DMA) of the following values:
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL1: DMA1 Channel1 global interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT1: DMA1 Channel1 half transfer interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE1: DMA1 Channel1 transfer error interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL2: DMA1 Channel2 global interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT2: DMA1 Channel2 half transfer interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE2: DMA1 Channel2 transfer error interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL3: DMA1 Channel3 global interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT3: DMA1 Channel3 half transfer interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE3: DMA1 Channel3 transfer error interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL4: DMA1 Channel4 global interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT4: DMA1 Channel4 half transfer interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE4: DMA1 Channel4 transfer error interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL5: DMA1 Channel5 global interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT5: DMA1 Channel5 half transfer interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE5: DMA1 Channel5 transfer error interrupt.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL6: DMA1 Channel6 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT6: DMA1 Channel6 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE6: DMA1 Channel6 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_GL7: DMA1 Channel7 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TC7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_HT7: DMA1 Channel7 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA1_IT_TE7: DMA1 Channel7 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_GL1: DMA2 Channel1 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TC1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_HT1: DMA2 Channel1 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TE1: DMA2 Channel1 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_GL2: DMA2 Channel2 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TC2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_HT2: DMA2 Channel2 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TE2: DMA2 Channel2 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_GL3: DMA2 Channel3 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TC3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_HT3: DMA2 Channel3 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TE3: DMA2 Channel3 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_GL4: DMA2 Channel4 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TC4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_HT4: DMA2 Channel4 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TE4: DMA2 Channel4 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_GL5: DMA2 Channel5 global interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TC5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer complete interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_HT5: DMA2 Channel5 half transfer interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ * @arg DMA2_IT_TE5: DMA2 Channel5 transfer error interrupt, applicable only for STM32FO91 devices.
+ *
+ * @note Clearing the Global interrupt (DMAy_IT_GLx) results in clearing all other
+ * interrupts relative to the same channel (Transfer Complete, Half-transfer
+ * Complete and Transfer Error interrupts: DMAy_IT_TCx, DMAy_IT_HTx and
+ * DMAy_IT_TEx).
+ *
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void DMA_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t DMAy_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_DMA_CLEAR_IT(DMAy_IT));
+
+ /* Calculate the used DMAy */
+ if ((DMAy_IT & FLAG_Mask) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ /* Clear the selected DMAy interrupt pending bits */
+ DMA2->IFCR = DMAy_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Clear the selected DMAy interrupt pending bits */
+ DMA1->IFCR = DMAy_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_exti.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_exti.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_exti.c
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_exti.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the EXTI peripheral:
+ * + Initialization and Configuration
+ * + Interrupts and flags management
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### EXTI features #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..] External interrupt/event lines are mapped as following:
+ (#) All available GPIO pins are connected to the 16 external
+ interrupt/event lines from EXTI0 to EXTI15.
+ (#) EXTI line 16 is connected to the PVD output, not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ (#) EXTI line 17 is connected to the RTC Alarm event.
+ (#) EXTI line 18 is connected to the RTC Alarm event, applicable only for STM32F072 devices.
+ (#) EXTI line 19 is connected to the RTC Tamper and TimeStamp events.
+ (#) EXTI line 20 is connected to the RTC wakeup event, applicable only for STM32F072 devices.
+ (#) EXTI line 21 is connected to the Comparator 1 wakeup event, applicable only for STM32F051 and STM32F072 devices.
+ (#) EXTI line 22 is connected to the Comparator 2 wakeup event, applicable only for STM32F051 and STM32F072 devices.
+ (#) EXTI line 23 is connected to the I2C1 wakeup event, not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ (#) EXTI line 25 is connected to the USART1 wakeup event, not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ (#) EXTI line 26 is connected to the USART2 wakeup event, applicable only for STM32F072 devices.
+ (#) EXTI line 27 is connected to the CEC wakeup event, applicable only for STM32F051 and STM32F072 devices.
+ (#) EXTI line 31 is connected to the VDD USB monitor event, applicable only for STM32F072 devices.
+
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..] In order to use an I/O pin as an external interrupt source, follow
+ steps below:
+ (#) Configure the I/O in input mode using GPIO_Init()
+ (#) Select the input source pin for the EXTI line using
+ SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig().
+ (#) Select the mode(interrupt, event) and configure the trigger selection
+ (Rising, falling or both) using EXTI_Init(). For the internal interrupt,
+ the trigger selection is not needed( the active edge is always the rising one).
+ (#) Configure NVIC IRQ channel mapped to the EXTI line using NVIC_Init().
+ (#) Optionally, you can generate a software interrupt using the function EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt().
+ [..]
+ (@) SYSCFG APB clock must be enabled to get write access to SYSCFG_EXTICRx
+ registers using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG, ENABLE);
+ @endverbatim
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_exti.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup EXTI
+ * @brief EXTI driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define EXTI_LINENONE ((uint32_t)0x00000) /* No interrupt selected */
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup EXTI_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup EXTI_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions
+ * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the EXTI peripheral registers to their default reset
+ * values.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void EXTI_DeInit(void)
+{
+ EXTI->IMR = 0x0F940000;
+ EXTI->EMR = 0x00000000;
+ EXTI->RTSR = 0x00000000;
+ EXTI->FTSR = 0x00000000;
+ EXTI->PR = 0x006BFFFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the EXTI peripheral according to the specified
+ * parameters in the EXTI_InitStruct.
+ * @param EXTI_InitStruct: pointer to a EXTI_InitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the EXTI peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void EXTI_Init(EXTI_InitTypeDef* EXTI_InitStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_MODE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_TRIGGER(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger));
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd));
+
+ tmp = (uint32_t)EXTI_BASE;
+
+ if (EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Clear EXTI line configuration */
+ EXTI->IMR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ EXTI->EMR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+
+ tmp += EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode;
+
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+
+ /* Clear Rising Falling edge configuration */
+ EXTI->RTSR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ EXTI->FTSR &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+
+ /* Select the trigger for the selected interrupts */
+ if (EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger == EXTI_Trigger_Rising_Falling)
+ {
+ /* Rising Falling edge */
+ EXTI->RTSR |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ EXTI->FTSR |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmp = (uint32_t)EXTI_BASE;
+ tmp += EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger;
+
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp |= EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmp += EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode;
+
+ /* Disable the selected external lines */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp &= ~EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each EXTI_InitStruct member with its reset value.
+ * @param EXTI_InitStruct: pointer to a EXTI_InitTypeDef structure which will
+ * be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void EXTI_StructInit(EXTI_InitTypeDef* EXTI_InitStruct)
+{
+ EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Line = EXTI_LINENONE;
+ EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Mode = EXTI_Mode_Interrupt;
+ EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_Trigger = EXTI_Trigger_Falling;
+ EXTI_InitStruct->EXTI_LineCmd = DISABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Generates a Software interrupt on selected EXTI line.
+ * @param EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI line on which the software interrupt
+ * will be generated.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where x can be (0..27).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void EXTI_GenerateSWInterrupt(uint32_t EXTI_Line)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line));
+
+ EXTI->SWIER |= EXTI_Line;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup EXTI_Group2 Interrupts and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified EXTI line flag is set or not.
+ * @param EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI line flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be EXTI_Linex where x can be (0..27).
+ * @retval The new state of EXTI_Line (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus EXTI_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t EXTI_Line)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GET_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line));
+
+ if ((EXTI->PR & EXTI_Line) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the EXTI's line pending flags.
+ * @param EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI lines flags to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where x can be (0..27).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void EXTI_ClearFlag(uint32_t EXTI_Line)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line));
+
+ EXTI->PR = EXTI_Line;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified EXTI line is asserted or not.
+ * @param EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI line to check.
+ * This parameter can be EXTI_Linex where x can be (0..27).
+ * @retval The new state of EXTI_Line (SET or RESET).
+ */
+ITStatus EXTI_GetITStatus(uint32_t EXTI_Line)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GET_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line));
+
+ if ((EXTI->PR & EXTI_Line) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the EXTI's line pending bits.
+ * @param EXTI_Line: specifies the EXTI lines to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of EXTI_Linex where x can be (0..27).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void EXTI_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t EXTI_Line)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_LINE(EXTI_Line));
+
+ EXTI->PR = EXTI_Line;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_flash.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_flash.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_flash.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1256 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_flash.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the FLASH peripheral:
+ * - FLASH Interface configuration
+ * - FLASH Memory Programming
+ * - Option Bytes Programming
+ * - Interrupts and flags management
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This driver provides functions to configure and program the Flash
+ memory of all STM32F0xx devices. These functions are split in 4 groups
+ (#) FLASH Interface configuration functions: this group includes the
+ management of following features:
+ (++) Set the latency
+ (++) Enable/Disable the prefetch buffer
+
+ (#) FLASH Memory Programming functions: this group includes all needed
+ functions to erase and program the main memory:
+ (++) Lock and Unlock the Flash interface.
+ (++) Erase function: Erase Page, erase all pages.
+ (++) Program functions: Half Word and Word write.
+
+ (#) FLASH Option Bytes Programming functions: this group includes all
+ needed functions to:
+ (++) Lock and Unlock the Flash Option bytes.
+ (++) Launch the Option Bytes loader
+ (++) Erase the Option Bytes
+ (++)Set/Reset the write protection
+ (++) Set the Read protection Level
+ (++) Program the user option Bytes
+ (++) Set/Reset the BOOT1 bit
+ (++) Enable/Disable the VDDA Analog Monitoring
+ (++) Get the user option bytes
+ (++) Get the Write protection
+ (++) Get the read protection status
+
+ (#) FLASH Interrupts and flag management functions: this group includes
+ all needed functions to:
+ (++) Enable/Disable the flash interrupt sources
+ (++) Get flags status
+ (++) Clear flags
+ (++) Get Flash operation status
+ (++) Wait for last flash operation
+
+ @endverbatim
+
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_flash.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH
+ * @brief FLASH driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Group1 FLASH Interface configuration functions
+ * @brief FLASH Interface configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### FLASH Interface configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ [..] FLASH_Interface configuration_Functions, includes the following functions:
+ (+) void FLASH_SetLatency(uint32_t FLASH_Latency):
+ [..] To correctly read data from Flash memory, the number of wait states (LATENCY)
+ must be correctly programmed according to the frequency of the CPU clock (HCLK)
+ [..]
+ +--------------------------------------------- +
+ | Wait states | HCLK clock frequency (MHz) |
+ |---------------|------------------------------|
+ |0WS(1CPU cycle)| 0 < HCLK <= 24 |
+ |---------------|------------------------------|
+ |1WS(2CPU cycle)| 24 < HCLK <= 48 |
+ +----------------------------------------------+
+ [..]
+ (+) void FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(FunctionalState NewState);
+ [..]
+ All these functions don't need the unlock sequence.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the code latency value.
+ * @param FLASH_Latency: specifies the FLASH Latency value.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg FLASH_Latency_0: FLASH Zero Latency cycle
+ * @arg FLASH_Latency_1: FLASH One Latency cycle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void FLASH_SetLatency(uint32_t FLASH_Latency)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_LATENCY(FLASH_Latency));
+
+ /* Read the ACR register */
+ tmpreg = FLASH->ACR;
+
+ /* Sets the Latency value */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t) (~((uint32_t)FLASH_ACR_LATENCY));
+ tmpreg |= FLASH_Latency;
+
+ /* Write the ACR register */
+ FLASH->ACR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the Prefetch Buffer.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the FLASH prefetch buffer.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if(NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ FLASH->ACR |= FLASH_ACR_PRFTBE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ FLASH->ACR &= (uint32_t)(~((uint32_t)FLASH_ACR_PRFTBE));
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the FLASH Prefetch Buffer status is set or not.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval FLASH Prefetch Buffer Status (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus FLASH_GetPrefetchBufferStatus(void)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ if ((FLASH->ACR & FLASH_ACR_PRFTBS) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the new state of FLASH Prefetch Buffer Status (SET or RESET) */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Group2 FLASH Memory Programming functions
+ * @brief FLASH Memory Programming functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### FLASH Memory Programming functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ [..] The FLASH Memory Programming functions, includes the following functions:
+ (+) void FLASH_Unlock(void);
+ (+) void FLASH_Lock(void);
+ (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_ErasePage(uint32_t Page_Address);
+ (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllPages(void);
+ (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data);
+ (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data);
+
+ [..] Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
+
+ (#) Call the FLASH_Unlock() function to enable the flash control register and
+ program memory access
+ (#) Call the desired function to erase page or program data
+ (#) Call the FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash program memory access
+ (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Unlocks the FLASH control register and program memory access.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void FLASH_Unlock(void)
+{
+ if((FLASH->CR & FLASH_CR_LOCK) != RESET)
+ {
+ /* Unlocking the program memory access */
+ FLASH->KEYR = FLASH_FKEY1;
+ FLASH->KEYR = FLASH_FKEY2;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Locks the Program memory access.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void FLASH_Lock(void)
+{
+ /* Set the LOCK Bit to lock the FLASH control register and program memory access */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_LOCK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Erases a specified page in program memory.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_Unlock() function must be called before.
+ * @note Call the FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access (recommended
+ * to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @param Page_Address: The page address in program memory to be erased.
+ * @note A Page is erased in the Program memory only if the address to load
+ * is the start address of a page (multiple of 1024 bytes).
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
+ * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_ErasePage(uint32_t Page_Address)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(Page_Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase the page */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_PER;
+ FLASH->AR = Page_Address;
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_STRT;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ /* Disable the PER Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_PER;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Erase Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Erases all FLASH pages.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_Unlock() function must be called before.
+ * @note Call the FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access (recommended
+ * to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @param None
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_ERROR_PG,
+ * FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_EraseAllPages(void)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* if the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase all pages */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_MER;
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_STRT;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ /* Disable the MER Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_MER;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Erase Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Programs a word at a specified address.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_Unlock() function must be called before.
+ * @note Call the FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access (recommended
+ * to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @param Address: specifies the address to be programmed.
+ * @param Data: specifies the data to be programmed.
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_ERROR_PG,
+ * FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramWord(uint32_t Address, uint32_t Data)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+ __IO uint32_t tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new first
+ half word */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_PG;
+
+ *(__IO uint16_t*)Address = (uint16_t)Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new second
+ half word */
+ tmp = Address + 2;
+
+ *(__IO uint16_t*) tmp = Data >> 16;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ /* Disable the PG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_PG;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the PG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_PG;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Programs a half word at a specified address.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_Unlock() function must be called before.
+ * @note Call the FLASH_Lock() to disable the flash memory access (recommended
+ * to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @param Address: specifies the address to be programmed.
+ * @param Data: specifies the data to be programmed.
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_ERROR_PG,
+ * FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_ProgramHalfWord(uint32_t Address, uint16_t Data)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_PROGRAM_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to program the new data */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_PG;
+
+ *(__IO uint16_t*)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ /* Disable the PG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_PG;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the Program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Group3 Option Bytes Programming functions
+ * @brief Option Bytes Programming functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Option Bytes Programming functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ [..] The FLASH_Option Bytes Programming_functions, includes the following functions:
+ (+) void FLASH_OB_Unlock(void);
+ (+) void FLASH_OB_Lock(void);
+ (+) void FLASH_OB_Launch(void);
+ (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_Erase(void);
+ (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState);
+ (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP);
+ (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY);
+ (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BOOTConfig(uint8_t OB_BOOT1);
+ (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_VDDAConfig(uint8_t OB_VDDA_ANALOG);
+ (+) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WriteUser(uint8_t OB_USER);
+ (+) FLASH_OB_ProgramData(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data);
+ (+) uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void);
+ (+) uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void);
+ (+) FlagStatus FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void);
+
+ [..] Any operation of erase or program should follow these steps:
+
+ (#) Call the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function to enable the Option Bytes registers access
+
+ (#) Call one or several functions to program the desired option bytes
+ (++) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP) => to set the desired read Protection Level
+ (++) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WRPConfig(uint32_t OB_WRP, FunctionalState NewState)
+ => to Enable/Disable the desired sector write protection
+ (++) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY)
+ => to configure the user option Bytes: IWDG, STOP and the Standby.
+ (++) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BOOTConfig(uint8_t OB_BOOT1)
+ => to set or reset BOOT1
+ (++) FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_VDDAConfig(uint8_t OB_VDDA_ANALOG)
+ => to enable or disable the VDDA Analog Monitoring
+ (++) You can write all User Options bytes at once using a single function
+ by calling FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WriteUser(uint8_t OB_USER)
+ (++) FLASH_OB_ProgramData(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data) to program the
+ two half word in the option bytes
+
+ (#) Once all needed option bytes to be programmed are correctly written, call the
+ FLASH_OB_Launch(void) function to launch the Option Bytes programming process.
+
+ (#) Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the Option Bytes registers access (recommended
+ to protect the option Bytes against possible unwanted operations)
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Unlocks the option bytes block access.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void FLASH_OB_Unlock(void)
+{
+ if((FLASH->CR & FLASH_CR_OPTWRE) == RESET)
+ {
+ /* Unlocking the option bytes block access */
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_OPTKEY1;
+ FLASH->OPTKEYR = FLASH_OPTKEY2;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Locks the option bytes block access.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void FLASH_OB_Lock(void)
+{
+ /* Set the OPTWREN Bit to lock the option bytes block access */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTWRE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Launch the option byte loading.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void FLASH_OB_Launch(void)
+{
+ /* Set the OBL_Launch bit to launch the option byte loading */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OBL_LAUNCH;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Erases the FLASH option bytes.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function must be called before.
+ * @note Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option
+ * bytes (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @note This functions erases all option bytes except the Read protection (RDP).
+ * @param None
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_ERROR_PG,
+ * FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_Erase(void)
+{
+ uint16_t rdptmp = OB_RDP_Level_0;
+
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Get the actual read protection Option Byte value */
+ if(FLASH_OB_GetRDP() != RESET)
+ {
+ rdptmp = 0x00;
+ }
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* If the previous operation is completed, proceed to erase the option bytes */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTER;
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_STRT;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the OPTER Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTER;
+
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+
+ /* Restore the last read protection Option Byte value */
+ OB->RDP = (uint16_t)rdptmp;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* Disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the erase status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Write protects the desired pages
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function must be called before.
+ * @note Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option
+ * bytes (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @param OB_WRP: specifies the address of the pages to be write protected.
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg OB_WRP_Pages0to3..OB_WRP_Pages60to63
+ * @arg OB_WRP_AllPages
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
+ * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_EnableWRP(uint32_t OB_WRP)
+{
+ uint16_t WRP0_Data = 0xFFFF, WRP1_Data = 0xFFFF, WRP2_Data = 0xFFFF, WRP3_Data = 0xFFFF;
+
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_WRP(OB_WRP));
+
+ OB_WRP = (uint32_t)(~OB_WRP);
+ WRP0_Data = (uint16_t)(OB_WRP & OB_WRP0_WRP0);
+ WRP1_Data = (uint16_t)((OB_WRP >> 8) & OB_WRP0_WRP0);
+ WRP2_Data = (uint16_t)((OB_WRP >> 16) & OB_WRP0_WRP0) ;
+ WRP3_Data = (uint16_t)((OB_WRP >> 24) & OB_WRP0_WRP0) ;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+
+ if(WRP0_Data != 0xFF)
+ {
+ OB->WRP0 = WRP0_Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+ }
+ if((status == FLASH_COMPLETE) && (WRP1_Data != 0xFF))
+ {
+ OB->WRP1 = WRP1_Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+ }
+ if((status == FLASH_COMPLETE) && (WRP2_Data != 0xFF))
+ {
+ OB->WRP2 = WRP2_Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+ }
+ if((status == FLASH_COMPLETE) && (WRP3_Data != 0xFF))
+ {
+ OB->WRP3 = WRP3_Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+ }
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the write protection operation Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the read out protection.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function must be called before.
+ * @note Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option
+ * bytes (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @param FLASH_ReadProtection_Level: specifies the read protection level.
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg OB_RDP_Level_0: No protection
+ * @arg OB_RDP_Level_1: Read protection of the memory
+ * @arg OB_RDP_Level_2: Chip protection
+ * @note When enabling OB_RDP level 2 it's no more possible to go back to level 1 or 0
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
+ * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_RDPConfig(uint8_t OB_RDP)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_RDP(OB_RDP));
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTER;
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_STRT;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* If the erase operation is completed, disable the OPTER Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTER;
+
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+
+ OB->RDP = OB_RDP;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* Disable the OPTER Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTER;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the protection operation Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Programs the FLASH User Option Byte: IWDG_SW / RST_STOP / RST_STDBY.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function must be called before.
+ * @note Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option
+ * bytes (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @param OB_IWDG: Selects the WDG mode
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg OB_IWDG_SW: Software WDG selected
+ * @arg OB_IWDG_HW: Hardware WDG selected
+ * @param OB_STOP: Reset event when entering STOP mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg OB_STOP_NoRST: No reset generated when entering in STOP
+ * @arg OB_STOP_RST: Reset generated when entering in STOP
+ * @param OB_STDBY: Reset event when entering Standby mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg OB_STDBY_NoRST: No reset generated when entering in STANDBY
+ * @arg OB_STDBY_RST: Reset generated when entering in STANDBY
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
+ * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_UserConfig(uint8_t OB_IWDG, uint8_t OB_STOP, uint8_t OB_STDBY)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_IWDG_SOURCE(OB_IWDG));
+ assert_param(IS_OB_STOP_SOURCE(OB_STOP));
+ assert_param(IS_OB_STDBY_SOURCE(OB_STDBY));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+
+ OB->USER = (uint16_t)((uint16_t)(OB_IWDG | OB_STOP) | (uint16_t)(OB_STDBY | 0xF8));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* If the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Option Byte program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets or resets the BOOT1 option bit.
+ * @param OB_BOOT1: Set or Reset the BOOT1 option bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg OB_BOOT1_RESET: BOOT1 option bit reset
+ * @arg OB_BOOT1_SET: BOOT1 option bit set
+ * @retval None
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BOOTConfig(uint8_t OB_BOOT1)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_BOOT1(OB_BOOT1));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+
+ OB->USER = OB_BOOT1 | 0xEF;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* If the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Option Byte program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets or resets the BOOT0 option bit.
+ * @note This function is applicable only for the STM32F042 devices.
+ * @param OB_BOOT0: Set or Reset the BOOT0 option bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg OB_BOOT0_RESET: BOOT0 option bit reset
+ * @arg OB_BOOT0_SET: BOOT0 option bit set
+ * @retval None
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BOOT0Config(uint8_t OB_BOOT0)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_BOOT0(OB_BOOT0));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+
+ OB->USER = OB_BOOT0 | 0xF7;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* If the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Option Byte program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets or resets the BOOT0SW option bit.
+ * @note This function is applicable only for the STM32F042 devices.
+ * @param OB_BOOT0SW: Set or Reset the BOOT0_SW option bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg OB_BOOT0_SW: BOOT0_SW option bit reset
+ * @arg OB_BOOT0_HW: BOOT0_SW option bit set
+ * @retval None
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_BOOT0SWConfig(uint8_t OB_BOOT0SW)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_BOOT0SW(OB_BOOT0SW));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+
+ OB->USER = OB_BOOT0SW | 0x7F;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* If the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Option Byte program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets or resets the analogue monitoring on VDDA Power source.
+ * @param OB_VDDA_ANALOG: Selects the analog monitoring on VDDA Power source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg OB_VDDA_ANALOG_ON: Analog monitoring on VDDA Power source ON
+ * @arg OB_VDDA_ANALOG_OFF: Analog monitoring on VDDA Power source OFF
+ * @retval None
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_VDDAConfig(uint8_t OB_VDDA_ANALOG)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_VDDA_ANALOG(OB_VDDA_ANALOG));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+
+ OB->USER = OB_VDDA_ANALOG | 0xDF;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Option Byte program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets or resets the SRAM parity.
+ * @param OB_SRAM_Parity: Set or Reset the SRAM parity enable bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg OB_SRAM_PARITY_SET: Set SRAM parity.
+ * @arg OB_SRAM_PARITY_RESET: Reset SRAM parity.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_SRAMParityConfig(uint8_t OB_SRAM_Parity)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_SRAM_PARITY(OB_SRAM_Parity));
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+
+ OB->USER = OB_SRAM_Parity | 0xBF;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* if the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Option Byte program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Programs the FLASH User Option Byte: IWDG_SW, RST_STOP, RST_STDBY,
+ * BOOT1 and VDDA ANALOG monitoring.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function must be called before.
+ * @note Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option
+ * bytes (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @param OB_USER: Selects all user option bytes
+ * This parameter is a combination of the following values:
+ * @arg OB_IWDG_SW / OB_IWDG_HW: Software / Hardware WDG selected
+ * @arg OB_STOP_NoRST / OB_STOP_RST: No reset / Reset generated when entering in STOP
+ * @arg OB_STDBY_NoRST / OB_STDBY_RST: No reset / Reset generated when entering in STANDBY
+ * @arg OB_BOOT1_RESET / OB_BOOT1_SET: BOOT1 Reset / Set
+ * @arg OB_VDDA_ANALOG_ON / OB_VDDA_ANALOG_OFF: Analog monitoring on VDDA Power source ON / OFF
+ * @arg OB_SRAM_PARITY_SET / OB_SRAM_PARITY_RESET: SRAM Parity SET / RESET
+ * @arg OB_BOOT0_RESET / OB_BOOT0_SET: BOOT0 Reset / Set
+ * @arg OB_BOOT0_SW / OB_BOOT0_SW: BOOT0 pin disabled / BOOT0 pin bonded with GPIO
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
+ * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_WriteUser(uint8_t OB_USER)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+
+ OB->USER = OB_USER;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* If the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Option Byte program Status */
+ return status;
+
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Programs a half word at a specified Option Byte Data address.
+ * @note To correctly run this function, the FLASH_OB_Unlock() function must be called before.
+ * @note Call the FLASH_OB_Lock() to disable the flash control register access and the option
+ * bytes (recommended to protect the FLASH memory against possible unwanted operation)
+ * @param Address: specifies the address to be programmed.
+ * This parameter can be 0x1FFFF804 or 0x1FFFF806.
+ * @param Data: specifies the data to be programmed.
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_ERROR_PG,
+ * FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_OB_ProgramData(uint32_t Address, uint8_t Data)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_OB_DATA_ADDRESS(Address));
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status == FLASH_COMPLETE)
+ {
+ /* Enables the Option Bytes Programming operation */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ *(__IO uint16_t*)Address = Data;
+
+ /* Wait for last operation to be completed */
+ status = FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(FLASH_ER_PRG_TIMEOUT);
+
+ if(status != FLASH_TIMEOUT)
+ {
+ /* If the program operation is completed, disable the OPTPG Bit */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~FLASH_CR_OPTPG;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the Option Byte Data Program Status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the FLASH User Option Bytes values.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval The FLASH User Option Bytes .
+ */
+uint8_t FLASH_OB_GetUser(void)
+{
+ /* Return the User Option Byte */
+ return (uint8_t)(FLASH->OBR >> 8);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval The FLASH Write Protection Option Bytes value
+ */
+uint32_t FLASH_OB_GetWRP(void)
+{
+ /* Return the FLASH write protection Register value */
+ return (uint32_t)(FLASH->WRPR);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the FLASH Read out Protection Status is set or not.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval FLASH ReadOut Protection Status(SET or RESET)
+ */
+FlagStatus FLASH_OB_GetRDP(void)
+{
+ FlagStatus readstatus = RESET;
+
+ if ((uint8_t)(FLASH->OBR & (FLASH_OBR_RDPRT1 | FLASH_OBR_RDPRT2)) != RESET)
+ {
+ readstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ readstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return readstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup FLASH_Group4 Interrupts and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified FLASH interrupts.
+ * @param FLASH_IT: specifies the FLASH interrupt sources to be enabled or
+ * disabled.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg FLASH_IT_EOP: FLASH end of programming Interrupt
+ * @arg FLASH_IT_ERR: FLASH Error Interrupt
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void FLASH_ITConfig(uint32_t FLASH_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_IT(FLASH_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if(NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the interrupt sources */
+ FLASH->CR |= FLASH_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the interrupt sources */
+ FLASH->CR &= ~(uint32_t)FLASH_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified FLASH flag is set or not.
+ * @param FLASH_FLAG: specifies the FLASH flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg FLASH_FLAG_BSY: FLASH write/erase operations in progress flag
+ * @arg FLASH_FLAG_PGERR: FLASH Programming error flag flag
+ * @arg FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR: FLASH Write protected error flag
+ * @arg FLASH_FLAG_EOP: FLASH End of Programming flag
+ * @retval The new state of FLASH_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus FLASH_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t FLASH_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_GET_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG));
+
+ if((FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the new state of FLASH_FLAG (SET or RESET) */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the FLASH's pending flags.
+ * @param FLASH_FLAG: specifies the FLASH flags to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg FLASH_FLAG_PGERR: FLASH Programming error flag flag
+ * @arg FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR: FLASH Write protected error flag
+ * @arg FLASH_FLAG_EOP: FLASH End of Programming flag
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void FLASH_ClearFlag(uint32_t FLASH_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FLASH_CLEAR_FLAG(FLASH_FLAG));
+
+ /* Clear the flags */
+ FLASH->SR = FLASH_FLAG;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the FLASH Status.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be:
+ * FLASH_BUSY, FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP or FLASH_COMPLETE.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_GetStatus(void)
+{
+ FLASH_Status FLASHstatus = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ if((FLASH->SR & FLASH_FLAG_BSY) == FLASH_FLAG_BSY)
+ {
+ FLASHstatus = FLASH_BUSY;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if((FLASH->SR & (uint32_t)FLASH_FLAG_WRPERR)!= (uint32_t)0x00)
+ {
+ FLASHstatus = FLASH_ERROR_WRP;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if((FLASH->SR & (uint32_t)(FLASH_SR_PGERR)) != (uint32_t)0x00)
+ {
+ FLASHstatus = FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ FLASHstatus = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+ /* Return the FLASH Status */
+ return FLASHstatus;
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Waits for a FLASH operation to complete or a TIMEOUT to occur.
+ * @param Timeout: FLASH programming Timeout
+ * @retval FLASH Status: The returned value can be: FLASH_BUSY,
+ * FLASH_ERROR_PROGRAM, FLASH_ERROR_WRP, FLASH_COMPLETE or FLASH_TIMEOUT.
+ */
+FLASH_Status FLASH_WaitForLastOperation(uint32_t Timeout)
+{
+ FLASH_Status status = FLASH_COMPLETE;
+
+ /* Check for the FLASH Status */
+ status = FLASH_GetStatus();
+
+ /* Wait for a FLASH operation to complete or a TIMEOUT to occur */
+ while((status == FLASH_BUSY) && (Timeout != 0x00))
+ {
+ status = FLASH_GetStatus();
+ Timeout--;
+ }
+
+ if(Timeout == 0x00 )
+ {
+ status = FLASH_TIMEOUT;
+ }
+ /* Return the operation status */
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+ /**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_gpio.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_gpio.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_gpio.c
@@ -0,0 +1,542 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_gpio.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the GPIO peripheral:
+ * + Initialization and Configuration functions
+ * + GPIO Read and Write functions
+ * + GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+ *
+ *
+ ===========================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ===========================================================================
+ [..]
+ (#) Enable the GPIO AHB clock using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd()
+ (#) Configure the GPIO pin(s) using GPIO_Init()
+ Four possible configuration are available for each pin:
+ (++) Input: Floating, Pull-up, Pull-down.
+ (++) Output: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull)
+ Open Drain (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull).
+ In output mode, the speed is configurable: Low, Medium, Fast or High.
+ (++) Alternate Function: Push-Pull (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull)
+ Open Drain (Pull-up, Pull-down or no Pull).
+ (++) Analog: required mode when a pin is to be used as ADC channel,
+ DAC output or comparator input.
+ (#) Peripherals alternate function:
+ (++) For ADC, DAC and comparators, configure the desired pin in analog
+ mode using GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AN
+ (++) For other peripherals (TIM, USART...):
+ (+++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
+ Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function. For PortC,
+ PortD and PortF, no configuration is needed.
+ (+++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function mode using
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
+ (+++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via
+ GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
+ (+++) Call GPIO_Init() function
+ (#) To get the level of a pin configured in input mode use GPIO_ReadInputDataBit()
+ (#) To set/reset the level of a pin configured in output mode use
+ GPIO_SetBits()/GPIO_ResetBits()
+ (#) During and just after reset, the alternate functions are not active and
+ the GPIO pins are configured in input floating mode (except JTAG pins).
+ (#) The LSE oscillator pins OSC32_IN and OSC32_OUT can be used as
+ general-purpose (PC14 and PC15, respectively) when the LSE oscillator
+ is off. The LSE has priority over the GPIO function.
+ (#) The HSE oscillator pins OSC_IN/OSC_OUT can be used as general-purpose
+ PD0 and PD1, respectively, when the HSE oscillator is off. The HSE has
+ priority over the GPIO function.
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_gpio.h"
+#include "stm32f0xx_rcc.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup GPIO
+ * @brief GPIO driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup GPIO_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup GPIO_Group1 Initialization and Configuration
+ * @brief Initialization and Configuration
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and Configuration #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the GPIOx peripheral registers to their default reset
+ * values.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @note GPIOE is available only for STM32F072.
+ * @note GPIOD is not available for STM32F031.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void GPIO_DeInit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+
+ if(GPIOx == GPIOA)
+ {
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA, ENABLE);
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if(GPIOx == GPIOB)
+ {
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB, ENABLE);
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if(GPIOx == GPIOC)
+ {
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC, ENABLE);
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if(GPIOx == GPIOD)
+ {
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD, ENABLE);
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if(GPIOx == GPIOE)
+ {
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE, ENABLE);
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if(GPIOx == GPIOF)
+ {
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF, ENABLE);
+ RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF, DISABLE);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the GPIOx peripheral according to the specified
+ * parameters in the GPIO_InitStruct.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @note GPIOE is available only for STM32F072.
+ * @note GPIOD is not available for STM32F031.
+ * @param GPIO_InitStruct: pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified GPIO peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void GPIO_Init(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t pinpos = 0x00, pos = 0x00 , currentpin = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_MODE(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PUPD(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_PuPd));
+
+ /*-------------------------- Configure the port pins -----------------------*/
+ /*-- GPIO Mode Configuration --*/
+ for (pinpos = 0x00; pinpos < 0x10; pinpos++)
+ {
+ pos = ((uint32_t)0x01) << pinpos;
+
+ /* Get the port pins position */
+ currentpin = (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin) & pos;
+
+ if (currentpin == pos)
+ {
+ if ((GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_OUT) || (GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode == GPIO_Mode_AF))
+ {
+ /* Check Speed mode parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_SPEED(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed));
+
+ /* Speed mode configuration */
+ GPIOx->OSPEEDR &= ~(GPIO_OSPEEDER_OSPEEDR0 << (pinpos * 2));
+ GPIOx->OSPEEDR |= ((uint32_t)(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed) << (pinpos * 2));
+
+ /* Check Output mode parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_OTYPE(GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_OType));
+
+ /* Output mode configuration */
+ GPIOx->OTYPER &= ~((GPIO_OTYPER_OT_0) << ((uint16_t)pinpos));
+ GPIOx->OTYPER |= (uint16_t)(((uint16_t)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_OType) << ((uint16_t)pinpos));
+ }
+
+ GPIOx->MODER &= ~(GPIO_MODER_MODER0 << (pinpos * 2));
+
+ GPIOx->MODER |= (((uint32_t)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode) << (pinpos * 2));
+
+ /* Pull-up Pull down resistor configuration */
+ GPIOx->PUPDR &= ~(GPIO_PUPDR_PUPDR0 << ((uint16_t)pinpos * 2));
+ GPIOx->PUPDR |= (((uint32_t)GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_PuPd) << (pinpos * 2));
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each GPIO_InitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param GPIO_InitStruct: pointer to a GPIO_InitTypeDef structure which will
+ * be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void GPIO_StructInit(GPIO_InitTypeDef* GPIO_InitStruct)
+{
+ /* Reset GPIO init structure parameters values */
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Pin = GPIO_Pin_All;
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_IN;
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Speed = GPIO_Speed_Level_2;
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_OType = GPIO_OType_PP;
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_PuPd = GPIO_PuPd_NOPULL;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Locks GPIO Pins configuration registers.
+ * @note The locked registers are GPIOx_MODER, GPIOx_OTYPER, GPIOx_OSPEEDR,
+ * GPIOx_PUPDR, GPIOx_AFRL and GPIOx_AFRH.
+ * @note The configuration of the locked GPIO pins can no longer be modified
+ * until the next device reset.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A or B) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of GPIO_Pin_x where x can be (0..15).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void GPIO_PinLockConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t tmp = 0x00010000;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_LIST_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ tmp |= GPIO_Pin;
+ /* Set LCKK bit */
+ GPIOx->LCKR = tmp;
+ /* Reset LCKK bit */
+ GPIOx->LCKR = GPIO_Pin;
+ /* Set LCKK bit */
+ GPIOx->LCKR = tmp;
+ /* Read LCKK bit */
+ tmp = GPIOx->LCKR;
+ /* Read LCKK bit */
+ tmp = GPIOx->LCKR;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup GPIO_Group2 GPIO Read and Write
+ * @brief GPIO Read and Write
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### GPIO Read and Write #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Reads the specified input port pin.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @note GPIOE is available only for STM32F072.
+ * @note GPIOD is not available for STM32F031.
+ * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to read.
+ * @note This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be:
+ * For STM32F051 and STM32F030: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, (2) for GPIOD and (0..1, 4..7) for GIIOF.
+ * For STM32F072: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD, GPIOE, (0..10) for GPIOF.
+ * For STM32F031: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, (13..15) for GPIOC and (0..1, 6..7) for GPIOF.
+ * @retval The input port pin value.
+ */
+uint8_t GPIO_ReadInputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ uint8_t bitstatus = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ if ((GPIOx->IDR & GPIO_Pin) != (uint32_t)Bit_RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Reads the specified input port pin.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @note GPIOE is available only for STM32F072.
+ * @note GPIOD is not available for STM32F031.
+ * @retval The input port pin value.
+ */
+uint16_t GPIO_ReadInputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+
+ return ((uint16_t)GPIOx->IDR);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Reads the specified output data port bit.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @note GPIOE is available only for STM32F072.
+ * @note GPIOD is not available for STM32F031.
+ * @param GPIO_Pin: Specifies the port bit to read.
+ * @note This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be:
+ * For STM32F051 and STM32F030: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, (2) for GPIOD and (0..1, 4..7) for GIIOF.
+ * For STM32F072: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD, GPIOE, (0..10) for GPIOF.
+ * For STM32F031: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, (13..15) for GPIOC and (0..1, 6..7) for GPIOF.
+ * @retval The output port pin value.
+ */
+uint8_t GPIO_ReadOutputDataBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ uint8_t bitstatus = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ if ((GPIOx->ODR & GPIO_Pin) != (uint32_t)Bit_RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = (uint8_t)Bit_RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Reads the specified GPIO output data port.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @note GPIOE is available only for STM32F072.
+ * @note GPIOD is not available for STM32F031.
+ * @retval GPIO output data port value.
+ */
+uint16_t GPIO_ReadOutputData(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+
+ return ((uint16_t)GPIOx->ODR);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the selected data port bits.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @note GPIOE is available only for STM32F072.
+ * @note GPIOD is not available for STM32F031.
+ * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written.
+ * @note This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be:
+ * For STM32F051 and STM32F030: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, (2) for GPIOD and (0..1, 4..7) for GIIOF.
+ * For STM32F072: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD, GPIOE, (0..10) for GPIOF.
+ * For STM32F031: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, (13..15) for GPIOC and (0..1, 6..7) for GPIOF.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void GPIO_SetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ GPIOx->BSRR = GPIO_Pin;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the selected data port bits.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @note GPIOE is available only for STM32F072.
+ * @note GPIOD is not available for STM32F031.
+ * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bits to be written.
+ * @note This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be:
+ * For STM32F051 and STM32F030: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, (2) for GPIOD and (0..1, 4..7) for GIIOF.
+ * For STM32F072: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD, GPIOE, (0..10) for GPIOF.
+ * For STM32F031: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, (13..15) for GPIOC and (0..1, 6..7) for GPIOF.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void GPIO_ResetBits(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+
+ GPIOx->BRR = GPIO_Pin;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets or clears the selected data port bit.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @note GPIOE is available only for STM32F072.
+ * @note GPIOD is not available for STM32F031.
+ * @param GPIO_Pin: specifies the port bit to be written.
+ * @param BitVal: specifies the value to be written to the selected bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the BitAction enumeration values:
+ * @arg Bit_RESET: to clear the port pin
+ * @arg Bit_SET: to set the port pin
+ * @note This parameter can be GPIO_Pin_x where x can be:
+ * For STM32F051 and STM32F030: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, (2) for GPIOD and (0..1, 4..7) for GIIOF.
+ * For STM32F072: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD, GPIOE, (0..10) for GPIOF.
+ * For STM32F031: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, (13..15) for GPIOC and (0..1, 6..7) for GPIOF.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void GPIO_WriteBit(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_Pin, BitAction BitVal)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GET_GPIO_PIN(GPIO_Pin));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_BIT_ACTION(BitVal));
+
+ if (BitVal != Bit_RESET)
+ {
+ GPIOx->BSRR = GPIO_Pin;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ GPIOx->BRR = GPIO_Pin ;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Writes data to the specified GPIO data port.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @note GPIOE is available only for STM32F072.
+ * @note GPIOD is not available for STM32F031.
+ * @param PortVal: specifies the value to be written to the port output data register.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void GPIO_Write(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t PortVal)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+
+ GPIOx->ODR = PortVal;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup GPIO_Group3 GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions
+ * @brief GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### GPIO Alternate functions configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Writes data to the specified GPIO data port.
+ * @param GPIOx: where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F) to select the GPIO peripheral.
+ * @note GPIOC, GPIOD, GPIOE and GPIOF are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091.
+ * @param GPIO_PinSource: specifies the pin for the Alternate function.
+ * This parameter can be GPIO_PinSourcex where x can be (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOD, GPIOE
+ * and (0..12) for GPIOC and (0, 2..5, 9..10) for GPIOF.
+ * @param GPIO_AF: selects the pin to used as Alternate function.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following value:
+ * @arg GPIO_AF_0: WKUP, EVENTOUT, TIM15, SPI1, TIM17, MCO, SWDAT, SWCLK,
+ * TIM14, BOOT, USART1, CEC, IR_OUT, SPI2, TIM3, USART4,
+ * CAN, USART2, CRS, TIM16, TIM1, TS, USART8
+ * @arg GPIO_AF_1: USART2, CEC, TIM3, USART1, USART2, EVENTOUT, I2C1,
+ * I2C2, TIM15, SPI2, USART3, TS, SPI1, USART7, USART8
+ * USART5, USART4, USART6, I2C1
+ * @arg GPIO_AF_2: TIM2, TIM1, EVENTOUT, TIM16, TIM17, USB, USART6, USART5,
+ * USART8, USART7, USART6
+ * @arg GPIO_AF_3: TS, I2C1, TIM15, EVENTOUT
+ * @arg GPIO_AF_4: TIM14, USART4, USART3, CRS, CAN, I2C1, USART5
+ * @arg GPIO_AF_5: TIM16, TIM17, TIM15, SPI2, I2C2, USART6, MCO
+ * @arg GPIO_AF_6: EVENTOUT
+ * @arg GPIO_AF_7: COMP1 OUT, COMP2 OUT
+ * @note The pin should already been configured in Alternate Function mode(AF)
+ * using GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
+ * @note Refer to the Alternate function mapping table in the device datasheet
+ * for the detailed mapping of the system and peripherals'alternate
+ * function I/O pins.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void GPIO_PinAFConfig(GPIO_TypeDef* GPIOx, uint16_t GPIO_PinSource, uint8_t GPIO_AF)
+{
+ uint32_t temp = 0x00;
+ uint32_t temp_2 = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_ALL_PERIPH(GPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_PIN_SOURCE(GPIO_PinSource));
+ assert_param(IS_GPIO_AF(GPIO_AF));
+
+ temp = ((uint32_t)(GPIO_AF) << ((uint32_t)((uint32_t)GPIO_PinSource & (uint32_t)0x07) * 4));
+ GPIOx->AFR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x03] &= ~((uint32_t)0xF << ((uint32_t)((uint32_t)GPIO_PinSource & (uint32_t)0x07) * 4));
+ temp_2 = GPIOx->AFR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x03] | temp;
+ GPIOx->AFR[GPIO_PinSource >> 0x03] = temp_2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_i2c.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_i2c.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_i2c.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1585 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_i2c.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Inter-Integrated circuit (I2C):
+ * + Initialization and Configuration
+ * + Communications handling
+ * + SMBUS management
+ * + I2C registers management
+ * + Data transfers management
+ * + DMA transfers management
+ * + Interrupts and flags management
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+ ============================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ============================================================================
+ [..]
+ (#) Enable peripheral clock using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_I2Cx, ENABLE)
+ function for I2C1 or I2C2.
+ (#) Enable SDA, SCL and SMBA (when used) GPIO clocks using
+ RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() function.
+ (#) Peripherals alternate function:
+ (++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
+ Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function.
+ (++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function by:
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF
+ (++) Select the type, OpenDrain and speed via
+ GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members
+ (++) Call GPIO_Init() function.
+ (#) Program the Mode, Timing , Own address, Ack and Acknowledged Address
+ using the I2C_Init() function.
+ (#) Optionally you can enable/configure the following parameters without
+ re-initialization (i.e there is no need to call again I2C_Init() function):
+ (++) Enable the acknowledge feature using I2C_AcknowledgeConfig() function.
+ (++) Enable the dual addressing mode using I2C_DualAddressCmd() function.
+ (++) Enable the general call using the I2C_GeneralCallCmd() function.
+ (++) Enable the clock stretching using I2C_StretchClockCmd() function.
+ (++) Enable the PEC Calculation using I2C_CalculatePEC() function.
+ (++) For SMBus Mode:
+ (+++) Enable the SMBusAlert pin using I2C_SMBusAlertCmd() function.
+ (#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
+ I2C_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
+ (#) When using the DMA mode
+ (++) Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function.
+ (++) Active the needed channel Request using I2C_DMACmd() function.
+ (#) Enable the I2C using the I2C_Cmd() function.
+ (#) Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function when using DMA mode in the
+ transfers.
+ [..]
+ (@) When using I2C in Fast Mode Plus, SCL and SDA pin 20mA current drive capability
+ must be enabled by setting the driving capability control bit in SYSCFG.
+
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_i2c.h"
+#include "stm32f0xx_rcc.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup I2C
+ * @brief I2C driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define CR1_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)0x00CFE0FF) /*I2C_AnalogFilter));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_DIGITAL_FILTER(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DigitalFilter));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_MODE(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_OWN_ADDRESS1(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ACK(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ACKNOWLEDGE_ADDRESS(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress));
+
+ /* Disable I2Cx Peripheral */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR1_PE);
+
+ /*---------------------------- I2Cx FILTERS Configuration ------------------*/
+ /* Get the I2Cx CR1 value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->CR1;
+ /* Clear I2Cx CR1 register */
+ tmpreg &= CR1_CLEAR_MASK;
+ /* Configure I2Cx: analog and digital filter */
+ /* Set ANFOFF bit according to I2C_AnalogFilter value */
+ /* Set DFN bits according to I2C_DigitalFilter value */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AnalogFilter |(I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DigitalFilter << 8);
+
+ /* Write to I2Cx CR1 */
+ I2Cx->CR1 = tmpreg;
+
+ /*---------------------------- I2Cx TIMING Configuration -------------------*/
+ /* Configure I2Cx: Timing */
+ /* Set TIMINGR bits according to I2C_Timing */
+ /* Write to I2Cx TIMING */
+ I2Cx->TIMINGR = I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Timing & TIMING_CLEAR_MASK;
+
+ /* Enable I2Cx Peripheral */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_PE;
+
+ /*---------------------------- I2Cx OAR1 Configuration ---------------------*/
+ /* Clear tmpreg local variable */
+ tmpreg = 0;
+ /* Clear OAR1 register */
+ I2Cx->OAR1 = (uint32_t)tmpreg;
+ /* Clear OAR2 register */
+ I2Cx->OAR2 = (uint32_t)tmpreg;
+ /* Configure I2Cx: Own Address1 and acknowledged address */
+ /* Set OA1MODE bit according to I2C_AcknowledgedAddress value */
+ /* Set OA1 bits according to I2C_OwnAddress1 value */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)((uint32_t)I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress | \
+ (uint32_t)I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1);
+ /* Write to I2Cx OAR1 */
+ I2Cx->OAR1 = tmpreg;
+ /* Enable Own Address1 acknowledgement */
+ I2Cx->OAR1 |= I2C_OAR1_OA1EN;
+
+ /*---------------------------- I2Cx MODE Configuration ---------------------*/
+ /* Configure I2Cx: mode */
+ /* Set SMBDEN and SMBHEN bits according to I2C_Mode value */
+ tmpreg = I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode;
+ /* Write to I2Cx CR1 */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= tmpreg;
+
+ /*---------------------------- I2Cx ACK Configuration ----------------------*/
+ /* Get the I2Cx CR2 value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->CR2;
+ /* Clear I2Cx CR2 register */
+ tmpreg &= CR2_CLEAR_MASK;
+ /* Configure I2Cx: acknowledgement */
+ /* Set NACK bit according to I2C_Ack value */
+ tmpreg |= I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack;
+ /* Write to I2Cx CR2 */
+ I2Cx->CR2 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each I2C_InitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param I2C_InitStruct: pointer to an I2C_InitTypeDef structure which will be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_StructInit(I2C_InitTypeDef* I2C_InitStruct)
+{
+ /*---------------- Reset I2C init structure parameters values --------------*/
+ /* Initialize the I2C_Timing member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Timing = 0;
+ /* Initialize the I2C_AnalogFilter member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AnalogFilter = I2C_AnalogFilter_Enable;
+ /* Initialize the I2C_DigitalFilter member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_DigitalFilter = 0;
+ /* Initialize the I2C_Mode member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Mode = I2C_Mode_I2C;
+ /* Initialize the I2C_OwnAddress1 member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_OwnAddress1 = 0;
+ /* Initialize the I2C_Ack member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_Ack = I2C_Ack_Disable;
+ /* Initialize the I2C_AcknowledgedAddress member */
+ I2C_InitStruct->I2C_AcknowledgedAddress = I2C_AcknowledgedAddress_7bit;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C peripheral.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx peripheral.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_Cmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected I2C peripheral */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_PE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected I2C peripheral */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR1_PE);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C software reset.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_SoftwareResetCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Disable peripheral */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR1_PE);
+
+ /* Perform a dummy read to delay the disable of peripheral for minimum
+ 3 APB clock cycles to perform the software reset functionality */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)(uint32_t)I2Cx;
+
+ /* Enable peripheral */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_PE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified I2C interrupts.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param I2C_IT: specifies the I2C interrupts sources to be enabled or disabled.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg I2C_IT_ERRI: Error interrupt mask
+ * @arg I2C_IT_TCI: Transfer Complete interrupt mask
+ * @arg I2C_IT_STOPI: Stop Detection interrupt mask
+ * @arg I2C_IT_NACKI: Not Acknowledge received interrupt mask
+ * @arg I2C_IT_ADDRI: Address Match interrupt mask
+ * @arg I2C_IT_RXI: RX interrupt mask
+ * @arg I2C_IT_TXI: TX interrupt mask
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified I2C interrupts.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_ITConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_CONFIG_IT(I2C_IT));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected I2C interrupts */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected I2C interrupts */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_IT);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the I2C Clock stretching.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx Clock stretching.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_StretchClockCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable clock stretching */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR1_NOSTRETCH);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable clock stretching */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_NOSTRETCH;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables I2C wakeup from stop mode.
+ * This function is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx stop mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_StopModeCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_1_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable wakeup from stop mode */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_WUPEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable wakeup from stop mode */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR1_WUPEN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the I2C own address 2.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2C own address 2.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_DualAddressCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable own address 2 */
+ I2Cx->OAR2 |= I2C_OAR2_OA2EN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable own address 2 */
+ I2Cx->OAR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_OAR2_OA2EN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the I2C slave own address 2 and mask.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param Address: specifies the slave address to be programmed.
+ * @param Mask: specifies own address 2 mask to be programmed.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg I2C_OA2_NoMask: no mask.
+ * @arg I2C_OA2_Mask01: OA2[1] is masked and don't care.
+ * @arg I2C_OA2_Mask02: OA2[2:1] are masked and don't care.
+ * @arg I2C_OA2_Mask03: OA2[3:1] are masked and don't care.
+ * @arg I2C_OA2_Mask04: OA2[4:1] are masked and don't care.
+ * @arg I2C_OA2_Mask05: OA2[5:1] are masked and don't care.
+ * @arg I2C_OA2_Mask06: OA2[6:1] are masked and don't care.
+ * @arg I2C_OA2_Mask07: OA2[7:1] are masked and don't care.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_OwnAddress2Config(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t Address, uint8_t Mask)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_OWN_ADDRESS2(Address));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_OWN_ADDRESS2_MASK(Mask));
+
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->OAR2;
+
+ /* Reset I2Cx OA2 bit [7:1] and OA2MSK bit [1:0] */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)(I2C_OAR2_OA2 | I2C_OAR2_OA2MSK));
+
+ /* Set I2Cx SADD */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)Address & I2C_OAR2_OA2) | \
+ (((uint32_t)Mask << 8) & I2C_OAR2_OA2MSK)) ;
+
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ I2Cx->OAR2 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the I2C general call mode.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2C general call mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_GeneralCallCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable general call mode */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_GCEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable general call mode */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR1_GCEN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the I2C slave byte control.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2C slave byte control.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_SlaveByteControlCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable slave byte control */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_SBC;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable slave byte control */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR1_SBC);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the slave address to be transmitted after start generation.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param Address: specifies the slave address to be programmed.
+ * @note This function should be called before generating start condition.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_SlaveAddressConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t Address)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_SLAVE_ADDRESS(Address));
+
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->CR2;
+
+ /* Reset I2Cx SADD bit [9:0] */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR2_SADD);
+
+ /* Set I2Cx SADD */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)Address & I2C_CR2_SADD);
+
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ I2Cx->CR2 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the I2C 10-bit addressing mode for the master.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2C 10-bit addressing mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note This function should be called before generating start condition.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_10BitAddressingModeCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable 10-bit addressing mode */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_CR2_ADD10;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable 10-bit addressing mode */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR2_ADD10);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup I2C_Group2 Communications handling functions
+ * @brief Communications handling functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Communications handling functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides a set of functions that handles I2C communication.
+
+ [..] Automatic End mode is enabled using I2C_AutoEndCmd() function. When Reload
+ mode is enabled via I2C_ReloadCmd() AutoEnd bit has no effect.
+
+ [..] I2C_NumberOfBytesConfig() function set the number of bytes to be transferred,
+ this configuration should be done before generating start condition in master
+ mode.
+
+ [..] When switching from master write operation to read operation in 10Bit addressing
+ mode, master can only sends the 1st 7 bits of the 10 bit address, followed by
+ Read direction by enabling HEADR bit using I2C_10BitAddressHeader() function.
+
+ [..] In master mode, when transferring more than 255 bytes Reload mode should be used
+ to handle communication. In the first phase of transfer, Nbytes should be set to
+ 255. After transferring these bytes TCR flag is set and I2C_TransferHandling()
+ function should be called to handle remaining communication.
+
+ [..] In master mode, when software end mode is selected when all data is transferred
+ TC flag is set I2C_TransferHandling() function should be called to generate STOP
+ or generate ReStart.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the I2C automatic end mode (stop condition is
+ * automatically sent when nbytes data are transferred).
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2C automatic end mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note This function has effect if Reload mode is disabled.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_AutoEndCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable Auto end mode */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_CR2_AUTOEND;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable Auto end mode */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR2_AUTOEND);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the I2C nbytes reload mode.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the nbytes reload mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_ReloadCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable Auto Reload mode */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_CR2_RELOAD;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable Auto Reload mode */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR2_RELOAD);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the number of bytes to be transmitted/received.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param Number_Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to be programmed.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_NumberOfBytesConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint8_t Number_Bytes)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->CR2;
+
+ /* Reset I2Cx Nbytes bit [7:0] */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR2_NBYTES);
+
+ /* Set I2Cx Nbytes */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)Number_Bytes << 16 ) & I2C_CR2_NBYTES);
+
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ I2Cx->CR2 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the type of transfer request for the master.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param I2C_Direction: specifies the transfer request direction to be programmed.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg I2C_Direction_Transmitter: Master request a write transfer
+ * @arg I2C_Direction_Receiver: Master request a read transfer
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_MasterRequestConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t I2C_Direction)
+{
+/* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_DIRECTION(I2C_Direction));
+
+ /* Test on the direction to set/reset the read/write bit */
+ if (I2C_Direction == I2C_Direction_Transmitter)
+ {
+ /* Request a write Transfer */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR2_RD_WRN);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Request a read Transfer */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_CR2_RD_WRN;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Generates I2Cx communication START condition.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2C START condition generation.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_GenerateSTART(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Generate a START condition */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_CR2_START;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the START condition generation */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR2_START);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Generates I2Cx communication STOP condition.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2C STOP condition generation.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_GenerateSTOP(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Generate a STOP condition */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_CR2_STOP;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the STOP condition generation */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR2_STOP);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the I2C 10-bit header only mode with read direction.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2C 10-bit header only mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note This mode can be used only when switching from master transmitter mode
+ * to master receiver mode.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_10BitAddressHeaderCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable 10-bit header only mode */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_CR2_HEAD10R;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable 10-bit header only mode */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR2_HEAD10R);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Generates I2C communication Acknowledge.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the Acknowledge.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_AcknowledgeConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable ACK generation */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR2_NACK);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Enable NACK generation */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_CR2_NACK;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the I2C slave matched address .
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @retval The value of the slave matched address .
+ */
+uint8_t I2C_GetAddressMatched(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Return the slave matched address in the SR1 register */
+ return (uint8_t)(((uint32_t)I2Cx->ISR & I2C_ISR_ADDCODE) >> 16) ;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the I2C slave received request.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @retval The value of the received request.
+ */
+uint16_t I2C_GetTransferDirection(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+ uint16_t direction = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Return the slave matched address in the SR1 register */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)(I2Cx->ISR & I2C_ISR_DIR);
+
+ /* If write transfer is requested */
+ if (tmpreg == 0)
+ {
+ /* write transfer is requested */
+ direction = I2C_Direction_Transmitter;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Read transfer is requested */
+ direction = I2C_Direction_Receiver;
+ }
+ return direction;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Handles I2Cx communication when starting transfer or during transfer (TC or TCR flag are set).
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param Address: specifies the slave address to be programmed.
+ * @param Number_Bytes: specifies the number of bytes to be programmed.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0 and 255.
+ * @param ReloadEndMode: new state of the I2C START condition generation.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg I2C_Reload_Mode: Enable Reload mode .
+ * @arg I2C_AutoEnd_Mode: Enable Automatic end mode.
+ * @arg I2C_SoftEnd_Mode: Enable Software end mode.
+ * @param StartStopMode: new state of the I2C START condition generation.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg I2C_No_StartStop: Don't Generate stop and start condition.
+ * @arg I2C_Generate_Stop: Generate stop condition (Number_Bytes should be set to 0).
+ * @arg I2C_Generate_Start_Read: Generate Restart for read request.
+ * @arg I2C_Generate_Start_Write: Generate Restart for write request.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_TransferHandling(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t Address, uint8_t Number_Bytes, uint32_t ReloadEndMode, uint32_t StartStopMode)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_SLAVE_ADDRESS(Address));
+ assert_param(IS_RELOAD_END_MODE(ReloadEndMode));
+ assert_param(IS_START_STOP_MODE(StartStopMode));
+
+ /* Get the CR2 register value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->CR2;
+
+ /* clear tmpreg specific bits */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)(I2C_CR2_SADD | I2C_CR2_NBYTES | I2C_CR2_RELOAD | I2C_CR2_AUTOEND | I2C_CR2_RD_WRN | I2C_CR2_START | I2C_CR2_STOP));
+
+ /* update tmpreg */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)Address & I2C_CR2_SADD) | (((uint32_t)Number_Bytes << 16 ) & I2C_CR2_NBYTES) | \
+ (uint32_t)ReloadEndMode | (uint32_t)StartStopMode);
+
+ /* update CR2 register */
+ I2Cx->CR2 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup I2C_Group3 SMBUS management functions
+ * @brief SMBUS management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### SMBUS management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides a set of functions that handles SMBus communication
+ and timeouts detection.
+
+ [..] The SMBus Device default address (0b1100 001) is enabled by calling I2C_Init()
+ function and setting I2C_Mode member of I2C_InitTypeDef() structure to
+ I2C_Mode_SMBusDevice.
+
+ [..] The SMBus Host address (0b0001 000) is enabled by calling I2C_Init()
+ function and setting I2C_Mode member of I2C_InitTypeDef() structure to
+ I2C_Mode_SMBusHost.
+
+ [..] The Alert Response Address (0b0001 100) is enabled using I2C_SMBusAlertCmd()
+ function.
+
+ [..] To detect cumulative SCL stretch in master and slave mode, TIMEOUTB should be
+ configured (in accordance to SMBus specification) using I2C_TimeoutBConfig()
+ function then I2C_ExtendedClockTimeoutCmd() function should be called to enable
+ the detection.
+
+ [..] SCL low timeout is detected by configuring TIMEOUTB using I2C_TimeoutBConfig()
+ function followed by the call of I2C_ClockTimeoutCmd(). When adding to this
+ procedure the call of I2C_IdleClockTimeoutCmd() function, Bus Idle condition
+ (both SCL and SDA high) is detected also.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables I2C SMBus alert.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx SMBus alert.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_SMBusAlertCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_1_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable SMBus alert */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_ALERTEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable SMBus alert */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR1_ALERTEN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables I2C Clock Timeout (SCL Timeout detection).
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx clock Timeout.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_ClockTimeoutCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_1_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable Clock Timeout */
+ I2Cx->TIMEOUTR |= I2C_TIMEOUTR_TIMOUTEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable Clock Timeout */
+ I2Cx->TIMEOUTR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_TIMEOUTR_TIMOUTEN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables I2C Extended Clock Timeout (SCL cumulative Timeout detection).
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx Extended clock Timeout.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_ExtendedClockTimeoutCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_1_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable Clock Timeout */
+ I2Cx->TIMEOUTR |= I2C_TIMEOUTR_TEXTEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable Clock Timeout */
+ I2Cx->TIMEOUTR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_TIMEOUTR_TEXTEN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables I2C Idle Clock Timeout (Bus idle SCL and SDA
+ * high detection).
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx Idle clock Timeout.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_IdleClockTimeoutCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_1_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable Clock Timeout */
+ I2Cx->TIMEOUTR |= I2C_TIMEOUTR_TIDLE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable Clock Timeout */
+ I2Cx->TIMEOUTR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_TIMEOUTR_TIDLE);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the I2C Bus Timeout A (SCL Timeout when TIDLE = 0 or Bus
+ * idle SCL and SDA high when TIDLE = 1).
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param Timeout: specifies the TimeoutA to be programmed.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_TimeoutAConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t Timeout)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_1_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_TIMEOUT(Timeout));
+
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->TIMEOUTR;
+
+ /* Reset I2Cx TIMEOUTA bit [11:0] */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_TIMEOUTR_TIMEOUTA);
+
+ /* Set I2Cx TIMEOUTA */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)Timeout & I2C_TIMEOUTR_TIMEOUTA) ;
+
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ I2Cx->TIMEOUTR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the I2C Bus Timeout B (SCL cumulative Timeout).
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param Timeout: specifies the TimeoutB to be programmed.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_TimeoutBConfig(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint16_t Timeout)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_1_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_TIMEOUT(Timeout));
+
+ /* Get the old register value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->TIMEOUTR;
+
+ /* Reset I2Cx TIMEOUTB bit [11:0] */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_TIMEOUTR_TIMEOUTB);
+
+ /* Set I2Cx TIMEOUTB */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)Timeout << 16) & I2C_TIMEOUTR_TIMEOUTB) ;
+
+ /* Store the new register value */
+ I2Cx->TIMEOUTR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables I2C PEC calculation.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx PEC calculation.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_CalculatePEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_1_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable PEC calculation */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_CR1_PECEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable PEC calculation */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR1_PECEN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables I2C PEC transmission/reception request.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the I2Cx PEC request.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_PECRequestCmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_1_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable PEC transmission/reception request */
+ I2Cx->CR2 |= I2C_CR2_PECBYTE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable PEC transmission/reception request */
+ I2Cx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)I2C_CR2_PECBYTE);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the I2C PEC.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @retval The value of the PEC .
+ */
+uint8_t I2C_GetPEC(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_1_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Return the slave matched address in the SR1 register */
+ return (uint8_t)((uint32_t)I2Cx->PECR & I2C_PECR_PEC);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup I2C_Group4 I2C registers management functions
+ * @brief I2C registers management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### I2C registers management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides a functions that allow user the management of
+ I2C registers.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+ /**
+ * @brief Reads the specified I2C register and returns its value.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param I2C_Register: specifies the register to read.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg I2C_Register_CR1: CR1 register.
+ * @arg I2C_Register_CR2: CR2 register.
+ * @arg I2C_Register_OAR1: OAR1 register.
+ * @arg I2C_Register_OAR2: OAR2 register.
+ * @arg I2C_Register_TIMINGR: TIMING register.
+ * @arg I2C_Register_TIMEOUTR: TIMEOUTR register.
+ * @arg I2C_Register_ISR: ISR register.
+ * @arg I2C_Register_ICR: ICR register.
+ * @arg I2C_Register_PECR: PECR register.
+ * @arg I2C_Register_RXDR: RXDR register.
+ * @arg I2C_Register_TXDR: TXDR register.
+ * @retval The value of the read register.
+ */
+uint32_t I2C_ReadRegister(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint8_t I2C_Register)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_REGISTER(I2C_Register));
+
+ tmp = (uint32_t)I2Cx;
+ tmp += I2C_Register;
+
+ /* Return the selected register value */
+ return (*(__IO uint32_t *) tmp);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup I2C_Group5 Data transfers management functions
+ * @brief Data transfers management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Data transfers management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage
+ the I2C data transfers.
+
+ [..] The read access of the I2C_RXDR register can be done using
+ the I2C_ReceiveData() function and returns the received value.
+ Whereas a write access to the I2C_TXDR can be done using I2C_SendData()
+ function and stores the written data into TXDR.
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sends a data byte through the I2Cx peripheral.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param Data: Byte to be transmitted..
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_SendData(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint8_t Data)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Write in the DR register the data to be sent */
+ I2Cx->TXDR = (uint8_t)Data;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the most recent received data by the I2Cx peripheral.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @retval The value of the received data.
+ */
+uint8_t I2C_ReceiveData(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+
+ /* Return the data in the DR register */
+ return (uint8_t)I2Cx->RXDR;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup I2C_Group6 DMA transfers management functions
+ * @brief DMA transfers management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### DMA transfers management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides two functions that can be used only in DMA mode.
+ [..] In DMA Mode, the I2C communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel
+ requests:
+ (#) I2C_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request.
+ (#) I2C_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request.
+ [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following function:
+ (+) I2C_DMACmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState);
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the I2C DMA interface.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param I2C_DMAReq: specifies the I2C DMA transfer request to be enabled or disabled.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg I2C_DMAReq_Tx: Tx DMA transfer request
+ * @arg I2C_DMAReq_Rx: Rx DMA transfer request
+ * @param NewState: new state of the selected I2C DMA transfer request.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2C_DMACmd(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_DMA_REQ(I2C_DMAReq));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected I2C DMA requests */
+ I2Cx->CR1 |= I2C_DMAReq;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected I2C DMA requests */
+ I2Cx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~I2C_DMAReq;
+ }
+}
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup I2C_Group7 Interrupts and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the I2C Interrupts
+ sources and check or clear the flags or pending bits status.
+ The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
+ the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode or DMA mode(refer I2C_Group6).
+
+ *** Polling Mode ***
+ ====================
+ [..] In Polling Mode, the I2C communication can be managed by 15 flags:
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_TXE: to indicate the status of Transmit data register empty flag.
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_TXIS: to indicate the status of Transmit interrupt status flag .
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_RXNE: to indicate the status of Receive data register not empty flag.
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_ADDR: to indicate the status of Address matched flag (slave mode).
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_NACKF: to indicate the status of NACK received flag.
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_STOPF: to indicate the status of STOP detection flag.
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_TC: to indicate the status of Transfer complete flag(master mode).
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_TCR: to indicate the status of Transfer complete reload flag.
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_BERR: to indicate the status of Bus error flag.
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_ARLO: to indicate the status of Arbitration lost flag.
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_OVR: to indicate the status of Overrun/Underrun flag.
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_PECERR: to indicate the status of PEC error in reception flag.
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT: to indicate the status of Timeout or Tlow detection flag.
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_ALERT: to indicate the status of SMBus Alert flag.
+ (#) I2C_FLAG_BUSY: to indicate the status of Bus busy flag.
+
+ [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
+ (+) FlagStatus I2C_GetFlagStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_FLAG);
+ (+) void I2C_ClearFlag(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_FLAG);
+
+ [..]
+ (@)Do not use the BUSY flag to handle each data transmission or reception.It is
+ better to use the TXIS and RXNE flags instead.
+
+ *** Interrupt Mode ***
+ ======================
+ [..] In Interrupt Mode, the I2C communication can be managed by 7 interrupt sources
+ and 15 pending bits:
+ [..] Interrupt Source:
+ (#) I2C_IT_ERRI: specifies the interrupt source for the Error interrupt.
+ (#) I2C_IT_TCI: specifies the interrupt source for the Transfer Complete interrupt.
+ (#) I2C_IT_STOPI: specifies the interrupt source for the Stop Detection interrupt.
+ (#) I2C_IT_NACKI: specifies the interrupt source for the Not Acknowledge received interrupt.
+ (#) I2C_IT_ADDRI: specifies the interrupt source for the Address Match interrupt.
+ (#) I2C_IT_RXI: specifies the interrupt source for the RX interrupt.
+ (#) I2C_IT_TXI: specifies the interrupt source for the TX interrupt.
+
+ [..] Pending Bits:
+ (#) I2C_IT_TXIS: to indicate the status of Transmit interrupt status flag.
+ (#) I2C_IT_RXNE: to indicate the status of Receive data register not empty flag.
+ (#) I2C_IT_ADDR: to indicate the status of Address matched flag (slave mode).
+ (#) I2C_IT_NACKF: to indicate the status of NACK received flag.
+ (#) I2C_IT_STOPF: to indicate the status of STOP detection flag.
+ (#) I2C_IT_TC: to indicate the status of Transfer complete flag (master mode).
+ (#) I2C_IT_TCR: to indicate the status of Transfer complete reload flag.
+ (#) I2C_IT_BERR: to indicate the status of Bus error flag.
+ (#) I2C_IT_ARLO: to indicate the status of Arbitration lost flag.
+ (#) I2C_IT_OVR: to indicate the status of Overrun/Underrun flag.
+ (#) I2C_IT_PECERR: to indicate the status of PEC error in reception flag.
+ (#) I2C_IT_TIMEOUT: to indicate the status of Timeout or Tlow detection flag.
+ (#) I2C_IT_ALERT: to indicate the status of SMBus Alert flag.
+
+ [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
+ (+) void I2C_ClearITPendingBit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT);
+ (+) ITStatus I2C_GetITStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT);
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified I2C flag is set or not.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param I2C_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_TXE: Transmit data register empty
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_TXIS: Transmit interrupt status
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_RXNE: Receive data register not empty
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_ADDR: Address matched (slave mode)
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_NACKF: NACK received flag
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_STOPF: STOP detection flag
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_TC: Transfer complete (master mode)
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_TCR: Transfer complete reload
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_BERR: Bus error
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_ARLO: Arbitration lost
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_OVR: Overrun/Underrun
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_PECERR: PEC error in reception
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow detection flag
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_ALERT: SMBus Alert
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_BUSY: Bus busy
+ * @retval The new state of I2C_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus I2C_GetFlagStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_FLAG)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_GET_FLAG(I2C_FLAG));
+
+ /* Get the ISR register value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->ISR;
+
+ /* Get flag status */
+ tmpreg &= I2C_FLAG;
+
+ if(tmpreg != 0)
+ {
+ /* I2C_FLAG is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* I2C_FLAG is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the I2Cx's pending flags.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param I2C_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_ADDR: Address matched (slave mode)
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_NACKF: NACK received flag
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_STOPF: STOP detection flag
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_BERR: Bus error
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_ARLO: Arbitration lost
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_OVR: Overrun/Underrun
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_PECERR: PEC error in reception
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow detection flag
+ * @arg I2C_FLAG_ALERT: SMBus Alert
+ * @retval The new state of I2C_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+void I2C_ClearFlag(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_CLEAR_FLAG(I2C_FLAG));
+
+ /* Clear the selected flag */
+ I2Cx->ICR = I2C_FLAG;
+ }
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified I2C interrupt has occurred or not.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param I2C_IT: specifies the interrupt source to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg I2C_IT_TXIS: Transmit interrupt status
+ * @arg I2C_IT_RXNE: Receive data register not empty
+ * @arg I2C_IT_ADDR: Address matched (slave mode)
+ * @arg I2C_IT_NACKF: NACK received flag
+ * @arg I2C_IT_STOPF: STOP detection flag
+ * @arg I2C_IT_TC: Transfer complete (master mode)
+ * @arg I2C_IT_TCR: Transfer complete reload
+ * @arg I2C_IT_BERR: Bus error
+ * @arg I2C_IT_ARLO: Arbitration lost
+ * @arg I2C_IT_OVR: Overrun/Underrun
+ * @arg I2C_IT_PECERR: PEC error in reception
+ * @arg I2C_IT_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow detection flag
+ * @arg I2C_IT_ALERT: SMBus Alert
+ * @retval The new state of I2C_IT (SET or RESET).
+ */
+ITStatus I2C_GetITStatus(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ uint32_t enablestatus = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_GET_IT(I2C_IT));
+
+ /* Check if the interrupt source is enabled or not */
+ /* If Error interrupt */
+ if ((uint32_t)(I2C_IT & ERROR_IT_MASK))
+ {
+ enablestatus = (uint32_t)((I2C_CR1_ERRIE) & (I2Cx->CR1));
+ }
+ /* If TC interrupt */
+ else if ((uint32_t)(I2C_IT & TC_IT_MASK))
+ {
+ enablestatus = (uint32_t)((I2C_CR1_TCIE) & (I2Cx->CR1));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ enablestatus = (uint32_t)((I2C_IT) & (I2Cx->CR1));
+ }
+
+ /* Get the ISR register value */
+ tmpreg = I2Cx->ISR;
+
+ /* Get flag status */
+ tmpreg &= I2C_IT;
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified I2C flag */
+ if((tmpreg != RESET) && enablestatus)
+ {
+ /* I2C_IT is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* I2C_IT is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ /* Return the I2C_IT status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the I2Cx's interrupt pending bits.
+ * @param I2Cx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the I2C peripheral.
+ * @param I2C_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg I2C_IT_ADDR: Address matched (slave mode)
+ * @arg I2C_IT_NACKF: NACK received flag
+ * @arg I2C_IT_STOPF: STOP detection flag
+ * @arg I2C_IT_BERR: Bus error
+ * @arg I2C_IT_ARLO: Arbitration lost
+ * @arg I2C_IT_OVR: Overrun/Underrun
+ * @arg I2C_IT_PECERR: PEC error in reception
+ * @arg I2C_IT_TIMEOUT: Timeout or Tlow detection flag
+ * @arg I2C_IT_ALERT: SMBus Alert
+ * @retval The new state of I2C_IT (SET or RESET).
+ */
+void I2C_ClearITPendingBit(I2C_TypeDef* I2Cx, uint32_t I2C_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_ALL_PERIPH(I2Cx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2C_CLEAR_IT(I2C_IT));
+
+ /* Clear the selected flag */
+ I2Cx->ICR = I2C_IT;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_iwdg.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_iwdg.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_iwdg.c
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_iwdg.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Independent watchdog (IWDG) peripheral:
+ * + Prescaler and Counter configuration
+ * + IWDG activation
+ * + Flag management
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+ *
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### IWDG features #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..] The IWDG can be started by either software or hardware (configurable
+ through option byte).
+
+ [..] The IWDG is clocked by its own dedicated low-speed clock (LSI) and
+ thus stays active even if the main clock fails.
+ Once the IWDG is started, the LSI is forced ON and cannot be disabled
+ (LSI cannot be disabled too), and the counter starts counting down from
+ the reset value of 0xFFF. When it reaches the end of count value (0x000)
+ a system reset is generated.
+ The IWDG counter should be reloaded at regular intervals to prevent
+ an MCU reset.
+
+ [..] The IWDG is implemented in the VDD voltage domain that is still functional
+ in STOP and STANDBY mode (IWDG reset can wake-up from STANDBY).
+
+ [..] IWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when a IWDG
+ reset occurs.
+
+ [..] Min-max timeout value @40KHz (LSI): ~0.1ms / ~28.3s
+ The IWDG timeout may vary due to LSI frequency dispersion. STM32F0xx
+ devices provide the capability to measure the LSI frequency (LSI clock
+ should be seleted as RTC clock which is internally connected to TIM10 CH1
+ input capture). The measured value can be used to have an IWDG timeout with
+ an acceptable accuracy.
+ For more information, please refer to the STM32F0xx Reference manual.
+
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..] This driver allows to use IWDG peripheral with either window option enabled
+ or disabled. To do so follow one of the two procedures below.
+ (#) Window option is enabled:
+ (++) Start the IWDG using IWDG_Enable() function, when the IWDG is used
+ in software mode (no need to enable the LSI, it will be enabled
+ by hardware).
+ (++) Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers using
+ IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable) function.
+ (++) Configure the IWDG prescaler using IWDG_SetPrescaler() function.
+ (++) Configure the IWDG counter value using IWDG_SetReload() function.
+ This value will be loaded in the IWDG counter each time the counter
+ is reloaded, then the IWDG will start counting down from this value.
+ (++) Wait for the IWDG registers to be updated using IWDG_GetFlagStatus() function.
+ (++) Configure the IWDG refresh window using IWDG_SetWindowValue() function.
+
+ (#) Window option is disabled:
+ (++) Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers using
+ IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable) function.
+ (++) Configure the IWDG prescaler using IWDG_SetPrescaler() function.
+ (++) Configure the IWDG counter value using IWDG_SetReload() function.
+ This value will be loaded in the IWDG counter each time the counter
+ is reloaded, then the IWDG will start counting down from this value.
+ (++) Wait for the IWDG registers to be updated using IWDG_GetFlagStatus() function.
+ (++) reload the IWDG counter at regular intervals during normal operation
+ to prevent an MCU reset, using IWDG_ReloadCounter() function.
+ (++) Start the IWDG using IWDG_Enable() function, when the IWDG is used
+ in software mode (no need to enable the LSI, it will be enabled
+ by hardware).
+
+ @endverbatim
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_iwdg.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup IWDG
+ * @brief IWDG driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* ---------------------- IWDG registers bit mask ----------------------------*/
+/* KR register bit mask */
+#define KR_KEY_RELOAD ((uint16_t)0xAAAA)
+#define KR_KEY_ENABLE ((uint16_t)0xCCCC)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup IWDG_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup IWDG_Group1 Prescaler and Counter configuration functions
+ * @brief Prescaler and Counter configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Prescaler and Counter configuration functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers.
+ * @param IWDG_WriteAccess: new state of write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg IWDG_WriteAccess_Enable: Enable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers
+ * @arg IWDG_WriteAccess_Disable: Disable write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void IWDG_WriteAccessCmd(uint16_t IWDG_WriteAccess)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_IWDG_WRITE_ACCESS(IWDG_WriteAccess));
+ IWDG->KR = IWDG_WriteAccess;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets IWDG Prescaler value.
+ * @param IWDG_Prescaler: specifies the IWDG Prescaler value.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_4: IWDG prescaler set to 4
+ * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_8: IWDG prescaler set to 8
+ * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_16: IWDG prescaler set to 16
+ * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_32: IWDG prescaler set to 32
+ * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_64: IWDG prescaler set to 64
+ * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_128: IWDG prescaler set to 128
+ * @arg IWDG_Prescaler_256: IWDG prescaler set to 256
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void IWDG_SetPrescaler(uint8_t IWDG_Prescaler)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_IWDG_PRESCALER(IWDG_Prescaler));
+ IWDG->PR = IWDG_Prescaler;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets IWDG Reload value.
+ * @param Reload: specifies the IWDG Reload value.
+ * This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x0FFF.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void IWDG_SetReload(uint16_t Reload)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_IWDG_RELOAD(Reload));
+ IWDG->RLR = Reload;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Reloads IWDG counter with value defined in the reload register
+ * (write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers disabled).
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void IWDG_ReloadCounter(void)
+{
+ IWDG->KR = KR_KEY_RELOAD;
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the IWDG window value.
+ * @param WindowValue: specifies the window value to be compared to the downcounter.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void IWDG_SetWindowValue(uint16_t WindowValue)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_IWDG_WINDOW_VALUE(WindowValue));
+ IWDG->WINR = WindowValue;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup IWDG_Group2 IWDG activation function
+ * @brief IWDG activation function
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### IWDG activation function #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables IWDG (write access to IWDG_PR and IWDG_RLR registers disabled).
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void IWDG_Enable(void)
+{
+ IWDG->KR = KR_KEY_ENABLE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup IWDG_Group3 Flag management function
+ * @brief Flag management function
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Flag management function #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified IWDG flag is set or not.
+ * @param IWDG_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg IWDG_FLAG_PVU: Prescaler Value Update on going
+ * @arg IWDG_FLAG_RVU: Reload Value Update on going
+ * @arg IWDG_FLAG_WVU: Counter Window Value Update on going
+ * @retval The new state of IWDG_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus IWDG_GetFlagStatus(uint16_t IWDG_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_IWDG_FLAG(IWDG_FLAG));
+ if ((IWDG->SR & IWDG_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the flag status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_misc.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_misc.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_misc.c
@@ -0,0 +1,167 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_misc.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides all the miscellaneous firmware functions (add-on
+ * to CMSIS functions).
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_misc.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup MISC
+ * @brief MISC driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup MISC_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ *
+@verbatim
+ *******************************************************************************
+ ##### Interrupts configuration functions #####
+ *******************************************************************************
+ [..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the NVIC interrupts
+ (IRQ). The Cortex-M0 exceptions are managed by CMSIS functions.
+ (#) Enable and Configure the priority of the selected IRQ Channels.
+ The priority can be 0..3.
+
+ -@- Lower priority values gives higher priority.
+ -@- Priority Order:
+ (#@) Lowest priority.
+ (#@) Lowest hardware priority (IRQn position).
+
+@endverbatim
+*/
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the NVIC peripheral according to the specified
+ * parameters in the NVIC_InitStruct.
+ * @param NVIC_InitStruct: pointer to a NVIC_InitTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified NVIC peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void NVIC_Init(NVIC_InitTypeDef* NVIC_InitStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmppriority = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd));
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_PRIORITY(NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPriority));
+
+ if (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelCmd != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Compute the Corresponding IRQ Priority --------------------------------*/
+ tmppriority = NVIC->IP[NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x02];
+ tmppriority &= (uint32_t)(~(((uint32_t)0xFF) << ((NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & 0x03) * 8)));
+ tmppriority |= (uint32_t)((((uint32_t)NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannelPriority << 6) & 0xFF) << ((NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & 0x03) * 8));
+
+ NVIC->IP[NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel >> 0x02] = tmppriority;
+
+ /* Enable the Selected IRQ Channels --------------------------------------*/
+ NVIC->ISER[0] = (uint32_t)0x01 << (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (uint8_t)0x1F);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Selected IRQ Channels -------------------------------------*/
+ NVIC->ICER[0] = (uint32_t)0x01 << (NVIC_InitStruct->NVIC_IRQChannel & (uint8_t)0x1F);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the condition for the system to enter low power mode.
+ * @param LowPowerMode: Specifies the new mode for the system to enter low power mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg NVIC_LP_SEVONPEND: Low Power SEV on Pend.
+ * @arg NVIC_LP_SLEEPDEEP: Low Power DEEPSLEEP request.
+ * @arg NVIC_LP_SLEEPONEXIT: Low Power Sleep on Exit.
+ * @param NewState: new state of LP condition.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void NVIC_SystemLPConfig(uint8_t LowPowerMode, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_NVIC_LP(LowPowerMode));
+
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ SCB->SCR |= LowPowerMode;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ SCB->SCR &= (uint32_t)(~(uint32_t)LowPowerMode);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the SysTick clock source.
+ * @param SysTick_CLKSource: specifies the SysTick clock source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8: AHB clock divided by 8 selected as SysTick clock source.
+ * @arg SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK: AHB clock selected as SysTick clock source.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SysTick_CLKSourceConfig(uint32_t SysTick_CLKSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSTICK_CLK_SOURCE(SysTick_CLKSource));
+
+ if (SysTick_CLKSource == SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK)
+ {
+ SysTick->CTRL |= SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ SysTick->CTRL &= SysTick_CLKSource_HCLK_Div8;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_pwr.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_pwr.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_pwr.c
@@ -0,0 +1,566 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_pwr.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Power Controller (PWR) peripheral:
+ * + Backup Domain Access
+ * + PVD configuration
+ * + WakeUp pins configuration
+ * + Low Power modes configuration
+ * + Flags management
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_pwr.h"
+#include "stm32f0xx_rcc.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR
+ * @brief PWR driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* ------------------ PWR registers bit mask ------------------------ */
+
+/* CR register bit mask */
+#define CR_DS_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFC)
+#define CR_PLS_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF1F)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Group1 Backup Domain Access function
+ * @brief Backup Domain Access function
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Backup Domain Access function #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+ [..] After reset, the Backup Domain Registers (RCC BDCR Register, RTC registers
+ and RTC backup registers) are protected against possible stray write accesses.
+ [..] To enable access to Backup domain use the PWR_BackupAccessCmd(ENABLE) function.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the PWR peripheral registers to their default reset values.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void PWR_DeInit(void)
+{
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_PWR, DISABLE);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables access to the Backup domain registers.
+ * @note If the HSE divided by 32 is used as the RTC clock, the
+ * Backup Domain Access should be kept enabled.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the access to the Backup domain registers.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void PWR_BackupAccessCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Backup Domain Access */
+ PWR->CR |= PWR_CR_DBP;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Backup Domain Access */
+ PWR->CR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)PWR_CR_DBP);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Group2 PVD configuration functions
+ * @brief PVD configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### PVD configuration functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ (+) The PVD is used to monitor the VDD power supply by comparing it to a threshold
+ selected by the PVD Level (PLS[2:0] bits in the PWR_CR).
+ (+) A PVDO flag is available to indicate if VDD/VDDA is higher or lower than the
+ PVD threshold. This event is internally connected to the EXTI line16
+ and can generate an interrupt if enabled through the EXTI registers.
+ (+) The PVD is stopped in Standby mode.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the voltage threshold detected by the Power Voltage Detector(PVD).
+ * @note This function is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param PWR_PVDLevel: specifies the PVD detection level
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_0
+ * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_1
+ * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_2
+ * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_3
+ * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_4
+ * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_5
+ * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_6
+ * @arg PWR_PVDLevel_7
+ * @note Refer to the electrical characteristics of your device datasheet for
+ * more details about the voltage threshold corresponding to each
+ * detection level.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void PWR_PVDLevelConfig(uint32_t PWR_PVDLevel)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_PVD_LEVEL(PWR_PVDLevel));
+
+ tmpreg = PWR->CR;
+
+ /* Clear PLS[7:5] bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR_PLS_MASK;
+
+ /* Set PLS[7:5] bits according to PWR_PVDLevel value */
+ tmpreg |= PWR_PVDLevel;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ PWR->CR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the Power Voltage Detector(PVD).
+ * @note This function is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the PVD.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void PWR_PVDCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the PVD */
+ PWR->CR |= PWR_CR_PVDE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the PVD */
+ PWR->CR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)PWR_CR_PVDE);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Group3 WakeUp pins configuration functions
+ * @brief WakeUp pins configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### WakeUp pin configuration functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+ (+) WakeUp pins are used to wakeup the system from Standby mode. These pins are
+ forced in input pull down configuration and are active on rising edges.
+ (+) There are eight WakeUp pins: WakeUp Pin 1 on PA.00 and WakeUp Pin 2 on PC.13.
+ The following WakeUp pins are only applicable for STM32F072 dvices:
+ WakeUp Pin 3 on PE.06, WakeUp Pin 4 on PA.02, WakeUp Pin 5 on PC.05,
+ WakeUp Pin 6 on PB.05, WakeUp Pin 7 on PB.15 and WakeUp Pin 8 on PF.02.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the WakeUp Pin functionality.
+ * @param PWR_WakeUpPin: specifies the WakeUpPin.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values
+ * @arg PWR_WakeUpPin_1
+ * @arg PWR_WakeUpPin_2
+ * @arg PWR_WakeUpPin_3, only applicable for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg PWR_WakeUpPin_4, only applicable for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg PWR_WakeUpPin_5, only applicable for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg PWR_WakeUpPin_6, only applicable for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg PWR_WakeUpPin_7, only applicable for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg PWR_WakeUpPin_8, only applicable for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param NewState: new state of the WakeUp Pin functionality.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void PWR_WakeUpPinCmd(uint32_t PWR_WakeUpPin, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_WAKEUP_PIN(PWR_WakeUpPin));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the EWUPx pin */
+ PWR->CSR |= PWR_WakeUpPin;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the EWUPx pin */
+ PWR->CSR &= ~PWR_WakeUpPin;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Group4 Low Power modes configuration functions
+ * @brief Low Power modes configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Low Power modes configuration functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+ [..] The devices feature three low-power modes:
+ (+) Sleep mode: Cortex-M0 core stopped, peripherals kept running.
+ (+) Stop mode: all clocks are stopped, regulator running, regulator in low power mode
+ (+) Standby mode: VCORE domain powered off
+
+ *** Sleep mode ***
+ ==================
+ [..]
+ (+) Entry:
+ (++) The Sleep mode is entered by executing the WFE() or WFI() instructions.
+ (+) Exit:
+ (++) Any peripheral interrupt acknowledged by the nested vectored interrupt
+ controller (NVIC) can wake up the device from Sleep mode.
+
+ *** Stop mode ***
+ =================
+ [..] In Stop mode, all clocks in the VCORE domain are stopped, the PLL, the HSI,
+ the HSI14 and the HSE RC oscillators are disabled. Internal SRAM and register
+ contents are preserved.
+ The voltage regulator can be configured either in normal or low-power mode.
+
+ (+) Entry:
+ (++) The Stop mode is entered using the PWR_EnterSTOPMode(PWR_Regulator_LowPower,)
+ function with regulator in LowPower or with Regulator ON.
+ (+) Exit:
+ (++) Any EXTI Line (Internal or External) configured in Interrupt/Event mode
+ or any internal IPs (I2C, UASRT or CEC) wakeup event.
+
+ *** Standby mode ***
+ ====================
+ [..] The Standby mode allows to achieve the lowest power consumption. It is based
+ on the Cortex-M0 deepsleep mode, with the voltage regulator disabled.
+ The VCORE domain is consequently powered off. The PLL, the HSI, the HSI14
+ oscillator and the HSE oscillator are also switched off. SRAM and register
+ contents are lost except for the Backup domain (RTC registers, RTC backup
+ registers and Standby circuitry).
+
+ [..] The voltage regulator is OFF.
+
+ (+) Entry:
+ (++) The Standby mode is entered using the PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode() function.
+ (+) Exit:
+ (++) WKUP pin rising edge, RTC alarm (Alarm A and Alarm B), RTC wakeup,
+ tamper event, time-stamp event, external reset in NRST pin, IWDG reset.
+
+ *** Auto-wakeup (AWU) from low-power mode ***
+ =============================================
+ [..] The MCU can be woken up from low-power mode by an RTC Alarm event, a tamper
+ event, a time-stamp event, or a comparator event, without depending on an
+ external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode).
+
+ (+) RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode
+ (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to:
+ (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 17 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt
+ or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function.
+ (+++) Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function
+ (+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm()
+ and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.
+ (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it
+ is necessary to:
+ (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 19 to be sensitive to rising edges (Interrupt
+ or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function.
+ (+++) Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig()
+ function.
+ (+++) Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the
+ RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd()
+ functions.
+
+ (+) RTC auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Standby mode
+ (++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC alarm event, it is necessary to:
+ (+++) Enable the RTC Alarm Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig() function.
+ (+++) Configure the RTC to generate the RTC alarm using the RTC_SetAlarm()
+ and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.
+ (++) To wake up from the Standby mode with an RTC Tamper or time stamp event, it
+ is necessary to:
+ (+++) Enable the RTC Tamper or time stamp Interrupt using the RTC_ITConfig()
+ function.
+ (+++) Configure the RTC to detect the tamper or time stamp event using the
+ RTC_TimeStampConfig(), RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd()
+ functions.
+
+ (+) Comparator auto-wakeup (AWU) from the Stop mode
+ (++) To wake up from the Stop mode with an comparator 1 or comparator 2 wakeup
+ event, it is necessary to:
+ (+++) Configure the EXTI Line 21 for comparator 1 or EXTI Line 22 for comparator 2
+ to be sensitive to to the selected edges (falling, rising or falling
+ and rising) (Interrupt or Event modes) using the EXTI_Init() function.
+ (+++) Configure the comparator to generate the event.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enters Sleep mode.
+ * @note In Sleep mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode.
+ * @param PWR_SLEEPEntry: specifies if SLEEP mode in entered with WFI or WFE instruction.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFI: enter SLEEP mode with WFI instruction
+ * @arg PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFE: enter SLEEP mode with WFE instruction
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void PWR_EnterSleepMode(uint8_t PWR_SLEEPEntry)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_SLEEP_ENTRY(PWR_SLEEPEntry));
+
+ /* Clear SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex-M0 System Control Register */
+ SCB->SCR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk);
+
+ /* Select SLEEP mode entry -------------------------------------------------*/
+ if(PWR_SLEEPEntry == PWR_SLEEPEntry_WFI)
+ {
+ /* Request Wait For Interrupt */
+ __WFI();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Request Wait For Event */
+ __SEV();
+ __WFE();
+ __WFE();
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enters STOP mode.
+ * @note In Stop mode, all I/O pins keep the same state as in Run mode.
+ * @note When exiting Stop mode by issuing an interrupt or a wakeup event,
+ * the HSI RC oscillator is selected as system clock.
+ * @note When the voltage regulator operates in low power mode, an additional
+ * startup delay is incurred when waking up from Stop mode.
+ * By keeping the internal regulator ON during Stop mode, the consumption
+ * is higher although the startup time is reduced.
+ * @param PWR_Regulator: specifies the regulator state in STOP mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_Regulator_ON: STOP mode with regulator ON
+ * @arg PWR_Regulator_LowPower: STOP mode with regulator in low power mode
+ * @param PWR_STOPEntry: specifies if STOP mode in entered with WFI or WFE instruction.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_STOPEntry_WFI: enter STOP mode with WFI instruction
+ * @arg PWR_STOPEntry_WFE: enter STOP mode with WFE instruction
+ @arg PWR_STOPEntry_SLEEPONEXIT: enter STOP mode with SLEEPONEXIT instruction
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void PWR_EnterSTOPMode(uint32_t PWR_Regulator, uint8_t PWR_STOPEntry)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_REGULATOR(PWR_Regulator));
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_STOP_ENTRY(PWR_STOPEntry));
+
+ /* Select the regulator state in STOP mode ---------------------------------*/
+ tmpreg = PWR->CR;
+ /* Clear PDDS and LPDSR bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR_DS_MASK;
+
+ /* Set LPDSR bit according to PWR_Regulator value */
+ tmpreg |= PWR_Regulator;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ PWR->CR = tmpreg;
+
+ /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex-M0 System Control Register */
+ SCB->SCR |= SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk;
+
+ /* Select STOP mode entry --------------------------------------------------*/
+ if(PWR_STOPEntry == PWR_STOPEntry_WFI)
+ {
+ /* Request Wait For Interrupt */
+ __WFI();
+ /* Reset SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ SCB->SCR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk);
+ }
+ else if (PWR_STOPEntry == PWR_STOPEntry_WFE)
+ {
+ /* Request Wait For Event */
+ __WFE();
+ /* Reset SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex System Control Register */
+ SCB->SCR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Set SLEEP on exit bit of Cortex-M0 System Control Register */
+ SCB->SCR |= SCB_SCR_SLEEPONEXIT_Msk;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enters STANDBY mode.
+ * @note In Standby mode, all I/O pins are high impedance except for:
+ * - Reset pad (still available)
+ * - RTC_AF1 pin (PC13) if configured for Wakeup pin 2 (WKUP2), tamper,
+ * time-stamp, RTC Alarm out, or RTC clock calibration out.
+ * - WKUP pin 1 (PA0) if enabled.
+ * @note The Wakeup flag (WUF) need to be cleared at application level before to call this function
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void PWR_EnterSTANDBYMode(void)
+{
+ /* Select STANDBY mode */
+ PWR->CR |= PWR_CR_PDDS;
+
+ /* Set SLEEPDEEP bit of Cortex-M0 System Control Register */
+ SCB->SCR |= SCB_SCR_SLEEPDEEP_Msk;
+
+ /* Request Wait For Interrupt */
+ __WFI();
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup PWR_Group5 Flags management functions
+ * @brief Flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Flags management functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified PWR flag is set or not.
+ * @param PWR_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_FLAG_WU: Wake Up flag. This flag indicates that a wakeup
+ * event was received from the WKUP pin or from the RTC alarm
+ * (Alarm A or Alarm B), RTC Tamper event or RTC TimeStamp event.
+ * @arg PWR_FLAG_SB: StandBy flag. This flag indicates that the
+ * system was resumed from StandBy mode.
+ * @arg PWR_FLAG_PVDO: PVD Output. This flag is valid only if PVD
+ * is enabled by the PWR_PVDCmd() function.
+ * @arg PWR_FLAG_VREFINTRDY: Internal Voltage Reference Ready flag.
+ * This flag indicates the state of the internal voltage
+ * reference, VREFINT.
+ * @retval The new state of PWR_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus PWR_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t PWR_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_GET_FLAG(PWR_FLAG));
+
+ if ((PWR->CSR & PWR_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the flag status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the PWR's pending flags.
+ * @param PWR_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg PWR_FLAG_WU: Wake Up flag
+ * @arg PWR_FLAG_SB: StandBy flag
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void PWR_ClearFlag(uint32_t PWR_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_PWR_CLEAR_FLAG(PWR_FLAG));
+
+ PWR->CR |= PWR_FLAG << 2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_rcc.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_rcc.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_rcc.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1781 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_rcc.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Reset and clock control (RCC) peripheral:
+ * + Internal/external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration
+ * + System, AHB and APB busses clocks configuration
+ * + Peripheral clocks configuration
+ * + Interrupts and flags management
+ *
+ @verbatim
+
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### RCC specific features #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] After reset the device is running from HSI (8 MHz) with Flash 0 WS,
+ all peripherals are off except internal SRAM, Flash and SWD.
+ (#) There is no prescaler on High speed (AHB) and Low speed (APB) busses;
+ all peripherals mapped on these busses are running at HSI speed.
+ (#) The clock for all peripherals is switched off, except the SRAM and FLASH.
+ (#) All GPIOs are in input floating state, except the SWD pins which
+ are assigned to be used for debug purpose.
+ [..] Once the device started from reset, the user application has to:
+ (#) Configure the clock source to be used to drive the System clock
+ (if the application needs higher frequency/performance)
+ (#) Configure the System clock frequency and Flash settings
+ (#) Configure the AHB and APB busses prescalers
+ (#) Enable the clock for the peripheral(s) to be used
+ (#) Configure the clock source(s) for peripherals which clocks are not
+ derived from the System clock (ADC, CEC, I2C, USART, RTC and IWDG)
+
+ @endverbatim
+
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_rcc.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RCC
+ * @brief RCC driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* ---------------------- RCC registers mask -------------------------------- */
+/* RCC Flag Mask */
+#define FLAG_MASK ((uint8_t)0x1F)
+
+/* CR register byte 2 (Bits[23:16]) base address */
+#define CR_BYTE2_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40021002)
+
+/* CFGR register byte 3 (Bits[31:23]) base address */
+#define CFGR_BYTE3_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40021007)
+
+/* CIR register byte 1 (Bits[15:8]) base address */
+#define CIR_BYTE1_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x40021009)
+
+/* CIR register byte 2 (Bits[23:16]) base address */
+#define CIR_BYTE2_ADDRESS ((uint32_t)0x4002100A)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+static __I uint8_t APBAHBPrescTable[16] = {0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9};
+
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup RCC_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RCC_Group1 Internal and external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration functions
+ * @brief Internal and external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Internal-external clocks, PLL, CSS and MCO configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides functions allowing to configure the internal/external clocks,
+ PLL, CSS and MCO.
+ (#) HSI (high-speed internal), 8 MHz factory-trimmed RC used directly
+ or through the PLL as System clock source.
+ The HSI clock can be used also to clock the USART, I2C and CEC peripherals.
+ (#) HSI14 (high-speed internal for ADC), 14 MHz factory-trimmed RC used to clock
+ the ADC peripheral.
+ (#) LSI (low-speed internal), 40 KHz low consumption RC used as IWDG and/or RTC
+ clock source.
+ (#) HSE (high-speed external), 4 to 32 MHz crystal oscillator used directly or
+ through the PLL as System clock source. Can be used also as RTC clock source.
+ (#) LSE (low-speed external), 32 KHz oscillator used as RTC clock source.
+ LSE can be used also to clock the USART and CEC peripherals.
+ (#) PLL (clocked by HSI or HSE), for System clock.
+ (#) CSS (Clock security system), once enabled and if a HSE clock failure occurs
+ (HSE used directly or through PLL as System clock source), the System clock
+ is automatically switched to HSI and an interrupt is generated if enabled.
+ The interrupt is linked to the Cortex-M0 NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt)
+ exception vector.
+ (#) MCO (microcontroller clock output), used to output SYSCLK, HSI, HSI14, LSI,
+ HSE, LSE or PLL (divided by 2) clock on PA8 pin.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Resets the RCC clock configuration to the default reset state.
+ * @note The default reset state of the clock configuration is given below:
+ * @note HSI ON and used as system clock source
+ * @note HSI14, HSE and PLL OFF
+ * @note AHB, APB prescaler set to 1.
+ * @note CSS and MCO OFF
+ * @note All interrupts disabled
+ * @note However, this function doesn't modify the configuration of the
+ * @note Peripheral clocks
+ * @note LSI, LSE and RTC clocks
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_DeInit(void)
+{
+ /* Set HSION bit */
+ RCC->CR |= (uint32_t)0x00000001;
+
+#if defined (STM32F051)
+ /* Reset SW[1:0], HPRE[3:0], PPRE[2:0] and MCOSEL[2:0] bits */
+ RCC->CFGR &= (uint32_t)0xF8FFB80C;
+#else
+ /* Reset SW[1:0], HPRE[3:0], PPRE[2:0], ADCPRE, MCOSEL[2:0], MCOPRE[2:0] and PLLNODIV bits */
+ RCC->CFGR &= (uint32_t)0x08FFB80C;
+#endif /* STM32F051 */
+
+ /* Reset HSEON, CSSON and PLLON bits */
+ RCC->CR &= (uint32_t)0xFEF6FFFF;
+
+ /* Reset HSEBYP bit */
+ RCC->CR &= (uint32_t)0xFFFBFFFF;
+
+ /* Reset PLLSRC, PLLXTPRE and PLLMUL[3:0] bits */
+ RCC->CFGR &= (uint32_t)0xFFC0FFFF;
+
+ /* Reset PREDIV1[3:0] bits */
+ RCC->CFGR2 &= (uint32_t)0xFFFFFFF0;
+
+ /* Reset USARTSW[1:0], I2CSW, CECSW and ADCSW bits */
+ RCC->CFGR3 &= (uint32_t)0xFFF0FEAC;
+
+ /* Reset HSI14 bit */
+ RCC->CR2 &= (uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFE;
+
+ /* Disable all interrupts */
+ RCC->CIR = 0x00000000;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the External High Speed oscillator (HSE).
+ * @note After enabling the HSE (RCC_HSE_ON or RCC_HSE_Bypass), the application
+ * software should wait on HSERDY flag to be set indicating that HSE clock
+ * is stable and can be used to clock the PLL and/or system clock.
+ * @note HSE state can not be changed if it is used directly or through the
+ * PLL as system clock. In this case, you have to select another source
+ * of the system clock then change the HSE state (ex. disable it).
+ * @note The HSE is stopped by hardware when entering STOP and STANDBY modes.
+ * @note This function resets the CSSON bit, so if the Clock security system(CSS)
+ * was previously enabled you have to enable it again after calling this
+ * function.
+ * @param RCC_HSE: specifies the new state of the HSE.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_HSE_OFF: turn OFF the HSE oscillator, HSERDY flag goes low after
+ * 6 HSE oscillator clock cycles.
+ * @arg RCC_HSE_ON: turn ON the HSE oscillator
+ * @arg RCC_HSE_Bypass: HSE oscillator bypassed with external clock
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_HSEConfig(uint8_t RCC_HSE)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_HSE(RCC_HSE));
+
+ /* Reset HSEON and HSEBYP bits before configuring the HSE ------------------*/
+ *(__IO uint8_t *) CR_BYTE2_ADDRESS = RCC_HSE_OFF;
+
+ /* Set the new HSE configuration -------------------------------------------*/
+ *(__IO uint8_t *) CR_BYTE2_ADDRESS = RCC_HSE;
+
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Waits for HSE start-up.
+ * @note This function waits on HSERDY flag to be set and return SUCCESS if
+ * this flag is set, otherwise returns ERROR if the timeout is reached
+ * and this flag is not set. The timeout value is defined by the constant
+ * HSE_STARTUP_TIMEOUT in stm32f0xx.h file. You can tailor it depending
+ * on the HSE crystal used in your application.
+ * @note The HSE is stopped by hardware when entering STOP and STANDBY modes.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
+ * - SUCCESS: HSE oscillator is stable and ready to use
+ * - ERROR: HSE oscillator not yet ready
+ */
+ErrorStatus RCC_WaitForHSEStartUp(void)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t StartUpCounter = 0;
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+ FlagStatus HSEStatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Wait till HSE is ready and if timeout is reached exit */
+ do
+ {
+ HSEStatus = RCC_GetFlagStatus(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY);
+ StartUpCounter++;
+ } while((StartUpCounter != HSE_STARTUP_TIMEOUT) && (HSEStatus == RESET));
+
+ if (RCC_GetFlagStatus(RCC_FLAG_HSERDY) != RESET)
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ return (status);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Adjusts the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI) calibration value.
+ * @note The calibration is used to compensate for the variations in voltage
+ * and temperature that influence the frequency of the internal HSI RC.
+ * Refer to the Application Note AN4067 for more details on how to
+ * calibrate the HSI.
+ * @param HSICalibrationValue: specifies the HSI calibration trimming value.
+ * This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x1F.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue(uint8_t HSICalibrationValue)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_HSI_CALIBRATION_VALUE(HSICalibrationValue));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CR;
+
+ /* Clear HSITRIM[4:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= ~RCC_CR_HSITRIM;
+
+ /* Set the HSITRIM[4:0] bits according to HSICalibrationValue value */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)HSICalibrationValue << 3;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the Internal High Speed oscillator (HSI).
+ * @note After enabling the HSI, the application software should wait on
+ * HSIRDY flag to be set indicating that HSI clock is stable and can
+ * be used to clock the PLL and/or system clock.
+ * @note HSI can not be stopped if it is used directly or through the PLL
+ * as system clock. In this case, you have to select another source
+ * of the system clock then stop the HSI.
+ * @note The HSI is stopped by hardware when entering STOP and STANDBY modes.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the HSI.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note When the HSI is stopped, HSIRDY flag goes low after 6 HSI oscillator
+ * clock cycles.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_HSICmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->CR |= RCC_CR_HSION;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->CR &= ~RCC_CR_HSION;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Adjusts the Internal High Speed oscillator for ADC (HSI14)
+ * calibration value.
+ * @note The calibration is used to compensate for the variations in voltage
+ * and temperature that influence the frequency of the internal HSI RC.
+ * Refer to the Application Note AN4067 for more details on how to
+ * calibrate the HSI14.
+ * @param HSI14CalibrationValue: specifies the HSI14 calibration trimming value.
+ * This parameter must be a number between 0 and 0x1F.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_AdjustHSI14CalibrationValue(uint8_t HSI14CalibrationValue)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_HSI14_CALIBRATION_VALUE(HSI14CalibrationValue));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CR2;
+
+ /* Clear HSI14TRIM[4:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= ~RCC_CR2_HSI14TRIM;
+
+ /* Set the HSITRIM14[4:0] bits according to HSI14CalibrationValue value */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)HSI14CalibrationValue << 3;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CR2 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the Internal High Speed oscillator for ADC (HSI14).
+ * @note After enabling the HSI14, the application software should wait on
+ * HSIRDY flag to be set indicating that HSI clock is stable and can
+ * be used to clock the ADC.
+ * @note The HSI14 is stopped by hardware when entering STOP and STANDBY modes.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the HSI14.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note When the HSI14 is stopped, HSI14RDY flag goes low after 6 HSI14 oscillator
+ * clock cycles.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_HSI14Cmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->CR2 |= RCC_CR2_HSI14ON;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->CR2 &= ~RCC_CR2_HSI14ON;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the Internal High Speed oscillator request from ADC.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the HSI14 ADC request.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_HSI14ADCRequestCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->CR2 &= ~RCC_CR2_HSI14DIS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->CR2 |= RCC_CR2_HSI14DIS;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the External Low Speed oscillator (LSE).
+ * @note As the LSE is in the Backup domain and write access is denied to this
+ * domain after reset, you have to enable write access using
+ * PWR_BackupAccessCmd(ENABLE) function before to configure the LSE
+ * (to be done once after reset).
+ * @note After enabling the LSE (RCC_LSE_ON or RCC_LSE_Bypass), the application
+ * software should wait on LSERDY flag to be set indicating that LSE clock
+ * is stable and can be used to clock the RTC.
+ * @param RCC_LSE: specifies the new state of the LSE.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_LSE_OFF: turn OFF the LSE oscillator, LSERDY flag goes low after
+ * 6 LSE oscillator clock cycles.
+ * @arg RCC_LSE_ON: turn ON the LSE oscillator
+ * @arg RCC_LSE_Bypass: LSE oscillator bypassed with external clock
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_LSEConfig(uint32_t RCC_LSE)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_LSE(RCC_LSE));
+
+ /* Reset LSEON and LSEBYP bits before configuring the LSE ------------------*/
+ /* Reset LSEON bit */
+ RCC->BDCR &= ~(RCC_BDCR_LSEON);
+
+ /* Reset LSEBYP bit */
+ RCC->BDCR &= ~(RCC_BDCR_LSEBYP);
+
+ /* Configure LSE */
+ RCC->BDCR |= RCC_LSE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the External Low Speed oscillator (LSE) drive capability.
+ * @param RCC_LSEDrive: specifies the new state of the LSE drive capability.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_LSEDrive_Low: LSE oscillator low drive capability.
+ * @arg RCC_LSEDrive_MediumLow: LSE oscillator medium low drive capability.
+ * @arg RCC_LSEDrive_MediumHigh: LSE oscillator medium high drive capability.
+ * @arg RCC_LSEDrive_High: LSE oscillator high drive capability.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_LSEDriveConfig(uint32_t RCC_LSEDrive)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_LSE_DRIVE(RCC_LSEDrive));
+
+ /* Clear LSEDRV[1:0] bits */
+ RCC->BDCR &= ~(RCC_BDCR_LSEDRV);
+
+ /* Set the LSE Drive */
+ RCC->BDCR |= RCC_LSEDrive;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the Internal Low Speed oscillator (LSI).
+ * @note After enabling the LSI, the application software should wait on
+ * LSIRDY flag to be set indicating that LSI clock is stable and can
+ * be used to clock the IWDG and/or the RTC.
+ * @note LSI can not be disabled if the IWDG is running.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the LSI.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note When the LSI is stopped, LSIRDY flag goes low after 6 LSI oscillator
+ * clock cycles.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_LSICmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->CSR |= RCC_CSR_LSION;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->CSR &= ~RCC_CSR_LSION;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the PLL clock source and multiplication factor.
+ * @note This function must be used only when the PLL is disabled.
+ *
+ * @param RCC_PLLSource: specifies the PLL entry clock source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_PLLSource_HSI_Div2: HSI oscillator clock selected as PLL clock source
+ * @arg RCC_PLLSource_PREDIV1: PREDIV1 clock selected as PLL clock entry
+ * @arg RCC_PLLSource_HSI48 HSI48 oscillator clock selected as PLL clock source, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_PLLSource_HSI: HSI clock selected as PLL clock entry, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note The minimum input clock frequency for PLL is 2 MHz (when using HSE as
+ * PLL source).
+ *
+ * @param RCC_PLLMul: specifies the PLL multiplication factor, which drive the PLLVCO clock
+ * This parameter can be RCC_PLLMul_x where x:[2,16]
+ *
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_PLLConfig(uint32_t RCC_PLLSource, uint32_t RCC_PLLMul)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL_SOURCE(RCC_PLLSource));
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PLL_MUL(RCC_PLLMul));
+
+ /* Clear PLL Source [16] and Multiplier [21:18] bits */
+ RCC->CFGR &= ~(RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL | RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC);
+
+ /* Set the PLL Source and Multiplier */
+ RCC->CFGR |= (uint32_t)(RCC_PLLSource | RCC_PLLMul);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the PLL.
+ * @note After enabling the PLL, the application software should wait on
+ * PLLRDY flag to be set indicating that PLL clock is stable and can
+ * be used as system clock source.
+ * @note The PLL can not be disabled if it is used as system clock source
+ * @note The PLL is disabled by hardware when entering STOP and STANDBY modes.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the PLL.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_PLLCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->CR |= RCC_CR_PLLON;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->CR &= ~RCC_CR_PLLON;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the Internal High Speed oscillator for USB (HSI48).
+ * This function is only applicable for STM32F072 devices.
+ * @note After enabling the HSI48, the application software should wait on
+ * HSI48RDY flag to be set indicating that HSI48 clock is stable and can
+ * be used to clock the USB.
+ * @note The HSI48 is stopped by hardware when entering STOP and STANDBY modes.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the HSI48.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_HSI48Cmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->CR2 |= RCC_CR2_HSI48ON;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->CR2 &= ~RCC_CR2_HSI48ON;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the PREDIV1 division factor.
+ * @note This function must be used only when the PLL is disabled.
+ * @param RCC_PREDIV1_Div: specifies the PREDIV1 clock division factor.
+ * This parameter can be RCC_PREDIV1_Divx where x:[1,16]
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_PREDIV1Config(uint32_t RCC_PREDIV1_Div)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PREDIV1(RCC_PREDIV1_Div));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR2;
+ /* Clear PREDIV1[3:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= ~(RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1);
+ /* Set the PREDIV1 division factor */
+ tmpreg |= RCC_PREDIV1_Div;
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CFGR2 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the Clock Security System.
+ * @note If a failure is detected on the HSE oscillator clock, this oscillator
+ * is automatically disabled and an interrupt is generated to inform the
+ * software about the failure (Clock Security System Interrupt, CSSI),
+ * allowing the MCU to perform rescue operations. The CSSI is linked to
+ * the Cortex-M0 NMI (Non-Maskable Interrupt) exception vector.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the Clock Security System.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_ClockSecuritySystemCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->CR |= RCC_CR_CSSON;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->CR &= ~RCC_CR_CSSON;
+ }
+}
+
+#ifdef STM32F051
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the clock source to output on MCO pin (PA8).
+ * @note PA8 should be configured in alternate function mode.
+ * @param RCC_MCOSource: specifies the clock source to output.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_NoClock: No clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_HSI14: HSI14 oscillator clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_LSI: LSI oscillator clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_LSE: LSE oscillator clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_SYSCLK: System clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_HSI: HSI oscillator clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_HSE: HSE oscillator clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_PLLCLK_Div2: PLL clock divided by 2 selected.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_MCOConfig(uint8_t RCC_MCOSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MCO_SOURCE(RCC_MCOSource));
+
+ /* Select MCO clock source and prescaler */
+ *(__IO uint8_t *) CFGR_BYTE3_ADDRESS = RCC_MCOSource;
+}
+#else
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the clock source to output on MCO pin (PA8) and the corresponding
+ * prescsaler.
+ * @note PA8 should be configured in alternate function mode.
+ * @param RCC_MCOSource: specifies the clock source to output.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_NoClock: No clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_HSI14: HSI14 oscillator clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_LSI: LSI oscillator clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_LSE: LSE oscillator clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_SYSCLK: System clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_HSI: HSI oscillator clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_HSE: HSE oscillator clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_PLLCLK_Div2: PLL clock divided by 2 selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_PLLCLK: PLL clock selected.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOSource_HSI48: HSI48 clock selected.
+ * @param RCC_MCOPrescaler: specifies the prescaler on MCO pin.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_MCOPrescaler_1: MCO clock is divided by 1.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOPrescaler_2: MCO clock is divided by 2.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOPrescaler_4: MCO clock is divided by 4.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOPrescaler_8: MCO clock is divided by 8.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOPrescaler_16: MCO clock is divided by 16.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOPrescaler_32: MCO clock is divided by 32.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOPrescaler_64: MCO clock is divided by 64.
+ * @arg RCC_MCOPrescaler_128: MCO clock is divided by 128.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_MCOConfig(uint8_t RCC_MCOSource, uint32_t RCC_MCOPrescaler)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MCO_SOURCE(RCC_MCOSource));
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_MCO_PRESCALER(RCC_MCOPrescaler));
+
+ /* Get CFGR value */
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+ /* Clear MCOPRE[2:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= ~(RCC_CFGR_MCO_PRE | RCC_CFGR_MCO | RCC_CFGR_PLLNODIV);
+ /* Set the RCC_MCOSource and RCC_MCOPrescaler */
+ tmpreg |= (RCC_MCOPrescaler | ((uint32_t)RCC_MCOSource<<24));
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+#endif /* STM32F072 */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RCC_Group2 System AHB and APB busses clocks configuration functions
+ * @brief System, AHB and APB busses clocks configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### System, AHB and APB busses clocks configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ [..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the System, AHB and
+ APB busses clocks.
+ (#) Several clock sources can be used to drive the System clock (SYSCLK): HSI,
+ HSE and PLL.
+ The AHB clock (HCLK) is derived from System clock through configurable prescaler
+ and used to clock the CPU, memory and peripherals mapped on AHB bus (DMA and GPIO).
+ and APB (PCLK) clocks are derived from AHB clock through
+ configurable prescalers and used to clock the peripherals mapped on these busses.
+ You can use "RCC_GetClocksFreq()" function to retrieve the frequencies of these clocks.
+
+ -@- All the peripheral clocks are derived from the System clock (SYSCLK) except:
+ (+@) The ADC clock which is derived from HSI14 or APB (APB divided by a
+ programmable prescaler: 2 or 4).
+ (+@) The CEC clock which is derived from LSE or HSI divided by 244.
+ (+@) The I2C clock which is derived from HSI or system clock (SYSCLK).
+ (+@) The USART clock which is derived from HSI, system clock (SYSCLK), APB or LSE.
+ (+@) The RTC/LCD clock which is derived from the LSE, LSI or 2 MHz HSE_RTC (HSE
+ divided by a programmable prescaler).
+ The System clock (SYSCLK) frequency must be higher or equal to the RTC/LCD
+ clock frequency.
+ (+@) IWDG clock which is always the LSI clock.
+
+ (#) The maximum frequency of the SYSCLK, HCLK and PCLK is 48 MHz.
+ Depending on the maximum frequency, the FLASH wait states (WS) should be
+ adapted accordingly:
+ +--------------------------------------------- +
+ | Wait states | HCLK clock frequency (MHz) |
+ |---------------|------------------------------|
+ |0WS(1CPU cycle)| 0 < HCLK <= 24 |
+ |---------------|------------------------------|
+ |1WS(2CPU cycle)| 24 < HCLK <= 48 |
+ +----------------------------------------------+
+
+ (#) After reset, the System clock source is the HSI (8 MHz) with 0 WS and
+ prefetch is disabled.
+
+ [..] It is recommended to use the following software sequences to tune the number
+ of wait states needed to access the Flash memory with the CPU frequency (HCLK).
+ (+) Increasing the CPU frequency
+ (++) Program the Flash Prefetch buffer, using "FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(ENABLE)"
+ function
+ (++) Check that Flash Prefetch buffer activation is taken into account by
+ reading FLASH_ACR using the FLASH_GetPrefetchBufferStatus() function
+ (++) Program Flash WS to 1, using "FLASH_SetLatency(FLASH_Latency_1)" function
+ (++) Check that the new number of WS is taken into account by reading FLASH_ACR
+ (++) Modify the CPU clock source, using "RCC_SYSCLKConfig()" function
+ (++) If needed, modify the CPU clock prescaler by using "RCC_HCLKConfig()" function
+ (++) Check that the new CPU clock source is taken into account by reading
+ the clock source status, using "RCC_GetSYSCLKSource()" function
+ (+) Decreasing the CPU frequency
+ (++) Modify the CPU clock source, using "RCC_SYSCLKConfig()" function
+ (++) If needed, modify the CPU clock prescaler by using "RCC_HCLKConfig()" function
+ (++) Check that the new CPU clock source is taken into account by reading
+ the clock source status, using "RCC_GetSYSCLKSource()" function
+ (++) Program the new number of WS, using "FLASH_SetLatency()" function
+ (++) Check that the new number of WS is taken into account by reading FLASH_ACR
+ (++) Disable the Flash Prefetch buffer using "FLASH_PrefetchBufferCmd(DISABLE)"
+ function
+ (++) Check that Flash Prefetch buffer deactivation is taken into account by reading FLASH_ACR
+ using the FLASH_GetPrefetchBufferStatus() function.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the system clock (SYSCLK).
+ * @note The HSI is used (enabled by hardware) as system clock source after
+ * startup from Reset, wake-up from STOP and STANDBY mode, or in case
+ * of failure of the HSE used directly or indirectly as system clock
+ * (if the Clock Security System CSS is enabled).
+ * @note A switch from one clock source to another occurs only if the target
+ * clock source is ready (clock stable after startup delay or PLL locked).
+ * If a clock source which is not yet ready is selected, the switch will
+ * occur when the clock source will be ready.
+ * You can use RCC_GetSYSCLKSource() function to know which clock is
+ * currently used as system clock source.
+ * @param RCC_SYSCLKSource: specifies the clock source used as system clock source
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSI: HSI selected as system clock source
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSE: HSE selected as system clock source
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLKSource_PLLCLK: PLL selected as system clock source
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLKSource_HSI48: HSI48 selected as system clock source, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_SYSCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_SYSCLKSource)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_SYSCLK_SOURCE(RCC_SYSCLKSource));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+
+ /* Clear SW[1:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= ~RCC_CFGR_SW;
+
+ /* Set SW[1:0] bits according to RCC_SYSCLKSource value */
+ tmpreg |= RCC_SYSCLKSource;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the clock source used as system clock.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval The clock source used as system clock. The returned value can be one
+ * of the following values:
+ * - 0x00: HSI used as system clock
+ * - 0x04: HSE used as system clock
+ * - 0x08: PLL used as system clock
+ * - 0x0C: HSI48 used as system clock, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ */
+uint8_t RCC_GetSYSCLKSource(void)
+{
+ return ((uint8_t)(RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_SWS));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the AHB clock (HCLK).
+ * @param RCC_SYSCLK: defines the AHB clock divider. This clock is derived from
+ * the system clock (SYSCLK).
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div1: AHB clock = SYSCLK
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div2: AHB clock = SYSCLK/2
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div4: AHB clock = SYSCLK/4
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div8: AHB clock = SYSCLK/8
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div16: AHB clock = SYSCLK/16
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div64: AHB clock = SYSCLK/64
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div128: AHB clock = SYSCLK/128
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div256: AHB clock = SYSCLK/256
+ * @arg RCC_SYSCLK_Div512: AHB clock = SYSCLK/512
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_HCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_SYSCLK)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_HCLK(RCC_SYSCLK));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+
+ /* Clear HPRE[3:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= ~RCC_CFGR_HPRE;
+
+ /* Set HPRE[3:0] bits according to RCC_SYSCLK value */
+ tmpreg |= RCC_SYSCLK;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the APB clock (PCLK).
+ * @param RCC_HCLK: defines the APB clock divider. This clock is derived from
+ * the AHB clock (HCLK).
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div1: APB clock = HCLK
+ * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div2: APB clock = HCLK/2
+ * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div4: APB clock = HCLK/4
+ * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div8: APB clock = HCLK/8
+ * @arg RCC_HCLK_Div16: APB clock = HCLK/16
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_PCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_HCLK)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_PCLK(RCC_HCLK));
+
+ tmpreg = RCC->CFGR;
+
+ /* Clear PPRE[2:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= ~RCC_CFGR_PPRE;
+
+ /* Set PPRE[2:0] bits according to RCC_HCLK value */
+ tmpreg |= RCC_HCLK;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ RCC->CFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the ADC clock (ADCCLK).
+ * @note This function is obsolete.
+ * For proper ADC clock selection, refer to ADC_ClockModeConfig() in the ADC driver
+ * @param RCC_ADCCLK: defines the ADC clock source. This clock is derived
+ * from the HSI14 or APB clock (PCLK).
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_ADCCLK_HSI14: ADC clock = HSI14 (14MHz)
+ * @arg RCC_ADCCLK_PCLK_Div2: ADC clock = PCLK/2
+ * @arg RCC_ADCCLK_PCLK_Div4: ADC clock = PCLK/4
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_ADCCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_ADCCLK)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_ADCCLK(RCC_ADCCLK));
+
+ /* Clear ADCPRE bit */
+ RCC->CFGR &= ~RCC_CFGR_ADCPRE;
+ /* Set ADCPRE bits according to RCC_PCLK value */
+ RCC->CFGR |= RCC_ADCCLK & 0xFFFF;
+
+ /* Clear ADCSW bit */
+ RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_ADCSW;
+ /* Set ADCSW bits according to RCC_ADCCLK value */
+ RCC->CFGR3 |= RCC_ADCCLK >> 16;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the CEC clock (CECCLK).
+ * @param RCC_CECCLK: defines the CEC clock source. This clock is derived
+ * from the HSI or LSE clock.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_CECCLK_HSI_Div244: CEC clock = HSI/244 (32768Hz)
+ * @arg RCC_CECCLK_LSE: CEC clock = LSE
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_CECCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_CECCLK)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_CECCLK(RCC_CECCLK));
+
+ /* Clear CECSW bit */
+ RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_CECSW;
+ /* Set CECSW bits according to RCC_CECCLK value */
+ RCC->CFGR3 |= RCC_CECCLK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the I2C1 clock (I2C1CLK).
+ * @param RCC_I2CCLK: defines the I2C1 clock source. This clock is derived
+ * from the HSI or System clock.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_I2C1CLK_HSI: I2C1 clock = HSI
+ * @arg RCC_I2C1CLK_SYSCLK: I2C1 clock = System Clock
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_I2CCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_I2CCLK)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_I2CCLK(RCC_I2CCLK));
+
+ /* Clear I2CSW bit */
+ RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_I2C1SW;
+ /* Set I2CSW bits according to RCC_I2CCLK value */
+ RCC->CFGR3 |= RCC_I2CCLK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the USART1 clock (USART1CLK).
+ * @param RCC_USARTCLK: defines the USART clock source. This clock is derived
+ * from the HSI or System clock.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_USART1CLK_PCLK: USART1 clock = APB Clock (PCLK)
+ * @arg RCC_USART1CLK_SYSCLK: USART1 clock = System Clock
+ * @arg RCC_USART1CLK_LSE: USART1 clock = LSE Clock
+ * @arg RCC_USART1CLK_HSI: USART1 clock = HSI Clock
+ * @arg RCC_USART2CLK_PCLK: USART2 clock = APB Clock (PCLK), applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_USART2CLK_SYSCLK: USART2 clock = System Clock, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_USART2CLK_LSE: USART2 clock = LSE Clock, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_USART2CLK_HSI: USART2 clock = HSI Clock, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_USART3CLK_PCLK: USART3 clock = APB Clock (PCLK), applicable only for STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_USART3CLK_SYSCLK: USART3 clock = System Clock, applicable only for STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_USART3CLK_LSE: USART3 clock = LSE Clock, applicable only for STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_USART3CLK_HSI: USART3 clock = HSI Clock, applicable only for STM32F091 devices
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_USARTCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_USARTCLK)
+{
+ uint32_t tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_USARTCLK(RCC_USARTCLK));
+
+ /* Get USART index */
+ tmp = (RCC_USARTCLK >> 28);
+
+ /* Clear USARTSW[1:0] bit */
+ if (tmp == (uint32_t)0x00000001)
+ {
+ /* Clear USART1SW[1:0] bit */
+ RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW;
+ }
+ else if (tmp == (uint32_t)0x00000002)
+ {
+ /* Clear USART2SW[1:0] bit */
+ RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Clear USART3SW[1:0] bit */
+ RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW;
+ }
+
+ /* Set USARTxSW bits according to RCC_USARTCLK value */
+ RCC->CFGR3 |= RCC_USARTCLK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the USB clock (USBCLK).
+ * This function is only applicable for STM32F072 devices.
+ * @param RCC_USBCLK: defines the USB clock source. This clock is derived
+ * from the HSI48 or system clock.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_USBCLK_HSI48: USB clock = HSI48
+ * @arg RCC_USBCLK_PLLCLK: USB clock = PLL clock
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_USBCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_USBCLK)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_USBCLK(RCC_USBCLK));
+
+ /* Clear USBSW bit */
+ RCC->CFGR3 &= ~RCC_CFGR3_USBSW;
+ /* Set USBSW bits according to RCC_USBCLK value */
+ RCC->CFGR3 |= RCC_USBCLK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the frequencies of the System, AHB and APB busses clocks.
+ * @note The frequency returned by this function is not the real frequency
+ * in the chip. It is calculated based on the predefined constant and
+ * the source selected by RCC_SYSCLKConfig():
+ *
+ * @note If SYSCLK source is HSI, function returns constant HSI_VALUE(*)
+ *
+ * @note If SYSCLK source is HSE, function returns constant HSE_VALUE(**)
+ *
+ * @note If SYSCLK source is PLL, function returns constant HSE_VALUE(**)
+ * or HSI_VALUE(*) multiplied by the PLL factors.
+ *
+ * @note If SYSCLK source is HSI48, function returns constant HSI48_VALUE(***)
+ *
+ * @note (*) HSI_VALUE is a constant defined in stm32f0xx.h file (default value
+ * 8 MHz) but the real value may vary depending on the variations
+ * in voltage and temperature, refer to RCC_AdjustHSICalibrationValue().
+ *
+ * @note (**) HSE_VALUE is a constant defined in stm32f0xx.h file (default value
+ * 8 MHz), user has to ensure that HSE_VALUE is same as the real
+ * frequency of the crystal used. Otherwise, this function may
+ * return wrong result.
+ *
+ * @note (***) HSI48_VALUE is a constant defined in stm32f0xx.h file (default value
+ * 48 MHz) but the real value may vary depending on the variations
+ * in voltage and temperature.
+ *
+ * @note The result of this function could be not correct when using fractional
+ * value for HSE crystal.
+ *
+ * @param RCC_Clocks: pointer to a RCC_ClocksTypeDef structure which will hold
+ * the clocks frequencies.
+ *
+ * @note This function can be used by the user application to compute the
+ * baudrate for the communication peripherals or configure other parameters.
+ * @note Each time SYSCLK, HCLK and/or PCLK clock changes, this function
+ * must be called to update the structure's field. Otherwise, any
+ * configuration based on this function will be incorrect.
+ *
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_GetClocksFreq(RCC_ClocksTypeDef* RCC_Clocks)
+{
+ uint32_t tmp = 0, pllmull = 0, pllsource = 0, prediv1factor = 0, presc = 0, pllclk = 0;
+
+ /* Get SYSCLK source -------------------------------------------------------*/
+ tmp = RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_SWS;
+
+ switch (tmp)
+ {
+ case 0x00: /* HSI used as system clock */
+ RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE;
+ break;
+ case 0x04: /* HSE used as system clock */
+ RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSE_VALUE;
+ break;
+ case 0x08: /* PLL used as system clock */
+ /* Get PLL clock source and multiplication factor ----------------------*/
+ pllmull = RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PLLMULL;
+ pllsource = RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PLLSRC;
+ pllmull = ( pllmull >> 18) + 2;
+
+ if (pllsource == 0x00)
+ {
+ /* HSI oscillator clock divided by 2 selected as PLL clock entry */
+ pllclk = (HSI_VALUE >> 1) * pllmull;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ prediv1factor = (RCC->CFGR2 & RCC_CFGR2_PREDIV1) + 1;
+ /* HSE oscillator clock selected as PREDIV1 clock entry */
+ pllclk = (HSE_VALUE / prediv1factor) * pllmull;
+ }
+ RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = pllclk;
+ break;
+ case 0x0C: /* HSI48 used as system clock */
+ RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSI48_VALUE;
+ break;
+ default: /* HSI used as system clock */
+ RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE;
+ break;
+ }
+ /* Compute HCLK, PCLK clocks frequencies -----------------------------------*/
+ /* Get HCLK prescaler */
+ tmp = RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_HPRE;
+ tmp = tmp >> 4;
+ presc = APBAHBPrescTable[tmp];
+ /* HCLK clock frequency */
+ RCC_Clocks->HCLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency >> presc;
+
+ /* Get PCLK prescaler */
+ tmp = RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_PPRE;
+ tmp = tmp >> 8;
+ presc = APBAHBPrescTable[tmp];
+ /* PCLK clock frequency */
+ RCC_Clocks->PCLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->HCLK_Frequency >> presc;
+
+ /* ADCCLK clock frequency */
+ if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_ADCSW) != RCC_CFGR3_ADCSW)
+ {
+ /* ADC Clock is HSI14 Osc. */
+ RCC_Clocks->ADCCLK_Frequency = HSI14_VALUE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if((RCC->CFGR & RCC_CFGR_ADCPRE) != RCC_CFGR_ADCPRE)
+ {
+ /* ADC Clock is derived from PCLK/2 */
+ RCC_Clocks->ADCCLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK_Frequency >> 1;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* ADC Clock is derived from PCLK/4 */
+ RCC_Clocks->ADCCLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK_Frequency >> 2;
+ }
+
+ }
+
+ /* CECCLK clock frequency */
+ if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_CECSW) != RCC_CFGR3_CECSW)
+ {
+ /* CEC Clock is HSI/244 */
+ RCC_Clocks->CECCLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE / 244;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* CECC Clock is LSE Osc. */
+ RCC_Clocks->CECCLK_Frequency = LSE_VALUE;
+ }
+
+ /* I2C1CLK clock frequency */
+ if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_I2C1SW) != RCC_CFGR3_I2C1SW)
+ {
+ /* I2C1 Clock is HSI Osc. */
+ RCC_Clocks->I2C1CLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* I2C1 Clock is System Clock */
+ RCC_Clocks->I2C1CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency;
+ }
+
+ /* USART1CLK clock frequency */
+ if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW) == 0x0)
+ {
+ /* USART1 Clock is PCLK */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART1CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK_Frequency;
+ }
+ else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW_0)
+ {
+ /* USART1 Clock is System Clock */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART1CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency;
+ }
+ else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW_1)
+ {
+ /* USART1 Clock is LSE Osc. */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART1CLK_Frequency = LSE_VALUE;
+ }
+ else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART1SW)
+ {
+ /* USART1 Clock is HSI Osc. */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART1CLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE;
+ }
+
+ /* USART2CLK clock frequency */
+ if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW) == 0x0)
+ {
+ /* USART Clock is PCLK */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART2CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK_Frequency;
+ }
+ else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW_0)
+ {
+ /* USART Clock is System Clock */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART2CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency;
+ }
+ else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW_1)
+ {
+ /* USART Clock is LSE Osc. */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART2CLK_Frequency = LSE_VALUE;
+ }
+ else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART2SW)
+ {
+ /* USART Clock is HSI Osc. */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART2CLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE;
+ }
+
+ /* USART3CLK clock frequency */
+ if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW) == 0x0)
+ {
+ /* USART Clock is PCLK */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART3CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->PCLK_Frequency;
+ }
+ else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW_0)
+ {
+ /* USART Clock is System Clock */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART3CLK_Frequency = RCC_Clocks->SYSCLK_Frequency;
+ }
+ else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW_1)
+ {
+ /* USART Clock is LSE Osc. */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART3CLK_Frequency = LSE_VALUE;
+ }
+ else if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW) == RCC_CFGR3_USART3SW)
+ {
+ /* USART Clock is HSI Osc. */
+ RCC_Clocks->USART3CLK_Frequency = HSI_VALUE;
+ }
+
+ /* USBCLK clock frequency */
+ if((RCC->CFGR3 & RCC_CFGR3_USBSW) != RCC_CFGR3_USBSW)
+ {
+ /* USB Clock is HSI48 */
+ RCC_Clocks->USBCLK_Frequency = HSI48_VALUE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* USB Clock is PLL clock */
+ RCC_Clocks->USBCLK_Frequency = pllclk;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RCC_Group3 Peripheral clocks configuration functions
+ * @brief Peripheral clocks configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ #####Peripheral clocks configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ [..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the Peripheral clocks.
+ (#) The RTC clock which is derived from the LSE, LSI or HSE_Div32 (HSE
+ divided by 32).
+ (#) After restart from Reset or wakeup from STANDBY, all peripherals are off
+ except internal SRAM, Flash and SWD. Before to start using a peripheral you
+ have to enable its interface clock. You can do this using RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(),
+ RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd() and RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() functions.
+ (#) To reset the peripherals configuration (to the default state after device reset)
+ you can use RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(), RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd() and
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd() functions.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the RTC clock (RTCCLK).
+ * @note As the RTC clock configuration bits are in the Backup domain and write
+ * access is denied to this domain after reset, you have to enable write
+ * access using PWR_BackupAccessCmd(ENABLE) function before to configure
+ * the RTC clock source (to be done once after reset).
+ * @note Once the RTC clock is configured it can't be changed unless the RTC
+ * is reset using RCC_BackupResetCmd function, or by a Power On Reset (POR)
+ *
+ * @param RCC_RTCCLKSource: specifies the RTC clock source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSE: LSE selected as RTC clock
+ * @arg RCC_RTCCLKSource_LSI: LSI selected as RTC clock
+ * @arg RCC_RTCCLKSource_HSE_Div32: HSE divided by 32 selected as RTC clock
+ *
+ * @note If the LSE or LSI is used as RTC clock source, the RTC continues to
+ * work in STOP and STANDBY modes, and can be used as wakeup source.
+ * However, when the HSE clock is used as RTC clock source, the RTC
+ * cannot be used in STOP and STANDBY modes.
+ *
+ * @note The maximum input clock frequency for RTC is 2MHz (when using HSE as
+ * RTC clock source).
+ *
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_RTCCLKConfig(uint32_t RCC_RTCCLKSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_RTCCLK_SOURCE(RCC_RTCCLKSource));
+
+ /* Select the RTC clock source */
+ RCC->BDCR |= RCC_RTCCLKSource;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the RTC clock.
+ * @note This function must be used only after the RTC clock source was selected
+ * using the RCC_RTCCLKConfig function.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the RTC clock.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_RTCCLKCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->BDCR |= RCC_BDCR_RTCEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->BDCR &= ~RCC_BDCR_RTCEN;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Forces or releases the Backup domain reset.
+ * @note This function resets the RTC peripheral (including the backup registers)
+ * and the RTC clock source selection in RCC_BDCR register.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the Backup domain reset.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_BackupResetCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->BDCR |= RCC_BDCR_BDRST;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->BDCR &= ~RCC_BDCR_BDRST;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the AHB peripheral clock.
+ * @note After reset, the peripheral clock (used for registers read/write access)
+ * is disabled and the application software has to enable this clock before
+ * using it.
+ * @param RCC_AHBPeriph: specifies the AHB peripheral to gates its clock.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA: GPIOA clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB: GPIOB clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC: GPIOC clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD: GPIOD clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE: GPIOE clock, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF: GPIOF clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_TS: TS clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_CRC: CRC clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_FLITF: (has effect only when the Flash memory is in power down mode)
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_SRAM: SRAM clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA1: DMA1 clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_DMA2: DMA2 clock
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHBPeriph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_AHB_PERIPH(RCC_AHBPeriph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->AHBENR |= RCC_AHBPeriph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->AHBENR &= ~RCC_AHBPeriph;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the High Speed APB (APB2) peripheral clock.
+ * @note After reset, the peripheral clock (used for registers read/write access)
+ * is disabled and the application software has to enable this clock before
+ * using it.
+ * @param RCC_APB2Periph: specifies the APB2 peripheral to gates its clock.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG: SYSCFG clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_USART6: USART6 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_USART7: USART7 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_USART8: USART8 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1: ADC1 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1: TIM1 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1: SPI1 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_USART1: USART1 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM15: TIM15 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM16: TIM16 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM17: TIM17 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_DBGMCU: DBGMCU clock
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_APB2_PERIPH(RCC_APB2Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->APB2ENR |= RCC_APB2Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->APB2ENR &= ~RCC_APB2Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the Low Speed APB (APB1) peripheral clock.
+ * @note After reset, the peripheral clock (used for registers read/write access)
+ * is disabled and the application software has to enable this clock before
+ * using it.
+ * @param RCC_APB1Periph: specifies the APB1 peripheral to gates its clock.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2: TIM2 clock, applicable only for STM32F051 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3: TIM3 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6: TIM6 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7: TIM7 clock, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM14: TIM14 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG: WWDG clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2: SPI2 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART2: USART2 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART3: USART3 clock, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART4: USART4 clock, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART5: USART5 clock, applicable only for STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1: I2C1 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2: I2C2 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USB: USB clock, applicable only for STM32F042 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_CAN: CAN clock, applicable only for STM32F042 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_CRS: CRS clock , applicable only for STM32F042 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_PWR: PWR clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_DAC: DAC clock, applicable only for STM32F051 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_CEC: CEC clock, applicable only for STM32F051, STM32F042 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_APB1_PERIPH(RCC_APB1Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->APB1ENR |= RCC_APB1Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->APB1ENR &= ~RCC_APB1Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Forces or releases AHB peripheral reset.
+ * @param RCC_AHBPeriph: specifies the AHB peripheral to reset.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOA: GPIOA clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOB: GPIOB clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOC: GPIOC clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOD: GPIOD clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOE: GPIOE clock, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_GPIOF: GPIOF clock
+ * @arg RCC_AHBPeriph_TS: TS clock
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral reset.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_AHBPeriphResetCmd(uint32_t RCC_AHBPeriph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_AHB_RST_PERIPH(RCC_AHBPeriph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->AHBRSTR |= RCC_AHBPeriph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->AHBRSTR &= ~RCC_AHBPeriph;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Forces or releases High Speed APB (APB2) peripheral reset.
+ * @param RCC_APB2Periph: specifies the APB2 peripheral to reset.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SYSCFG: SYSCFG clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_USART6: USART6 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_USART7: USART7 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_USART8: USART8 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_ADC1: ADC1 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1: TIM1 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1: SPI1 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_USART1: USART1 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM15: TIM15 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM16: TIM16 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_TIM17: TIM17 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB2Periph_DBGMCU: DBGMCU clock
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral reset.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB2Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_APB2_PERIPH(RCC_APB2Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->APB2RSTR |= RCC_APB2Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->APB2RSTR &= ~RCC_APB2Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Forces or releases Low Speed APB (APB1) peripheral reset.
+ * @param RCC_APB1Periph: specifies the APB1 peripheral to reset.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2: TIM2 clock, applicable only for STM32F051 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3: TIM3 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6: TIM6 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7: TIM7 clock, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_TIM14: TIM14 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG: WWDG clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2: SPI2 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART2: USART2 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART3: USART3 clock, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART4: USART4 clock, applicable only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USART5: USART5 clock, applicable only for STM32F091 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_I2C1: I2C1 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_I2C2: I2C2 clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_USB: USB clock, applicable only for STM32F042 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_CAN: CAN clock, applicable only for STM32F042 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_CRS: CRS clock , applicable only for STM32F042 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_PWR: PWR clock
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_DAC: DAC clock, applicable only for STM32F051 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_APB1Periph_CEC: CEC clock, applicable only for STM32F051, STM32F042 and STM32F072 devices
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified peripheral clock.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(uint32_t RCC_APB1Periph, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_APB1_PERIPH(RCC_APB1Periph));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RCC->APB1RSTR |= RCC_APB1Periph;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RCC->APB1RSTR &= ~RCC_APB1Periph;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RCC_Group4 Interrupts and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified RCC interrupts.
+ * @note The CSS interrupt doesn't have an enable bit; once the CSS is enabled
+ * and if the HSE clock fails, the CSS interrupt occurs and an NMI is
+ * automatically generated. The NMI will be executed indefinitely, and
+ * since NMI has higher priority than any other IRQ (and main program)
+ * the application will be stacked in the NMI ISR unless the CSS interrupt
+ * pending bit is cleared.
+ * @param RCC_IT: specifies the RCC interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSI14RDY: HSI14 ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSI48RDY: HSI48 ready interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified RCC interrupts.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_ITConfig(uint8_t RCC_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_IT(RCC_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[13:8] bits to enable the selected interrupts */
+ *(__IO uint8_t *) CIR_BYTE1_ADDRESS |= RCC_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[13:8] bits to disable the selected interrupts */
+ *(__IO uint8_t *) CIR_BYTE1_ADDRESS &= (uint8_t)~RCC_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified RCC flag is set or not.
+ * @param RCC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_HSIRDY: HSI oscillator clock ready
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_HSERDY: HSE oscillator clock ready
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_PLLRDY: PLL clock ready
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_LSERDY: LSE oscillator clock ready
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_LSIRDY: LSI oscillator clock ready
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_OBLRST: Option Byte Loader (OBL) reset
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_PINRST: Pin reset
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_V18PWRRSTF: V1.8 power domain reset
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_PORRST: POR/PDR reset
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_SFTRST: Software reset
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST: Independent Watchdog reset
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST: Window Watchdog reset
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST: Low Power reset
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_HSI14RDY: HSI14 oscillator clock ready
+ * @arg RCC_FLAG_HSI48RDY: HSI48 oscillator clock ready, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @retval The new state of RCC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus RCC_GetFlagStatus(uint8_t RCC_FLAG)
+{
+ uint32_t tmp = 0;
+ uint32_t statusreg = 0;
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_FLAG(RCC_FLAG));
+
+ /* Get the RCC register index */
+ tmp = RCC_FLAG >> 5;
+
+ if (tmp == 0) /* The flag to check is in CR register */
+ {
+ statusreg = RCC->CR;
+ }
+ else if (tmp == 1) /* The flag to check is in BDCR register */
+ {
+ statusreg = RCC->BDCR;
+ }
+ else if (tmp == 2) /* The flag to check is in CSR register */
+ {
+ statusreg = RCC->CSR;
+ }
+ else /* The flag to check is in CR2 register */
+ {
+ statusreg = RCC->CR2;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the flag position */
+ tmp = RCC_FLAG & FLAG_MASK;
+
+ if ((statusreg & ((uint32_t)1 << tmp)) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the flag status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the RCC reset flags.
+ * The reset flags are: RCC_FLAG_OBLRST, RCC_FLAG_PINRST, RCC_FLAG_V18PWRRSTF,
+ * RCC_FLAG_PORRST, RCC_FLAG_SFTRST, RCC_FLAG_IWDGRST, RCC_FLAG_WWDGRST,
+ * RCC_FLAG_LPWRRST.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_ClearFlag(void)
+{
+ /* Set RMVF bit to clear the reset flags */
+ RCC->CSR |= RCC_CSR_RMVF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified RCC interrupt has occurred or not.
+ * @param RCC_IT: specifies the RCC interrupt source to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSI14RDY: HSI14 ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSI48RDY: HSI48 ready interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_IT_CSS: Clock Security System interrupt
+ * @retval The new state of RCC_IT (SET or RESET).
+ */
+ITStatus RCC_GetITStatus(uint8_t RCC_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_GET_IT(RCC_IT));
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified RCC interrupt */
+ if ((RCC->CIR & RCC_IT) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the RCC_IT status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the RCC's interrupt pending bits.
+ * @param RCC_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RCC_IT_LSIRDY: LSI ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_LSERDY: LSE ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSIRDY: HSI ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSERDY: HSE ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_PLLRDY: PLL ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSI48RDY: HSI48 ready interrupt, applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RCC_IT_HSI14RDY: HSI14 ready interrupt
+ * @arg RCC_IT_CSS: Clock Security System interrupt
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RCC_ClearITPendingBit(uint8_t RCC_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RCC_CLEAR_IT(RCC_IT));
+
+ /* Perform Byte access to RCC_CIR[23:16] bits to clear the selected interrupt
+ pending bits */
+ *(__IO uint8_t *) CIR_BYTE2_ADDRESS = RCC_IT;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_rtc.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_rtc.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_rtc.c
@@ -0,0 +1,2518 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_rtc.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Real-Time Clock (RTC) peripheral:
+ * + Initialization
+ * + Calendar (Time and Date) configuration
+ * + Alarms (Alarm A) configuration
+ * + Daylight Saving configuration
+ * + Output pin Configuration
+ * + Digital Calibration configuration
+ * + TimeStamp configuration
+ * + Tampers configuration
+ * + Backup Data Registers configuration
+ * + Output Type Config configuration
+ * + Shift control synchronisation
+ * + Interrupts and flags management
+ *
+ @verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Backup Domain Operating Condition #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] The real-time clock (RTC) and the RTC backup registers can be powered
+ from the VBAT voltage when the main VDD supply is powered off.
+ To retain the content of the RTC backup registers and supply the RTC
+ when VDD is turned off, VBAT pin can be connected to an optional
+ standby voltage supplied by a battery or by another source.
+
+ [..] To allow the RTC to operate even when the main digital supply (VDD)
+ is turned off, the VBAT pin powers the following blocks:
+ (#) The RTC
+ (#) The LSE oscillator
+ (#) PC13 to PC15 I/Os I/Os (when available)
+
+ [..] When the backup domain is supplied by VDD (analog switch connected
+ to VDD), the following functions are available:
+ (#) PC14 and PC15 can be used as either GPIO or LSE pins
+ (#) PC13 can be used as a GPIO or as the RTC_AF1 pin
+
+ [..] When the backup domain is supplied by VBAT (analog switch connected
+ to VBAT because VDD is not present), the following functions are available:
+ (#) PC14 and PC15 can be used as LSE pins only
+ (#) PC13 can be used as the RTC_AF1 pin
+
+ ##### Backup Domain Reset #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] The backup domain reset sets all RTC registers and the RCC_BDCR
+ register to their reset values.
+ A backup domain reset is generated when one of the following events
+ occurs:
+ (#) Software reset, triggered by setting the BDRST bit in the
+ RCC Backup domain control register (RCC_BDCR). You can use the
+ RCC_BackupResetCmd().
+ (#) VDD or VBAT power on, if both supplies have previously been
+ powered off.
+
+ ##### Backup Domain Access #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] After reset, the backup domain (RTC registers and RTC backup data
+ registers) is protected against possible unwanted write accesses.
+ [..] To enable access to the Backup Domain and RTC registers, proceed as follows:
+ (#) Enable the Power Controller (PWR) APB1 interface clock using the
+ RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd() function.
+ (#) Enable access to Backup domain using the PWR_BackupAccessCmd() function.
+ (#) Select the RTC clock source using the RCC_RTCCLKConfig() function.
+ (#) Enable RTC Clock using the RCC_RTCCLKCmd() function.
+
+
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ (+) Enable the backup domain access (see description in the section above)
+ (+) Configure the RTC Prescaler (Asynchronous and Synchronous) and
+ RTC hour format using the RTC_Init() function.
+
+ ***Time and Date configuration ***
+ ==================================
+ [..]
+ (+) To configure the RTC Calendar (Time and Date) use the RTC_SetTime()
+ and RTC_SetDate() functions.
+ (+) To read the RTC Calendar, use the RTC_GetTime() and RTC_GetDate()
+ functions.
+ (+) To read the RTC subsecond, use the RTC_GetSubSecond() function.
+ (+) Use the RTC_DayLightSavingConfig() function to add or sub one
+ hour to the RTC Calendar.
+
+ ***Alarm configuration ***
+ ==========================
+ [..]
+ (+) To configure the RTC Alarm use the RTC_SetAlarm() function.
+ (+) Enable the selected RTC Alarm using the RTC_AlarmCmd() function
+ (+) To read the RTC Alarm, use the RTC_GetAlarm() function.
+ (+) To read the RTC alarm SubSecond, use the RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond() function.
+
+ ***RTC Wakeup configuration***
+ ==========================
+ [..]
+ (+) Configure the RTC Wakeup Clock source use the RTC_WakeUpClockConfig()
+ function.
+ (+) Configure the RTC WakeUp Counter using the RTC_SetWakeUpCounter()
+ function
+ (+) Enable the RTC WakeUp using the RTC_WakeUpCmd() function
+ (+) To read the RTC WakeUp Counter register, use the RTC_GetWakeUpCounter()
+ function.
+
+ ***Outputs configuration ***
+ ============================
+ [..] The RTC has 2 different outputs:
+ (+) AFO_ALARM: this output is used to manage the RTC Alarm A.
+ To output the selected RTC signal on RTC_AF1 pin, use the
+ RTC_OutputConfig() function.
+ (+) AFO_CALIB: this output is 512Hz signal or 1Hz .
+ To output the RTC Clock on RTC_AF1 pin, use the RTC_CalibOutputCmd()
+ function.
+
+ ***Original Digital Calibration configuration ***
+ =================================
+ [..] Configure the RTC Original Digital Calibration Value and the corresponding
+ calibration cycle period (32s,16s and 8s) using the RTC_SmoothCalibConfig()
+ function.
+
+ ***TimeStamp configuration ***
+ ==============================
+ [..]
+ (+) Configure the RTC_AF1 trigger and enables the RTC TimeStamp
+ using the RTC_TimeStampCmd() function.
+ (+) To read the RTC TimeStamp Time and Date register, use the
+ RTC_GetTimeStamp() function.
+ (+) To read the RTC TimeStamp SubSecond register, use the
+ RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond() function.
+
+ ***Tamper configuration ***
+ ===========================
+ [..]
+ (+) Configure the Tamper filter count using RTC_TamperFilterConfig()
+ function.
+ (+) Configure the RTC Tamper trigger Edge or Level according to the Tamper
+ filter (if equal to 0 Edge else Level) value using the RTC_TamperConfig() function
+ (+) Configure the Tamper sampling frequency using RTC_TamperSamplingFreqConfig()
+ function.
+ (+) Configure the Tamper precharge or discharge duration using
+ RTC_TamperPinsPrechargeDuration() function.
+ (+) Enable the Tamper Pull-UP using RTC_TamperPullUpDisableCmd() function.
+ (+) Enable the RTC Tamper using the RTC_TamperCmd() function.
+ (+) Enable the Time stamp on Tamper detection event using
+ RTC_TSOnTamperDetecCmd() function.
+
+ ***Backup Data Registers configuration ***
+ ==========================================
+ [..]
+ (+) To write to the RTC Backup Data registers, use the RTC_WriteBackupRegister()
+ function.
+ (+) To read the RTC Backup Data registers, use the RTC_ReadBackupRegister()
+ function.
+
+ ##### RTC and low power modes #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] The MCU can be woken up from a low power mode by an RTC alternate
+ function.
+ [..] The RTC alternate functions are the RTC alarm (Alarm A), RTC tamper
+ event detection and RTC time stamp event detection.
+ These RTC alternate functions can wake up the system from the Stop
+ and Standby lowpower modes.
+ The system can also wake up from low power modes without depending
+ on an external interrupt (Auto-wakeup mode), by using the RTC alarm events.
+ [..] The RTC provides a programmable time base for waking up from the
+ Stop or Standby mode at regular intervals.
+ Wakeup from STOP and Standby modes is possible only when the RTC
+ clock source is LSE or LSI.
+
+ ##### Selection of RTC_AF1 alternate functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] The RTC_AF1 pin (PC13) can be used for the following purposes:
+ (+) AFO_ALARM output
+ (+) AFO_CALIB output
+ (+) AFI_TAMPER
+ (+) AFI_TIMESTAMP
+
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ | Pin |AFO_ALARM |AFO_CALIB |AFI_TAMPER |AFI_TIMESTAMP | WKUP2 |ALARMOUTTYPE |
+ | configuration | ENABLED | ENABLED | ENABLED | ENABLED |ENABLED | AFO_ALARM |
+ | and function | | | | | |Configuration |
+ |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------|
+ | Alarm out | | | | | Don't | |
+ | output OD | 1 | 0 |Don't care | Don't care | care | 0 |
+ |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------|
+ | Alarm out | | | | | Don't | |
+ | output PP | 1 | 0 |Don't care | Don't care | care | 1 |
+ |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------|
+ | Calibration out | | | | | Don't | |
+ | output PP | 0 | 1 |Don't care | Don't care | care | Don't care |
+ |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------|
+ | TAMPER input | | | | | Don't | |
+ | floating | 0 | 0 | 1 | 0 | care | Don't care |
+ |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------|
+ | TIMESTAMP and | | | | | Don't | |
+ | TAMPER input | 0 | 0 | 1 | 1 | care | Don't care |
+ | floating | | | | | | |
+ |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------|
+ | TIMESTAMP input | | | | | Don't | |
+ | floating | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 | care | Don't care |
+ |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------|
+ | Wakeup Pin 2 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 1 | Don't care |
+ |-----------------|----------|----------|-----------|--------------|--------|--------------|
+ | Standard GPIO | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | 0 | Don't care |
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ @endverbatim
+
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_rtc.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC
+ * @brief RTC driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* Masks Definition */
+#define RTC_TR_RESERVED_MASK ((uint32_t)0x007F7F7F)
+#define RTC_DR_RESERVED_MASK ((uint32_t)0x00FFFF3F)
+#define RTC_INIT_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFFFF)
+#define RTC_RSF_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF5F)
+#define RTC_FLAGS_MASK ((uint32_t)(RTC_FLAG_TSOVF | RTC_FLAG_TSF | RTC_FLAG_ALRAF | \
+ RTC_FLAG_RSF | RTC_FLAG_INITS |RTC_FLAG_INITF | \
+ RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F | RTC_FLAG_TAMP2F | RTC_FLAG_RECALPF | \
+ RTC_FLAG_SHPF))
+
+#define INITMODE_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t) 0x00004000)
+#define SYNCHRO_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t) 0x00008000)
+#define RECALPF_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t) 0x00001000)
+#define SHPF_TIMEOUT ((uint32_t) 0x00001000)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+static uint8_t RTC_ByteToBcd2(uint8_t Value);
+static uint8_t RTC_Bcd2ToByte(uint8_t Value);
+
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions
+ * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ [..] This section provide functions allowing to initialize and configure the RTC
+ Prescaler (Synchronous and Asynchronous), RTC Hour format, disable RTC registers
+ Write protection, enter and exit the RTC initialization mode, RTC registers
+ synchronization check and reference clock detection enable.
+
+ (#) The RTC Prescaler is programmed to generate the RTC 1Hz time base.
+ It is split into 2 programmable prescalers to minimize power consumption.
+ (++) A 7-bit asynchronous prescaler and A 13-bit synchronous prescaler.
+ (++) When both prescalers are used, it is recommended to configure the
+ asynchronous prescaler to a high value to minimize consumption.
+ (#) All RTC registers are Write protected. Writing to the RTC registers
+ is enabled by writing a key into the Write Protection register, RTC_WPR.
+ (#) To Configure the RTC Calendar, user application should enter
+ initialization mode. In this mode, the calendar counter is stopped
+ and its value can be updated. When the initialization sequence is
+ complete, the calendar restarts counting after 4 RTCCLK cycles.
+ (#) To read the calendar through the shadow registers after Calendar
+ initialization, calendar update or after wakeup from low power modes
+ the software must first clear the RSF flag. The software must then
+ wait until it is set again before reading the calendar, which means
+ that the calendar registers have been correctly copied into the
+ RTC_TR and RTC_DR shadow registers.The RTC_WaitForSynchro() function
+ implements the above software sequence (RSF clear and RSF check).
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the RTC registers to their default reset values.
+ * @note This function doesn't reset the RTC Clock source and RTC Backup Data
+ * registers.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
+ * - SUCCESS: RTC registers are deinitialized
+ * - ERROR: RTC registers are not deinitialized
+ */
+ErrorStatus RTC_DeInit(void)
+{
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Set Initialization mode */
+ if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR)
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset TR, DR and CR registers */
+ RTC->TR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
+ RTC->WUTR = (uint32_t)0x0000FFFF;
+ RTC->DR = (uint32_t)0x00002101;
+ RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)0x00000000;
+ RTC->PRER = (uint32_t)0x007F00FF;
+ RTC->ALRMAR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
+ RTC->SHIFTR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
+ RTC->CALR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
+ RTC->ALRMASSR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
+
+ /* Reset ISR register and exit initialization mode */
+ RTC->ISR = (uint32_t)0x00000000;
+
+ /* Reset Tamper and alternate functions configuration register */
+ RTC->TAFCR = 0x00000000;
+
+ /* Wait till the RTC RSF flag is set */
+ if (RTC_WaitForSynchro() == ERROR)
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the RTC registers according to the specified parameters
+ * in RTC_InitStruct.
+ * @param RTC_InitStruct: pointer to a RTC_InitTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the RTC peripheral.
+ * @note The RTC Prescaler register is write protected and can be written in
+ * initialization mode only.
+ * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
+ * - SUCCESS: RTC registers are initialized
+ * - ERROR: RTC registers are not initialized
+ */
+ErrorStatus RTC_Init(RTC_InitTypeDef* RTC_InitStruct)
+{
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR_FORMAT(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_HourFormat));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ASYNCH_PREDIV(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_AsynchPrediv));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_SYNCH_PREDIV(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_SynchPrediv));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Set Initialization mode */
+ if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR)
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Clear RTC CR FMT Bit */
+ RTC->CR &= ((uint32_t)~(RTC_CR_FMT));
+ /* Set RTC_CR register */
+ RTC->CR |= ((uint32_t)(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_HourFormat));
+
+ /* Configure the RTC PRER */
+ RTC->PRER = (uint32_t)(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_SynchPrediv);
+ RTC->PRER |= (uint32_t)(RTC_InitStruct->RTC_AsynchPrediv << 16);
+
+ /* Exit Initialization mode */
+ RTC_ExitInitMode();
+
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each RTC_InitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param RTC_InitStruct: pointer to a RTC_InitTypeDef structure which will be
+ * initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_StructInit(RTC_InitTypeDef* RTC_InitStruct)
+{
+ /* Initialize the RTC_HourFormat member */
+ RTC_InitStruct->RTC_HourFormat = RTC_HourFormat_24;
+
+ /* Initialize the RTC_AsynchPrediv member */
+ RTC_InitStruct->RTC_AsynchPrediv = (uint32_t)0x7F;
+
+ /* Initialize the RTC_SynchPrediv member */
+ RTC_InitStruct->RTC_SynchPrediv = (uint32_t)0xFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the RTC registers write protection.
+ * @note All the RTC registers are write protected except for RTC_ISR[13:8],
+ * RTC_TAFCR and RTC_BKPxR.
+ * @note Writing a wrong key reactivates the write protection.
+ * @note The protection mechanism is not affected by system reset.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the write protection.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_WriteProtectionCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enters the RTC Initialization mode.
+ * @note The RTC Initialization mode is write protected, use the
+ * RTC_WriteProtectionCmd(DISABLE) before calling this function.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
+ * - SUCCESS: RTC is in Init mode
+ * - ERROR: RTC is not in Init mode
+ */
+ErrorStatus RTC_EnterInitMode(void)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t initcounter = 0x00;
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+ uint32_t initstatus = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check if the Initialization mode is set */
+ if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_INITF) == (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ /* Set the Initialization mode */
+ RTC->ISR = (uint32_t)RTC_INIT_MASK;
+
+ /* Wait till RTC is in INIT state and if Time out is reached exit */
+ do
+ {
+ initstatus = RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_INITF;
+ initcounter++;
+ } while((initcounter != INITMODE_TIMEOUT) && (initstatus == 0x00));
+
+ if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_INITF) != RESET)
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+
+ return (status);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Exits the RTC Initialization mode.
+ * @note When the initialization sequence is complete, the calendar restarts
+ * counting after 4 RTCCLK cycles.
+ * @note The RTC Initialization mode is write protected, use the
+ * RTC_WriteProtectionCmd(DISABLE) before calling this function.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_ExitInitMode(void)
+{
+ /* Exit Initialization mode */
+ RTC->ISR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_ISR_INIT;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Waits until the RTC Time and Date registers (RTC_TR and RTC_DR) are
+ * synchronized with RTC APB clock.
+ * @note The RTC Resynchronization mode is write protected, use the
+ * RTC_WriteProtectionCmd(DISABLE) before calling this function.
+ * @note To read the calendar through the shadow registers after Calendar
+ * initialization, calendar update or after wakeup from low power modes
+ * the software must first clear the RSF flag.
+ * The software must then wait until it is set again before reading
+ * the calendar, which means that the calendar registers have been
+ * correctly copied into the RTC_TR and RTC_DR shadow registers.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
+ * - SUCCESS: RTC registers are synchronised
+ * - ERROR: RTC registers are not synchronised
+ */
+ErrorStatus RTC_WaitForSynchro(void)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t synchrocounter = 0;
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+ uint32_t synchrostatus = 0x00;
+
+ if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_BYPSHAD) != RESET)
+ {
+ /* Bypass shadow mode */
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Clear RSF flag */
+ RTC->ISR &= (uint32_t)RTC_RSF_MASK;
+
+ /* Wait the registers to be synchronised */
+ do
+ {
+ synchrostatus = RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_RSF;
+ synchrocounter++;
+ } while((synchrocounter != SYNCHRO_TIMEOUT) && (synchrostatus == 0x00));
+
+ if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_RSF) != RESET)
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+ }
+
+ return (status);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the RTC reference clock detection.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the RTC reference clock.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
+ * - SUCCESS: RTC reference clock detection is enabled
+ * - ERROR: RTC reference clock detection is disabled
+ */
+ErrorStatus RTC_RefClockCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Set Initialization mode */
+ if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR)
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the RTC reference clock detection */
+ RTC->CR |= RTC_CR_REFCKON;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the RTC reference clock detection */
+ RTC->CR &= ~RTC_CR_REFCKON;
+ }
+ /* Exit Initialization mode */
+ RTC_ExitInitMode();
+
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or Disables the Bypass Shadow feature.
+ * @note When the Bypass Shadow is enabled the calendar value are taken
+ * directly from the Calendar counter.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the Bypass Shadow feature.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+*/
+void RTC_BypassShadowCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the BYPSHAD bit */
+ RTC->CR |= (uint8_t)RTC_CR_BYPSHAD;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the BYPSHAD bit */
+ RTC->CR &= (uint8_t)~RTC_CR_BYPSHAD;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group2 Time and Date configuration functions
+ * @brief Time and Date configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Time and Date configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC
+ Calendar (Time and Date).
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Set the RTC current time.
+ * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the entered parameters.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format
+ * @param RTC_TimeStruct: pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the time configuration information for the RTC.
+ * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
+ * - SUCCESS: RTC Time register is configured
+ * - ERROR: RTC Time register is not configured
+ */
+ErrorStatus RTC_SetTime(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_TimeStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format));
+
+ if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN)
+ {
+ if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_FMT) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR12(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_H12(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12 = 0x00;
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR24(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours));
+ }
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_MINUTES(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_SECONDS(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_FMT) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours);
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR12(tmpreg));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_H12(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12 = 0x00;
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR24(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours)));
+ }
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_MINUTES(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes)));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_SECONDS(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds)));
+ }
+
+ /* Check the input parameters format */
+ if (RTC_Format != RTC_Format_BIN)
+ {
+ tmpreg = (((uint32_t)(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours) << 16) | \
+ ((uint32_t)(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes) << 8) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds) | \
+ ((uint32_t)(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12) << 16));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)(((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours) << 16) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes) << 8) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds)) | \
+ (((uint32_t)RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12) << 16));
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Set Initialization mode */
+ if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR)
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Set the RTC_TR register */
+ RTC->TR = (uint32_t)(tmpreg & RTC_TR_RESERVED_MASK);
+
+ /* Exit Initialization mode */
+ RTC_ExitInitMode();
+
+ /* If RTC_CR_BYPSHAD bit = 0, wait for synchro else this check is not needed */
+ if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_BYPSHAD) == RESET)
+ {
+ if (RTC_WaitForSynchro() == ERROR)
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+
+ }
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each RTC_TimeStruct member with its default value
+ * (Time = 00h:00min:00sec).
+ * @param RTC_TimeStruct: pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef structure which will be
+ * initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_TimeStructInit(RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_TimeStruct)
+{
+ /* Time = 00h:00min:00sec */
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12 = RTC_H12_AM;
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours = 0;
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes = 0;
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds = 0;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Get the RTC current Time.
+ * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the returned parameters.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format
+ * @param RTC_TimeStruct: pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef structure that will
+ * contain the returned current time configuration.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_GetTime(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_TimeStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format));
+
+ /* Get the RTC_TR register */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->TR & RTC_TR_RESERVED_MASK);
+
+ /* Fill the structure fields with the read parameters */
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_TR_HT | RTC_TR_HU)) >> 16);
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_TR_MNT | RTC_TR_MNU)) >>8);
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds = (uint8_t)(tmpreg & (RTC_TR_ST | RTC_TR_SU));
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_H12 = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_TR_PM)) >> 16);
+
+ /* Check the input parameters format */
+ if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN)
+ {
+ /* Convert the structure parameters to Binary format */
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Hours);
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Minutes);
+ RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_TimeStruct->RTC_Seconds);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets the RTC current Calendar Subseconds value.
+ * @note This function freeze the Time and Date registers after reading the
+ * SSR register.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval RTC current Calendar Subseconds value.
+ */
+uint32_t RTC_GetSubSecond(void)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Get subseconds values from the correspondent registers*/
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->SSR);
+
+ /* Read DR register to unfroze calendar registers */
+ (void) (RTC->DR);
+
+ return (tmpreg);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Set the RTC current date.
+ * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the entered parameters.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format
+ * @param RTC_DateStruct: pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the date configuration information for the RTC.
+ * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
+ * - SUCCESS: RTC Date register is configured
+ * - ERROR: RTC Date register is not configured
+ */
+ErrorStatus RTC_SetDate(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_DateTypeDef* RTC_DateStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format));
+
+ if ((RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN) && ((RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month & 0x10) == 0x10))
+ {
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month = (RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month & (uint32_t)~(0x10)) + 0x0A;
+ }
+ if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_YEAR(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_MONTH(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_DATE(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_YEAR(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year)));
+ tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month);
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_MONTH(tmpreg));
+ tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date);
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_DATE(tmpreg));
+ }
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_WEEKDAY(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay));
+
+ /* Check the input parameters format */
+ if (RTC_Format != RTC_Format_BIN)
+ {
+ tmpreg = ((((uint32_t)RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year) << 16) | \
+ (((uint32_t)RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month) << 8) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date) | \
+ (((uint32_t)RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay) << 13));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmpreg = (((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year) << 16) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month) << 8) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date)) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay << 13));
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Set Initialization mode */
+ if (RTC_EnterInitMode() == ERROR)
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Set the RTC_DR register */
+ RTC->DR = (uint32_t)(tmpreg & RTC_DR_RESERVED_MASK);
+
+ /* Exit Initialization mode */
+ RTC_ExitInitMode();
+
+ /* If RTC_CR_BYPSHAD bit = 0, wait for synchro else this check is not needed */
+ if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_BYPSHAD) == RESET)
+ {
+ if (RTC_WaitForSynchro() == ERROR)
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ }
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each RTC_DateStruct member with its default value
+ * (Monday, January 01 xx00).
+ * @param RTC_DateStruct: pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef structure which will be
+ * initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_DateStructInit(RTC_DateTypeDef* RTC_DateStruct)
+{
+ /* Monday, January 01 xx00 */
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay = RTC_Weekday_Monday;
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date = 1;
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month = RTC_Month_January;
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year = 0;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Get the RTC current date.
+ * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the returned parameters.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format
+ * @param RTC_DateStruct: pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef structure that will
+ * contain the returned current date configuration.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_GetDate(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_DateTypeDef* RTC_DateStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format));
+
+ /* Get the RTC_TR register */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->DR & RTC_DR_RESERVED_MASK);
+
+ /* Fill the structure fields with the read parameters */
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_DR_YT | RTC_DR_YU)) >> 16);
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_DR_MT | RTC_DR_MU)) >> 8);
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date = (uint8_t)(tmpreg & (RTC_DR_DT | RTC_DR_DU));
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay = (uint8_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_DR_WDU)) >> 13);
+
+ /* Check the input parameters format */
+ if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN)
+ {
+ /* Convert the structure parameters to Binary format */
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Year);
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Month);
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_Date);
+ RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay = (uint8_t)(RTC_DateStruct->RTC_WeekDay);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group3 Alarms configuration functions
+ * @brief Alarms (Alarm A) configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Alarms (Alarm A and Alarm B) configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC
+ Alarms.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Set the specified RTC Alarm.
+ * @note The Alarm register can only be written when the corresponding Alarm
+ * is disabled (Use the RTC_AlarmCmd(DISABLE)).
+ * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the returned parameters.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format
+ * @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be configured.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A
+ * @param RTC_AlarmStruct: pointer to a RTC_AlarmTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the alarm configuration parameters.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_SetAlarm(uint32_t RTC_Format, uint32_t RTC_Alarm, RTC_AlarmTypeDef* RTC_AlarmStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM(RTC_Alarm));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_MASK(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmMask));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_DATE_WEEKDAY_SEL(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel));
+
+ if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN)
+ {
+ if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_FMT) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR12(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_H12(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12 = 0x00;
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR24(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours));
+ }
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_MINUTES(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_SECONDS(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds));
+
+ if(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel == RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel_Date)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_DATE_WEEKDAY_DATE(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_DATE_WEEKDAY_WEEKDAY(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay));
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if ((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_FMT) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours);
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR12(tmpreg));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_H12(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12 = 0x00;
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_HOUR24(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours)));
+ }
+
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_MINUTES(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes)));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_SECONDS(RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds)));
+
+ if(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel == RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel_Date)
+ {
+ tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay);
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_DATE_WEEKDAY_DATE(tmpreg));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmpreg = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay);
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_DATE_WEEKDAY_WEEKDAY(tmpreg));
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Check the input parameters format */
+ if (RTC_Format != RTC_Format_BIN)
+ {
+ tmpreg = (((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours) << 16) | \
+ ((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes) << 8) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds) | \
+ ((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12) << 16) | \
+ ((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay) << 24) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmMask));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmpreg = (((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours) << 16) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes) << 8) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds)) | \
+ ((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12) << 16) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_ByteToBcd2(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay) << 24) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel) | \
+ ((uint32_t)RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmMask));
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Configure the Alarm register */
+ RTC->ALRMAR = (uint32_t)tmpreg;
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each RTC_AlarmStruct member with its default value
+ * (Time = 00h:00mn:00sec / Date = 1st day of the month/Mask =
+ * all fields are masked).
+ * @param RTC_AlarmStruct: pointer to a @ref RTC_AlarmTypeDef structure which
+ * will be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_AlarmStructInit(RTC_AlarmTypeDef* RTC_AlarmStruct)
+{
+ /* Alarm Time Settings : Time = 00h:00mn:00sec */
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12 = RTC_H12_AM;
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours = 0;
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes = 0;
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds = 0;
+
+ /* Alarm Date Settings : Date = 1st day of the month */
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel = RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel_Date;
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay = 1;
+
+ /* Alarm Masks Settings : Mask = all fields are not masked */
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmMask = RTC_AlarmMask_None;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Get the RTC Alarm value and masks.
+ * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the output parameters.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format
+ * @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be read.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A
+ * @param RTC_AlarmStruct: pointer to a RTC_AlarmTypeDef structure that will
+ * contains the output alarm configuration values.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_GetAlarm(uint32_t RTC_Format, uint32_t RTC_Alarm, RTC_AlarmTypeDef* RTC_AlarmStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM(RTC_Alarm));
+
+ /* Get the RTC_ALRMAR register */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->ALRMAR);
+
+ /* Fill the structure with the read parameters */
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours = (uint32_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_ALRMAR_HT | \
+ RTC_ALRMAR_HU)) >> 16);
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes = (uint32_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_ALRMAR_MNT | \
+ RTC_ALRMAR_MNU)) >> 8);
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds = (uint32_t)(tmpreg & (RTC_ALRMAR_ST | \
+ RTC_ALRMAR_SU));
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_H12 = (uint32_t)((tmpreg & RTC_ALRMAR_PM) >> 16);
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay = (uint32_t)((tmpreg & (RTC_ALRMAR_DT | RTC_ALRMAR_DU)) >> 24);
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDaySel = (uint32_t)(tmpreg & RTC_ALRMAR_WDSEL);
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmMask = (uint32_t)(tmpreg & RTC_AlarmMask_All);
+
+ if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN)
+ {
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct-> \
+ RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Hours);
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct-> \
+ RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Minutes);
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct-> \
+ RTC_AlarmTime.RTC_Seconds);
+ RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay = RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_AlarmStruct->RTC_AlarmDateWeekDay);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified RTC Alarm.
+ * @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be configured.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified alarm.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
+ * - SUCCESS: RTC Alarm is enabled/disabled
+ * - ERROR: RTC Alarm is not enabled/disabled
+ */
+ErrorStatus RTC_AlarmCmd(uint32_t RTC_Alarm, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t alarmcounter = 0x00;
+ uint32_t alarmstatus = 0x00;
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_CMD_ALARM(RTC_Alarm));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Configure the Alarm state */
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)RTC_Alarm;
+
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Alarm in RTC_CR register */
+ RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_Alarm;
+
+ /* Wait till RTC ALRxWF flag is set and if Time out is reached exit */
+ do
+ {
+ alarmstatus = RTC->ISR & (RTC_Alarm >> 8);
+ alarmcounter++;
+ } while((alarmcounter != INITMODE_TIMEOUT) && (alarmstatus == 0x00));
+
+ if ((RTC->ISR & (RTC_Alarm >> 8)) == RESET)
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the RTC AlarmA/B Subseconds value and mask.
+ * @note This function is performed only when the Alarm is disabled.
+ * @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be configured.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A
+ * @param RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue: specifies the Subseconds value.
+ * This parameter can be a value from 0 to 0x00007FFF.
+ * @param RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask: specifies the Subseconds Mask.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_All: All Alarm SS fields are masked.
+ * There is no comparison on sub seconds for Alarm.
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_1: SS[14:1] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[0] is compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_2: SS[14:2] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[1:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_3: SS[14:3] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[2:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_4: SS[14:4] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[3:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_5: SS[14:5] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[4:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_6: SS[14:6] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[5:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_7: SS[14:7] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[6:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_8: SS[14:8] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[7:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_9: SS[14:9] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[8:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_10: SS[14:10] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[9:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_11: SS[14:11] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[10:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_12: SS[14:12] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[11:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14_13: SS[14:13] are don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[12:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_SS14: SS[14] is don't care in Alarm comparison.
+ * Only SS[13:0] are compared
+ * @arg RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask_None: SS[14:0] are compared and must match to activate alarm
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_AlarmSubSecondConfig(uint32_t RTC_Alarm, uint32_t RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue, uint8_t RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM(RTC_Alarm));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_SUB_SECOND_VALUE(RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_ALARM_SUB_SECOND_MASK(RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Configure the Alarm A or Alarm B SubSecond registers */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t) (((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmSubSecondValue)) | ((uint32_t)(RTC_AlarmSubSecondMask) << 24));
+
+ /* Configure the AlarmA SubSecond register */
+ RTC->ALRMASSR = tmpreg;
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets the RTC Alarm Subseconds value.
+ * @param RTC_Alarm: specifies the alarm to be read.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Alarm_A: to select Alarm A
+ * @param None
+ * @retval RTC Alarm Subseconds value.
+ */
+uint32_t RTC_GetAlarmSubSecond(uint32_t RTC_Alarm)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Get the RTC_ALRMAR register */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)((RTC->ALRMASSR) & RTC_ALRMASSR_SS);
+
+ return (tmpreg);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group4 WakeUp Timer configuration functions
+ * @brief WakeUp Timer configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### WakeUp Timer configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ [..] This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC WakeUp.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the RTC Wakeup clock source.
+ * This function is available for STM32F072 devices.
+ * @note The WakeUp Clock source can only be changed when the RTC WakeUp
+ * is disabled (Use the RTC_WakeUpCmd(DISABLE)).
+ * @param RTC_WakeUpClock: Wakeup Clock source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div16
+ * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div8
+ * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div4
+ * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_RTCCLK_Div2
+ * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_CK_SPRE_16bits
+ * @arg RTC_WakeUpClock_CK_SPRE_17bits
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_WakeUpClockConfig(uint32_t RTC_WakeUpClock)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_WAKEUP_CLOCK(RTC_WakeUpClock));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Clear the Wakeup Timer clock source bits in CR register */
+ RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_CR_WUCKSEL;
+
+ /* Configure the clock source */
+ RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)RTC_WakeUpClock;
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the RTC Wakeup counter.
+ * This function is available for STM32F072 devices.
+ * @note The RTC WakeUp counter can only be written when the RTC WakeUp
+ * is disabled (Use the RTC_WakeUpCmd(DISABLE)).
+ * @param RTC_WakeUpCounter: specifies the WakeUp counter.
+ * This parameter can be a value from 0x0000 to 0xFFFF.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_SetWakeUpCounter(uint32_t RTC_WakeUpCounter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_WAKEUP_COUNTER(RTC_WakeUpCounter));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Configure the Wakeup Timer counter */
+ RTC->WUTR = (uint32_t)RTC_WakeUpCounter;
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the RTC WakeUp timer counter value.
+ * This function is available for STM32F072 devices.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval The RTC WakeUp Counter value.
+ */
+uint32_t RTC_GetWakeUpCounter(void)
+{
+ /* Get the counter value */
+ return ((uint32_t)(RTC->WUTR & RTC_WUTR_WUT));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or Disables the RTC WakeUp timer.
+ * This function is available for STM32F072 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the WakeUp timer.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+ErrorStatus RTC_WakeUpCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t wutcounter = 0x00;
+ uint32_t wutwfstatus = 0x00;
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Wakeup Timer */
+ RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)RTC_CR_WUTE;
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Wakeup Timer */
+ RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_CR_WUTE;
+ /* Wait till RTC WUTWF flag is set and if Time out is reached exit */
+ do
+ {
+ wutwfstatus = RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_WUTWF;
+ wutcounter++;
+ } while((wutcounter != INITMODE_TIMEOUT) && (wutwfstatus == 0x00));
+
+ if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_WUTWF) == RESET)
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+
+ return status;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group5 Daylight Saving configuration functions
+ * @brief Daylight Saving configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### WakeUp Timer configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provide functions allowing to program and read the RTC WakeUp.
+
+ This section provide functions allowing to configure the RTC DayLight Saving.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Adds or substract one hour from the current time.
+ * @param RTC_DayLightSaveOperation: the value of hour adjustment.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_DayLightSaving_SUB1H: Substract one hour (winter time)
+ * @arg RTC_DayLightSaving_ADD1H: Add one hour (summer time)
+ * @param RTC_StoreOperation: Specifies the value to be written in the BCK bit
+ * in CR register to store the operation.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_StoreOperation_Reset: BCK Bit Reset
+ * @arg RTC_StoreOperation_Set: BCK Bit Set
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_DayLightSavingConfig(uint32_t RTC_DayLightSaving, uint32_t RTC_StoreOperation)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_DAYLIGHT_SAVING(RTC_DayLightSaving));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_STORE_OPERATION(RTC_StoreOperation));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Clear the bits to be configured */
+ RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_CR_BCK);
+
+ /* Configure the RTC_CR register */
+ RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_DayLightSaving | RTC_StoreOperation);
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the RTC Day Light Saving stored operation.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval RTC Day Light Saving stored operation.
+ * - RTC_StoreOperation_Reset
+ * - RTC_StoreOperation_Set
+ */
+uint32_t RTC_GetStoreOperation(void)
+{
+ return (RTC->CR & RTC_CR_BCK);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group6 Output pin Configuration function
+ * @brief Output pin Configuration function
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Output pin Configuration function #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provide functions allowing to configure the RTC Output source.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the RTC output source (AFO_ALARM).
+ * @param RTC_Output: Specifies which signal will be routed to the RTC output.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Output_Disable: No output selected
+ * @arg RTC_Output_AlarmA: signal of AlarmA mapped to output
+ * @arg RTC_Output_WakeUp: signal of WakeUp mapped to output, available only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @param RTC_OutputPolarity: Specifies the polarity of the output signal.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following:
+ * @arg RTC_OutputPolarity_High: The output pin is high when the
+ * ALRAF is high (depending on OSEL)
+ * @arg RTC_OutputPolarity_Low: The output pin is low when the
+ * ALRAF is high (depending on OSEL)
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_OutputConfig(uint32_t RTC_Output, uint32_t RTC_OutputPolarity)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_OUTPUT(RTC_Output));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_OUTPUT_POL(RTC_OutputPolarity));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Clear the bits to be configured */
+ RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_CR_OSEL | RTC_CR_POL);
+
+ /* Configure the output selection and polarity */
+ RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_Output | RTC_OutputPolarity);
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group7 Digital Calibration configuration functions
+ * @brief Digital Calibration configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Digital Calibration configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the RTC clock to be output through the relative pin.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the digital calibration Output.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_CalibOutputCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the RTC clock output */
+ RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)RTC_CR_COE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the RTC clock output */
+ RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_CR_COE;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the Calibration Pinout (RTC_CALIB) Selection (1Hz or 512Hz).
+ * @param RTC_CalibOutput: Select the Calibration output Selection .
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_CalibOutput_512Hz: A signal has a regular waveform at 512Hz.
+ * @arg RTC_CalibOutput_1Hz: A signal has a regular waveform at 1Hz.
+ * @retval None
+*/
+void RTC_CalibOutputConfig(uint32_t RTC_CalibOutput)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_CALIB_OUTPUT(RTC_CalibOutput));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /*clear flags before config*/
+ RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_CR_CALSEL);
+
+ /* Configure the RTC_CR register */
+ RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)RTC_CalibOutput;
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the Smooth Calibration Settings.
+ * @param RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod: Select the Smooth Calibration Period.
+ * This parameter can be can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_32sec: The smooth calibration periode is 32s.
+ * @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_16sec: The smooth calibration periode is 16s.
+ * @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod_8sec: The smooth calibartion periode is 8s.
+ * @param RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses: Select to Set or reset the CALP bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses_Set: Add one RTCCLK puls every 2**11 pulses.
+ * @arg RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses_Reset: No RTCCLK pulses are added.
+ * @param RTC_SmouthCalibMinusPulsesValue: Select the value of CALM[8:0] bits.
+ * This parameter can be one any value from 0 to 0x000001FF.
+ * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
+ * - SUCCESS: RTC Calib registers are configured
+ * - ERROR: RTC Calib registers are not configured
+*/
+ErrorStatus RTC_SmoothCalibConfig(uint32_t RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod,
+ uint32_t RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses,
+ uint32_t RTC_SmouthCalibMinusPulsesValue)
+{
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+ uint32_t recalpfcount = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_SMOOTH_CALIB_PERIOD(RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_SMOOTH_CALIB_PLUS(RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_SMOOTH_CALIB_MINUS(RTC_SmouthCalibMinusPulsesValue));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* check if a calibration is pending*/
+ if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_RECALPF) != RESET)
+ {
+ /* wait until the Calibration is completed*/
+ while (((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_RECALPF) != RESET) && (recalpfcount != RECALPF_TIMEOUT))
+ {
+ recalpfcount++;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* check if the calibration pending is completed or if there is no calibration operation at all*/
+ if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_RECALPF) == RESET)
+ {
+ /* Configure the Smooth calibration settings */
+ RTC->CALR = (uint32_t)((uint32_t)RTC_SmoothCalibPeriod | (uint32_t)RTC_SmoothCalibPlusPulses | (uint32_t)RTC_SmouthCalibMinusPulsesValue);
+
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+
+ return (ErrorStatus)(status);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group8 TimeStamp configuration functions
+ * @brief TimeStamp configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### TimeStamp configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or Disables the RTC TimeStamp functionality with the
+ * specified time stamp pin stimulating edge.
+ * @param RTC_TimeStampEdge: Specifies the pin edge on which the TimeStamp is
+ * activated.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following:
+ * @arg RTC_TimeStampEdge_Rising: the Time stamp event occurs on the rising
+ * edge of the related pin.
+ * @arg RTC_TimeStampEdge_Falling: the Time stamp event occurs on the
+ * falling edge of the related pin.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the TimeStamp.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_TimeStampCmd(uint32_t RTC_TimeStampEdge, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_TIMESTAMP_EDGE(RTC_TimeStampEdge));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ /* Get the RTC_CR register and clear the bits to be configured */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->CR & (uint32_t)~(RTC_CR_TSEDGE | RTC_CR_TSE));
+
+ /* Get the new configuration */
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(RTC_TimeStampEdge | RTC_CR_TSE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(RTC_TimeStampEdge);
+ }
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Configure the Time Stamp TSEDGE and Enable bits */
+ RTC->CR = (uint32_t)tmpreg;
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Get the RTC TimeStamp value and masks.
+ * @param RTC_Format: specifies the format of the output parameters.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BIN: Binary data format
+ * @arg RTC_Format_BCD: BCD data format
+ * @param RTC_StampTimeStruct: pointer to a RTC_TimeTypeDef structure that will
+ * contains the TimeStamp time values.
+ * @param RTC_StampDateStruct: pointer to a RTC_DateTypeDef structure that will
+ * contains the TimeStamp date values.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_GetTimeStamp(uint32_t RTC_Format, RTC_TimeTypeDef* RTC_StampTimeStruct,
+ RTC_DateTypeDef* RTC_StampDateStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmptime = 0, tmpdate = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_FORMAT(RTC_Format));
+
+ /* Get the TimeStamp time and date registers values */
+ tmptime = (uint32_t)(RTC->TSTR & RTC_TR_RESERVED_MASK);
+ tmpdate = (uint32_t)(RTC->TSDR & RTC_DR_RESERVED_MASK);
+
+ /* Fill the Time structure fields with the read parameters */
+ RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Hours = (uint8_t)((tmptime & (RTC_TR_HT | RTC_TR_HU)) >> 16);
+ RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Minutes = (uint8_t)((tmptime & (RTC_TR_MNT | RTC_TR_MNU)) >> 8);
+ RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Seconds = (uint8_t)(tmptime & (RTC_TR_ST | RTC_TR_SU));
+ RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_H12 = (uint8_t)((tmptime & (RTC_TR_PM)) >> 16);
+
+ /* Fill the Date structure fields with the read parameters */
+ RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Year = 0;
+ RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Month = (uint8_t)((tmpdate & (RTC_DR_MT | RTC_DR_MU)) >> 8);
+ RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Date = (uint8_t)(tmpdate & (RTC_DR_DT | RTC_DR_DU));
+ RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_WeekDay = (uint8_t)((tmpdate & (RTC_DR_WDU)) >> 13);
+
+ /* Check the input parameters format */
+ if (RTC_Format == RTC_Format_BIN)
+ {
+ /* Convert the Time structure parameters to Binary format */
+ RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Hours = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Hours);
+ RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Minutes = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Minutes);
+ RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Seconds = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampTimeStruct->RTC_Seconds);
+
+ /* Convert the Date structure parameters to Binary format */
+ RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Month = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Month);
+ RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Date = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_Date);
+ RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_WeekDay = (uint8_t)RTC_Bcd2ToByte(RTC_StampDateStruct->RTC_WeekDay);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Get the RTC timestamp Subseconds value.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval RTC current timestamp Subseconds value.
+ */
+uint32_t RTC_GetTimeStampSubSecond(void)
+{
+ /* Get timestamp subseconds values from the correspondent registers */
+ return (uint32_t)(RTC->TSSSR);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group9 Tampers configuration functions
+ * @brief Tampers configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Tampers configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the select Tamper pin edge.
+ * @param RTC_Tamper: Selected tamper pin.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Tamper_1: Select Tamper 1.
+ * @arg RTC_Tamper_2: Select Tamper 2.
+ * @param RTC_TamperTrigger: Specifies the trigger on the tamper pin that
+ * stimulates tamper event.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_TamperTrigger_RisingEdge: Rising Edge of the tamper pin causes tamper event.
+ * @arg RTC_TamperTrigger_FallingEdge: Falling Edge of the tamper pin causes tamper event.
+ * @arg RTC_TamperTrigger_LowLevel: Low Level of the tamper pin causes tamper event.
+ * @arg RTC_TamperTrigger_HighLevel: High Level of the tamper pin causes tamper event.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_TamperTriggerConfig(uint32_t RTC_Tamper, uint32_t RTC_TamperTrigger)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER(RTC_Tamper));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER_TRIGGER(RTC_TamperTrigger));
+
+ if (RTC_TamperTrigger == RTC_TamperTrigger_RisingEdge)
+ {
+ /* Configure the RTC_TAFCR register */
+ RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)~(RTC_Tamper << 1));
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Configure the RTC_TAFCR register */
+ RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_Tamper << 1);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or Disables the Tamper detection.
+ * @param RTC_Tamper: Selected tamper pin.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_Tamper_1: Select Tamper 1.
+ * @arg RTC_Tamper_2: Select Tamper 2.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the tamper pin.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_TamperCmd(uint32_t RTC_Tamper, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER(RTC_Tamper));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected Tamper pin */
+ RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_Tamper;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected Tamper pin */
+ RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_Tamper;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the Tampers Filter.
+ * @param RTC_TamperFilter: Specifies the tampers filter.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_TamperFilter_Disable: Tamper filter is disabled.
+ * @arg RTC_TamperFilter_2Sample: Tamper is activated after 2 consecutive
+ * samples at the active level
+ * @arg RTC_TamperFilter_4Sample: Tamper is activated after 4 consecutive
+ * samples at the active level
+ * @arg RTC_TamperFilter_8Sample: Tamper is activated after 8 consecutive
+ * samples at the active level
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_TamperFilterConfig(uint32_t RTC_TamperFilter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER_FILTER(RTC_TamperFilter));
+
+ /* Clear TAMPFLT[1:0] bits in the RTC_TAFCR register */
+ RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_TAFCR_TAMPFLT);
+
+ /* Configure the RTC_TAFCR register */
+ RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_TamperFilter;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the Tampers Sampling Frequency.
+ * @param RTC_TamperSamplingFreq: Specifies the tampers Sampling Frequency.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div32768: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled
+ * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 32768
+ * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div16384: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled
+ * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 16384
+ * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div8192: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled
+ * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 8192
+ * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div4096: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled
+ * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 4096
+ * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div2048: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled
+ * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 2048
+ * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div1024: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled
+ * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 1024
+ * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div512: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled
+ * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 512
+ * @arg RTC_TamperSamplingFreq_RTCCLK_Div256: Each of the tamper inputs are sampled
+ * with a frequency = RTCCLK / 256
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_TamperSamplingFreqConfig(uint32_t RTC_TamperSamplingFreq)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER_SAMPLING_FREQ(RTC_TamperSamplingFreq));
+
+ /* Clear TAMPFREQ[2:0] bits in the RTC_TAFCR register */
+ RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_TAFCR_TAMPFREQ);
+
+ /* Configure the RTC_TAFCR register */
+ RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_TamperSamplingFreq;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the Tampers Pins input Precharge Duration.
+ * @param RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration: Specifies the Tampers Pins input
+ * Precharge Duration.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_1RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 1 RTCCLK cycle
+ * @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_2RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 2 RTCCLK cycle
+ * @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_4RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 4 RTCCLK cycle
+ * @arg RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration_8RTCCLK: Tamper pins are pre-charged before sampling during 8 RTCCLK cycle
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_TamperPinsPrechargeDuration(uint32_t RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_TAMPER_PRECHARGE_DURATION(RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration));
+
+ /* Clear TAMPPRCH[1:0] bits in the RTC_TAFCR register */
+ RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_TAFCR_TAMPPRCH);
+
+ /* Configure the RTC_TAFCR register */
+ RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_TamperPrechargeDuration;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or Disables the TimeStamp on Tamper Detection Event.
+ * @note The timestamp is valid even the TSE bit in tamper control register
+ * is reset.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the timestamp on tamper event.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_TimeStampOnTamperDetectionCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Save timestamp on tamper detection event */
+ RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_TAFCR_TAMPTS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Tamper detection does not cause a timestamp to be saved */
+ RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_TAFCR_TAMPTS;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or Disables the Precharge of Tamper pin.
+ * @param NewState: new state of tamper pull up.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_TamperPullUpCmd(FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable precharge of the selected Tamper pin */
+ RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~RTC_TAFCR_TAMPPUDIS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable precharge of the selected Tamper pin */
+ RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)RTC_TAFCR_TAMPPUDIS;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group10 Backup Data Registers configuration functions
+ * @brief Backup Data Registers configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Backup Data Registers configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Writes a data in a specified RTC Backup data register.
+ * @param RTC_BKP_DR: RTC Backup data Register number.
+ * This parameter can be: RTC_BKP_DRx where x can be from 0 to 4 to
+ * specify the register.
+ * @param Data: Data to be written in the specified RTC Backup data register.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_WriteBackupRegister(uint32_t RTC_BKP_DR, uint32_t Data)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_BKP(RTC_BKP_DR));
+
+ tmp = RTC_BASE + 0x50;
+ tmp += (RTC_BKP_DR * 4);
+
+ /* Write the specified register */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *)tmp = (uint32_t)Data;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Reads data from the specified RTC Backup data Register.
+ * @param RTC_BKP_DR: RTC Backup data Register number.
+ * This parameter can be: RTC_BKP_DRx where x can be from 0 to 19 to
+ * specify the register.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+uint32_t RTC_ReadBackupRegister(uint32_t RTC_BKP_DR)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_BKP(RTC_BKP_DR));
+
+ tmp = RTC_BASE + 0x50;
+ tmp += (RTC_BKP_DR * 4);
+
+ /* Read the specified register */
+ return (*(__IO uint32_t *)tmp);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group11 Output Type Config configuration functions
+ * @brief Output Type Config configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Output Type Config configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the RTC Output Pin mode.
+ * @param RTC_OutputType: specifies the RTC Output (PC13) pin mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_OutputType_OpenDrain: RTC Output (PC13) is configured in
+ * Open Drain mode.
+ * @arg RTC_OutputType_PushPull: RTC Output (PC13) is configured in
+ * Push Pull mode.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_OutputTypeConfig(uint32_t RTC_OutputType)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_OUTPUT_TYPE(RTC_OutputType));
+
+ RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_TAFCR_ALARMOUTTYPE);
+ RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_OutputType);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group12 Shift control synchronisation functions
+ * @brief Shift control synchronisation functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Shift control synchronisation functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the Synchronization Shift Control Settings.
+ * @note When REFCKON is set, firmware must not write to Shift control register
+ * @param RTC_ShiftAdd1S: Select to add or not 1 second to the time Calendar.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values :
+ * @arg RTC_ShiftAdd1S_Set: Add one second to the clock calendar.
+ * @arg RTC_ShiftAdd1S_Reset: No effect.
+ * @param RTC_ShiftSubFS: Select the number of Second Fractions to Substitute.
+ * This parameter can be one any value from 0 to 0x7FFF.
+ * @retval An ErrorStatus enumeration value:
+ * - SUCCESS: RTC Shift registers are configured
+ * - ERROR: RTC Shift registers are not configured
+*/
+ErrorStatus RTC_SynchroShiftConfig(uint32_t RTC_ShiftAdd1S, uint32_t RTC_ShiftSubFS)
+{
+ ErrorStatus status = ERROR;
+ uint32_t shpfcount = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_SHIFT_ADD1S(RTC_ShiftAdd1S));
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_SHIFT_SUBFS(RTC_ShiftSubFS));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ /* Check if a Shift is pending*/
+ if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_SHPF) != RESET)
+ {
+ /* Wait until the shift is completed*/
+ while (((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_SHPF) != RESET) && (shpfcount != SHPF_TIMEOUT))
+ {
+ shpfcount++;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Check if the Shift pending is completed or if there is no Shift operation at all*/
+ if ((RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_SHPF) == RESET)
+ {
+ /* check if the reference clock detection is disabled */
+ if((RTC->CR & RTC_CR_REFCKON) == RESET)
+ {
+ /* Configure the Shift settings */
+ RTC->SHIFTR = (uint32_t)(uint32_t)(RTC_ShiftSubFS) | (uint32_t)(RTC_ShiftAdd1S);
+
+ if(RTC_WaitForSynchro() == ERROR)
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = SUCCESS;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ status = ERROR;
+ }
+
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+
+ return (ErrorStatus)(status);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup RTC_Group13 Interrupts and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] All RTC interrupts are connected to the EXTI controller.
+
+ (+) To enable the RTC Alarm interrupt, the following sequence is required:
+ (++) Configure and enable the EXTI Line 17 in interrupt mode and select the rising
+ edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.
+ (++) Configure and enable the RTC_Alarm IRQ channel in the NVIC using the NVIC_Init()
+ function.
+ (++) Configure the RTC to generate RTC alarms (Alarm A) using
+ the RTC_SetAlarm() and RTC_AlarmCmd() functions.
+
+ (+) To enable the RTC Tamper interrupt, the following sequence is required:
+ (++) Configure and enable the EXTI Line 19 in interrupt mode and select the rising
+ edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.
+ (++) Configure and enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the NVIC_Init()
+ function.
+ (++) Configure the RTC to detect the RTC tamper event using the
+ RTC_TamperTriggerConfig() and RTC_TamperCmd() functions.
+
+ (+) To enable the RTC TimeStamp interrupt, the following sequence is required:
+ (++) Configure and enable the EXTI Line 19 in interrupt mode and select the rising
+ edge sensitivity using the EXTI_Init() function.
+ (++) Configure and enable the TAMP_STAMP IRQ channel in the NVIC using the NVIC_Init()
+ function.
+ (++) Configure the RTC to detect the RTC time-stamp event using the
+ RTC_TimeStampCmd() functions.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified RTC interrupts.
+ * @param RTC_IT: specifies the RTC interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_IT_TS: Time Stamp interrupt mask
+ * @arg RTC_IT_WUT: WakeUp Timer interrupt mask, available only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RTC_IT_ALRA: Alarm A interrupt mask
+ * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP: Tamper event interrupt mask
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified RTC interrupts.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_ITConfig(uint32_t RTC_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_CONFIG_IT(RTC_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ /* Disable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xCA;
+ RTC->WPR = 0x53;
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Configure the Interrupts in the RTC_CR register */
+ RTC->CR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_IT & ~RTC_TAFCR_TAMPIE);
+ /* Configure the Tamper Interrupt in the RTC_TAFCR */
+ RTC->TAFCR |= (uint32_t)(RTC_IT & RTC_TAFCR_TAMPIE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Configure the Interrupts in the RTC_CR register */
+ RTC->CR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_IT & (uint32_t)~RTC_TAFCR_TAMPIE);
+ /* Configure the Tamper Interrupt in the RTC_TAFCR */
+ RTC->TAFCR &= (uint32_t)~(RTC_IT & RTC_TAFCR_TAMPIE);
+ }
+ /* Enable the write protection for RTC registers */
+ RTC->WPR = 0xFF;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified RTC flag is set or not.
+ * @param RTC_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_RECALPF: RECALPF event flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_TAMP2F: Tamper 2 event flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F: Tamper 1 event flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_TSOVF: Time Stamp OverFlow flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_TSF: Time Stamp event flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_WUTF: WakeUp Timer flag, available only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_ALRAF: Alarm A flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_INITF: Initialization mode flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_RSF: Registers Synchronized flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_INITS: Registers Configured flag
+ * @retval The new state of RTC_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus RTC_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t RTC_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_GET_FLAG(RTC_FLAG));
+
+ /* Get all the flags */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->ISR & RTC_FLAGS_MASK);
+
+ /* Return the status of the flag */
+ if ((tmpreg & RTC_FLAG) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the RTC's pending flags.
+ * @param RTC_FLAG: specifies the RTC flag to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_TAMP2F: Tamper 2 event flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_TAMP1F: Tamper 1 event flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_TSOVF: Time Stamp Overflow flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_TSF: Time Stamp event flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_WUTF: WakeUp Timer flag, available only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_ALRAF: Alarm A flag
+ * @arg RTC_FLAG_RSF: Registers Synchronized flag
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_ClearFlag(uint32_t RTC_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_CLEAR_FLAG(RTC_FLAG));
+
+ /* Clear the Flags in the RTC_ISR register */
+ RTC->ISR = (uint32_t)((uint32_t)(~((RTC_FLAG | RTC_ISR_INIT)& 0x0001FFFF) | (uint32_t)(RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_INIT)));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified RTC interrupt has occurred or not.
+ * @param RTC_IT: specifies the RTC interrupt source to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_IT_TS: Time Stamp interrupt
+ * @arg RTC_IT_WUT: WakeUp Timer interrupt, available only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RTC_IT_ALRA: Alarm A interrupt
+ * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP1: Tamper1 event interrupt
+ * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP2: Tamper2 event interrupt
+ * @retval The new state of RTC_IT (SET or RESET).
+ */
+ITStatus RTC_GetITStatus(uint32_t RTC_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0, enablestatus = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_GET_IT(RTC_IT));
+
+ /* Get the TAMPER Interrupt enable bit and pending bit */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC->TAFCR & (RTC_TAFCR_TAMPIE));
+
+ /* Get the Interrupt enable Status */
+ enablestatus = (uint32_t)((RTC->CR & RTC_IT) | (tmpreg & ((RTC_IT >> (RTC_IT >> 18)) >> 15)));
+
+ /* Get the Interrupt pending bit */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)((RTC->ISR & (uint32_t)(RTC_IT >> 4)));
+
+ /* Get the status of the Interrupt */
+ if ((enablestatus != (uint32_t)RESET) && ((tmpreg & 0x0000FFFF) != (uint32_t)RESET))
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the RTC's interrupt pending bits.
+ * @param RTC_IT: specifies the RTC interrupt pending bit to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg RTC_IT_TS: Time Stamp interrupt
+ * @arg RTC_IT_WUT: WakeUp Timer interrupt, available only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @arg RTC_IT_ALRA: Alarm A interrupt
+ * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP1: Tamper1 event interrupt
+ * @arg RTC_IT_TAMP2: Tamper2 event interrupt
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void RTC_ClearITPendingBit(uint32_t RTC_IT)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_RTC_CLEAR_IT(RTC_IT));
+
+ /* Get the RTC_ISR Interrupt pending bits mask */
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)(RTC_IT >> 4);
+
+ /* Clear the interrupt pending bits in the RTC_ISR register */
+ RTC->ISR = (uint32_t)((uint32_t)(~((tmpreg | RTC_ISR_INIT)& 0x0000FFFF) | (uint32_t)(RTC->ISR & RTC_ISR_INIT)));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Converts a 2 digit decimal to BCD format.
+ * @param Value: Byte to be converted.
+ * @retval Converted byte
+ */
+static uint8_t RTC_ByteToBcd2(uint8_t Value)
+{
+ uint8_t bcdhigh = 0;
+
+ while (Value >= 10)
+ {
+ bcdhigh++;
+ Value -= 10;
+ }
+
+ return ((uint8_t)(bcdhigh << 4) | Value);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Convert from 2 digit BCD to Binary.
+ * @param Value: BCD value to be converted.
+ * @retval Converted word
+ */
+static uint8_t RTC_Bcd2ToByte(uint8_t Value)
+{
+ uint8_t tmp = 0;
+ tmp = ((uint8_t)(Value & (uint8_t)0xF0) >> (uint8_t)0x4) * 10;
+ return (tmp + (Value & (uint8_t)0x0F));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_spi.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_spi.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_spi.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1334 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_spi.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Serial peripheral interface (SPI):
+ * + Initialization and Configuration
+ * + Data transfers functions
+ * + Hardware CRC Calculation
+ * + DMA transfers management
+ * + Interrupts and flags management
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ (#) Enable peripheral clock using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, ENABLE)
+ function for SPI1 or using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, ENABLE)
+ function for SPI2.
+
+ (#) Enable SCK, MOSI, MISO and NSS GPIO clocks using
+ RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() function.
+
+ (#) Peripherals alternate function:
+ (++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
+ Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function.
+ (++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function by:
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF.
+ (++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via
+ GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members.
+ (++) Call GPIO_Init() function.
+
+ (#) Program the Polarity, Phase, First Data, Baud Rate Prescaler, Slave
+ Management, Peripheral Mode and CRC Polynomial values using the SPI_Init()
+ function.In I2S mode, program the Mode, Standard, Data Format, MCLK
+ Output, Audio frequency and Polarity using I2S_Init() function.
+
+ (#) Configure the FIFO threshold using SPI_RxFIFOThresholdConfig() to select
+ at which threshold the RXNE event is generated.
+
+ (#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
+ SPI_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
+
+ (#) When using the DMA mode
+ (++) Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function.
+ (++) Active the needed channel Request using SPI_I2S_DMACmd() function.
+
+ (#) Enable the SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function or enable the I2S using
+ I2S_Cmd().
+
+ (#) Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function when using DMA mode.
+
+ (#) Optionally, you can enable/configure the following parameters without
+ re-initialization (i.e there is no need to call again SPI_Init() function):
+ (++) When bidirectional mode (SPI_Direction_1Line_Rx or SPI_Direction_1Line_Tx)
+ is programmed as Data direction parameter using the SPI_Init()
+ function it can be possible to switch between SPI_Direction_Tx
+ or SPI_Direction_Rx using the SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig() function.
+ (++) When SPI_NSS_Soft is selected as Slave Select Management parameter
+ using the SPI_Init() function it can be possible to manage the
+ NSS internal signal using the SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig() function.
+ (++) Reconfigure the data size using the SPI_DataSizeConfig() function.
+ (++) Enable or disable the SS output using the SPI_SSOutputCmd() function.
+
+ (#) To use the CRC Hardware calculation feature refer to the Peripheral
+ CRC hardware Calculation subsection.
+
+ @endverbatim
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_spi.h"
+#include "stm32f0xx_rcc.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup SPI
+ * @brief SPI driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* SPI registers Masks */
+#define CR1_CLEAR_MASK ((uint16_t)0x3040)
+#define CR1_CLEAR_MASK2 ((uint16_t)0xFFFB)
+#define CR2_LDMA_MASK ((uint16_t)0x9FFF)
+
+#define I2SCFGR_CLEAR_Mask ((uint16_t)0xF040)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup SPI_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup SPI_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions
+ * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the SPI Direction,
+ SPI Mode, SPI Data Size, SPI Polarity, SPI Phase, SPI NSS Management, SPI Baud
+ Rate Prescaler, SPI First Bit and SPI CRC Polynomial.
+
+ [..] The SPI_Init() function follows the SPI configuration procedures for Master mode
+ and Slave mode (details for these procedures are available in reference manual).
+
+ [..] When the Software NSS management (SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS = SPI_NSS_Soft) is selected,
+ use the following function to manage the NSS bit:
+ void SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_NSSInternalSoft);
+
+ [..] In Master mode, when the Hardware NSS management (SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS = SPI_NSS_Hard)
+ is selected, use the follwoing function to enable the NSS output feature.
+ void SPI_SSOutputCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState);
+
+ [..] The NSS pulse mode can be managed by the SPI TI mode when enabling it using the following function:
+ void SPI_TIModeCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState);
+ And it can be managed by software in the SPI Motorola mode using this function:
+ void SPI_NSSPulseModeCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState);
+
+ [..] This section provides also functions to initialize the I2S Mode, Standard,
+ Data Format, MCLK Output, Audio frequency and Polarity.
+
+ [..] The I2S_Init() function follows the I2S configuration procedures for Master mode
+ and Slave mode.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the SPIx peripheral registers to their default
+ * reset values.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * I2S mode is not supported for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_I2S_DeInit(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ if (SPIx == SPI1)
+ {
+ /* Enable SPI1 reset state */
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, ENABLE);
+ /* Release SPI1 from reset state */
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_SPI1, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (SPIx == SPI2)
+ {
+ /* Enable SPI2 reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, ENABLE);
+ /* Release SPI2 from reset state */
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_SPI2, DISABLE);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each SPI_InitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param SPI_InitStruct: pointer to a SPI_InitTypeDef structure which will be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_StructInit(SPI_InitTypeDef* SPI_InitStruct)
+{
+/*--------------- Reset SPI init structure parameters values -----------------*/
+ /* Initialize the SPI_Direction member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction = SPI_Direction_2Lines_FullDuplex;
+ /* Initialize the SPI_Mode member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode = SPI_Mode_Slave;
+ /* Initialize the SPI_DataSize member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize = SPI_DataSize_8b;
+ /* Initialize the SPI_CPOL member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL = SPI_CPOL_Low;
+ /* Initialize the SPI_CPHA member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA = SPI_CPHA_1Edge;
+ /* Initialize the SPI_NSS member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS = SPI_NSS_Hard;
+ /* Initialize the SPI_BaudRatePrescaler member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler = SPI_BaudRatePrescaler_2;
+ /* Initialize the SPI_FirstBit member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit = SPI_FirstBit_MSB;
+ /* Initialize the SPI_CRCPolynomial member */
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial = 7;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the SPIx peripheral according to the specified
+ * parameters in the SPI_InitStruct.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param SPI_InitStruct: pointer to a SPI_InitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the specified SPI peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_Init(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, SPI_InitTypeDef* SPI_InitStruct)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ /* Check the SPI parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_DIRECTION_MODE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_MODE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_DATA_SIZE(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_CPOL(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_CPHA(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_NSS(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_BAUDRATE_PRESCALER(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_FIRST_BIT(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_CRC_POLYNOMIAL(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial));
+
+ /*---------------------------- SPIx CR1 Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Get the SPIx CR1 value */
+ tmpreg = SPIx->CR1;
+ /* Clear BIDIMode, BIDIOE, RxONLY, SSM, SSI, LSBFirst, BR, CPOL and CPHA bits */
+ tmpreg &= CR1_CLEAR_MASK;
+ /* Configure SPIx: direction, NSS management, first transmitted bit, BaudRate prescaler
+ master/slave mode, CPOL and CPHA */
+ /* Set BIDImode, BIDIOE and RxONLY bits according to SPI_Direction value */
+ /* Set SSM, SSI bit according to SPI_NSS values */
+ /* Set LSBFirst bit according to SPI_FirstBit value */
+ /* Set BR bits according to SPI_BaudRatePrescaler value */
+ /* Set CPOL bit according to SPI_CPOL value */
+ /* Set CPHA bit according to SPI_CPHA value */
+ tmpreg |= (uint16_t)((uint32_t)SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Direction | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_FirstBit |
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPOL | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CPHA |
+ SPI_InitStruct->SPI_NSS | SPI_InitStruct->SPI_BaudRatePrescaler);
+ /* Write to SPIx CR1 */
+ SPIx->CR1 = tmpreg;
+ /*-------------------------Data Size Configuration -----------------------*/
+ /* Get the SPIx CR2 value */
+ tmpreg = SPIx->CR2;
+ /* Clear DS[3:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &=(uint16_t)~SPI_CR2_DS;
+ /* Configure SPIx: Data Size */
+ tmpreg |= (uint16_t)(SPI_InitStruct->SPI_DataSize);
+ /* Write to SPIx CR2 */
+ SPIx->CR2 = tmpreg;
+
+ /*---------------------------- SPIx CRCPOLY Configuration --------------------*/
+ /* Write to SPIx CRCPOLY */
+ SPIx->CRCPR = SPI_InitStruct->SPI_CRCPolynomial;
+
+ /*---------------------------- SPIx CR1 Configuration ------------------------*/
+ /* Get the SPIx CR1 value */
+ tmpreg = SPIx->CR1;
+ /* Clear MSTR bit */
+ tmpreg &= CR1_CLEAR_MASK2;
+ /* Configure SPIx: master/slave mode */
+ /* Set MSTR bit according to SPI_Mode */
+ tmpreg |= (uint16_t)((uint32_t)SPI_InitStruct->SPI_Mode);
+ /* Write to SPIx CR1 */
+ SPIx->CR1 = tmpreg;
+
+ /* Activate the SPI mode (Reset I2SMOD bit in I2SCFGR register) */
+ SPIx->I2SCFGR &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_I2SCFGR_I2SMOD);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each I2S_InitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @note This mode is not supported for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param I2S_InitStruct: pointer to a I2S_InitTypeDef structure which will be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2S_StructInit(I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct)
+{
+/*--------------- Reset I2S init structure parameters values -----------------*/
+ /* Initialize the I2S_Mode member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode = I2S_Mode_SlaveTx;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2S_Standard member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard = I2S_Standard_Phillips;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2S_DataFormat member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat = I2S_DataFormat_16b;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2S_MCLKOutput member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput = I2S_MCLKOutput_Disable;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2S_AudioFreq member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq = I2S_AudioFreq_Default;
+
+ /* Initialize the I2S_CPOL member */
+ I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL = I2S_CPOL_Low;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the SPIx peripheral according to the specified
+ * parameters in the I2S_InitStruct.
+ * @note This mode is not supported for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 to select the SPI peripheral (configured in I2S mode).
+ * @param I2S_InitStruct: pointer to an I2S_InitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the configuration information for the specified SPI peripheral
+ * configured in I2S mode.
+ * @note This function calculates the optimal prescaler needed to obtain the most
+ * accurate audio frequency (depending on the I2S clock source, the PLL values
+ * and the product configuration). But in case the prescaler value is greater
+ * than 511, the default value (0x02) will be configured instead.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2S_Init(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, I2S_InitTypeDef* I2S_InitStruct)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpreg = 0, i2sdiv = 2, i2sodd = 0, packetlength = 1;
+ uint32_t tmp = 0;
+ RCC_ClocksTypeDef RCC_Clocks;
+ uint32_t sourceclock = 0;
+
+ /* Check the I2S parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_1_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_MODE(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_STANDARD(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_DATA_FORMAT(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_MCLK_OUTPUT(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_AUDIO_FREQ(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq));
+ assert_param(IS_I2S_CPOL(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL));
+
+/*----------------------- SPIx I2SCFGR & I2SPR Configuration -----------------*/
+ /* Clear I2SMOD, I2SE, I2SCFG, PCMSYNC, I2SSTD, CKPOL, DATLEN and CHLEN bits */
+ SPIx->I2SCFGR &= I2SCFGR_CLEAR_Mask;
+ SPIx->I2SPR = 0x0002;
+
+ /* Get the I2SCFGR register value */
+ tmpreg = SPIx->I2SCFGR;
+
+ /* If the default value has to be written, reinitialize i2sdiv and i2sodd*/
+ if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq == I2S_AudioFreq_Default)
+ {
+ i2sodd = (uint16_t)0;
+ i2sdiv = (uint16_t)2;
+ }
+ /* If the requested audio frequency is not the default, compute the prescaler */
+ else
+ {
+ /* Check the frame length (For the Prescaler computing) */
+ if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat == I2S_DataFormat_16b)
+ {
+ /* Packet length is 16 bits */
+ packetlength = 1;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Packet length is 32 bits */
+ packetlength = 2;
+ }
+
+ /* I2S Clock source is System clock: Get System Clock frequency */
+ RCC_GetClocksFreq(&RCC_Clocks);
+
+ /* Get the source clock value: based on System Clock value */
+ sourceclock = RCC_Clocks.SYSCLK_Frequency;
+
+ /* Compute the Real divider depending on the MCLK output state with a floating point */
+ if(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput == I2S_MCLKOutput_Enable)
+ {
+ /* MCLK output is enabled */
+ tmp = (uint16_t)(((((sourceclock / 256) * 10) / I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq)) + 5);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* MCLK output is disabled */
+ tmp = (uint16_t)(((((sourceclock / (32 * packetlength)) *10 ) / I2S_InitStruct->I2S_AudioFreq)) + 5);
+ }
+
+ /* Remove the floating point */
+ tmp = tmp / 10;
+
+ /* Check the parity of the divider */
+ i2sodd = (uint16_t)(tmp & (uint16_t)0x0001);
+
+ /* Compute the i2sdiv prescaler */
+ i2sdiv = (uint16_t)((tmp - i2sodd) / 2);
+
+ /* Get the Mask for the Odd bit (SPI_I2SPR[8]) register */
+ i2sodd = (uint16_t) (i2sodd << 8);
+ }
+
+ /* Test if the divider is 1 or 0 or greater than 0xFF */
+ if ((i2sdiv < 2) || (i2sdiv > 0xFF))
+ {
+ /* Set the default values */
+ i2sdiv = 2;
+ i2sodd = 0;
+ }
+
+ /* Write to SPIx I2SPR register the computed value */
+ SPIx->I2SPR = (uint16_t)(i2sdiv | (uint16_t)(i2sodd | (uint16_t)I2S_InitStruct->I2S_MCLKOutput));
+
+ /* Configure the I2S with the SPI_InitStruct values */
+ tmpreg |= (uint16_t)(SPI_I2SCFGR_I2SMOD | (uint16_t)(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Mode | \
+ (uint16_t)(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_Standard | (uint16_t)(I2S_InitStruct->I2S_DataFormat | \
+ (uint16_t)I2S_InitStruct->I2S_CPOL))));
+
+ /* Write to SPIx I2SCFGR */
+ SPIx->I2SCFGR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified SPI peripheral.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the SPIx peripheral.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_Cmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI peripheral */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_CR1_SPE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI peripheral */
+ SPIx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_CR1_SPE);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the TI Mode.
+ *
+ * @note This function can be called only after the SPI_Init() function has
+ * been called.
+ * @note When TI mode is selected, the control bits SSM, SSI, CPOL and CPHA
+ * are not taken into consideration and are configured by hardware
+ * respectively to the TI mode requirements.
+ *
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the selected SPI TI communication mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_TIModeCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the TI mode for the selected SPI peripheral */
+ SPIx->CR2 |= SPI_CR2_FRF;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the TI mode for the selected SPI peripheral */
+ SPIx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_CR2_FRF);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified SPI peripheral (in I2S mode).
+ * @note This mode is not supported for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the SPIx peripheral.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void I2S_Cmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_1_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI peripheral in I2S mode */
+ SPIx->I2SCFGR |= SPI_I2SCFGR_I2SE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI peripheral in I2S mode */
+ SPIx->I2SCFGR &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_I2SCFGR_I2SE);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the data size for the selected SPI.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param SPI_DataSize: specifies the SPI data size.
+ * For the SPIx peripheral this parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_4b: Set data size to 4 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_5b: Set data size to 5 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_6b: Set data size to 6 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_7b: Set data size to 7 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_8b: Set data size to 8 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_9b: Set data size to 9 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_10b: Set data size to 10 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_11b: Set data size to 11 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_12b: Set data size to 12 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_13b: Set data size to 13 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_14b: Set data size to 14 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_15b: Set data size to 15 bits
+ * @arg SPI_DataSize_16b: Set data size to 16 bits
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_DataSizeConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_DataSize)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_DATA_SIZE(SPI_DataSize));
+ /* Read the CR2 register */
+ tmpreg = SPIx->CR2;
+ /* Clear DS[3:0] bits */
+ tmpreg &= (uint16_t)~SPI_CR2_DS;
+ /* Set new DS[3:0] bits value */
+ tmpreg |= SPI_DataSize;
+ SPIx->CR2 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the FIFO reception threshold for the selected SPI.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param SPI_RxFIFOThreshold: specifies the FIFO reception threshold.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SPI_RxFIFOThreshold_HF: RXNE event is generated if the FIFO
+ * level is greater or equal to 1/2.
+ * @arg SPI_RxFIFOThreshold_QF: RXNE event is generated if the FIFO
+ * level is greater or equal to 1/4.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_RxFIFOThresholdConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_RxFIFOThreshold)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_RX_FIFO_THRESHOLD(SPI_RxFIFOThreshold));
+
+ /* Clear FRXTH bit */
+ SPIx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_CR2_FRXTH);
+
+ /* Set new FRXTH bit value */
+ SPIx->CR2 |= SPI_RxFIFOThreshold;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the data transfer direction in bidirectional mode for the specified SPI.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param SPI_Direction: specifies the data transfer direction in bidirectional mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SPI_Direction_Tx: Selects Tx transmission direction
+ * @arg SPI_Direction_Rx: Selects Rx receive direction
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_BiDirectionalLineConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_Direction)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_DIRECTION(SPI_Direction));
+ if (SPI_Direction == SPI_Direction_Tx)
+ {
+ /* Set the Tx only mode */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_Direction_Tx;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Set the Rx only mode */
+ SPIx->CR1 &= SPI_Direction_Rx;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures internally by software the NSS pin for the selected SPI.
+ * @note This function can be called only after the SPI_Init() function has
+ * been called.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param SPI_NSSInternalSoft: specifies the SPI NSS internal state.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Set: Set NSS pin internally
+ * @arg SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset: Reset NSS pin internally
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_NSSInternalSoftwareConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_NSSInternalSoft)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_NSS_INTERNAL(SPI_NSSInternalSoft));
+
+ if (SPI_NSSInternalSoft != SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset)
+ {
+ /* Set NSS pin internally by software */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Set;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset NSS pin internally by software */
+ SPIx->CR1 &= SPI_NSSInternalSoft_Reset;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the SS output for the selected SPI.
+ * @note This function can be called only after the SPI_Init() function has
+ * been called and the NSS hardware management mode is selected.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the SPIx SS output.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_SSOutputCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI SS output */
+ SPIx->CR2 |= SPI_CR2_SSOE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI SS output */
+ SPIx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_CR2_SSOE);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the NSS pulse management mode.
+ * @note This function can be called only after the SPI_Init() function has
+ * been called.
+ * @note When TI mode is selected, the control bits NSSP is not taken into
+ * consideration and are configured by hardware respectively to the
+ * TI mode requirements.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the NSS pulse management mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_NSSPulseModeCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the NSS pulse management mode */
+ SPIx->CR2 |= SPI_CR2_NSSP;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the NSS pulse management mode */
+ SPIx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_CR2_NSSP);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup SPI_Group2 Data transfers functions
+ * @brief Data transfers functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Data transfers functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to manage the SPI or I2S
+ data transfers.
+
+ [..] In reception, data are received and then stored into an internal Rx buffer while
+ In transmission, data are first stored into an internal Tx buffer before being
+ transmitted.
+
+ [..] The read access of the SPI_DR register can be done using
+ SPI_ReceiveData8() (when data size is equal or inferior than 8bits) and.
+ SPI_I2S_ReceiveData16() (when data size is superior than 8bits)function
+ and returns the Rx buffered value. Whereas a write access to the SPI_DR
+ can be done using SPI_SendData8() (when data size is equal or inferior than 8bits)
+ and SPI_I2S_SendData16() (when data size is superior than 8bits) function
+ and stores the written data into Tx buffer.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Transmits a Data through the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 in SPI mode to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param Data: Data to be transmitted.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_SendData8(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t Data)
+{
+ uint32_t spixbase = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ spixbase = (uint32_t)SPIx;
+ spixbase += 0x0C;
+
+ *(__IO uint8_t *) spixbase = Data;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Transmits a Data through the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 in SPI mode or 1 in I2S mode to select
+ * the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param Data: Data to be transmitted.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_I2S_SendData16(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t Data)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ SPIx->DR = (uint16_t)Data;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the most recent received data by the SPIx/I2Sx peripheral.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 in SPI mode to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @retval The value of the received data.
+ */
+uint8_t SPI_ReceiveData8(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
+{
+ uint32_t spixbase = 0x00;
+
+ spixbase = (uint32_t)SPIx;
+ spixbase += 0x0C;
+
+ return *(__IO uint8_t *) spixbase;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the most recent received data by the SPIx peripheral.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 in SPI mode or 1 in I2S mode to select
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * the SPI peripheral.
+ * @retval The value of the received data.
+ */
+uint16_t SPI_I2S_ReceiveData16(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
+{
+ return SPIx->DR;
+}
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup SPI_Group3 Hardware CRC Calculation functions
+ * @brief Hardware CRC Calculation functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Hardware CRC Calculation functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to manage the SPI CRC hardware
+ calculation.SPI communication using CRC is possible through the following procedure:
+
+ (#) Program the Data direction, Polarity, Phase, First Data, Baud Rate Prescaler,
+ Slave Management, Peripheral Mode and CRC Polynomial values using the SPI_Init()
+ function.
+ (#) Enable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
+ (#) Enable the SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function
+ (#) Before writing the last data to the TX buffer, set the CRCNext bit using the
+ SPI_TransmitCRC() function to indicate that after transmission of the last
+ data, the CRC should be transmitted.
+ (#) After transmitting the last data, the SPI transmits the CRC. The SPI_CR1_CRCNEXT
+ bit is reset. The CRC is also received and compared against the SPI_RXCRCR
+ value.
+ If the value does not match, the SPI_FLAG_CRCERR flag is set and an interrupt
+ can be generated when the SPI_I2S_IT_ERR interrupt is enabled.
+
+ -@-
+ (+@) It is advised to don't read the calculate CRC values during the communication.
+ (+@) When the SPI is in slave mode, be careful to enable CRC calculation only
+ when the clock is stable, that is, when the clock is in the steady state.
+ If not, a wrong CRC calculation may be done. In fact, the CRC is sensitive
+ to the SCK slave input clock as soon as CRCEN is set, and this, whatever
+ the value of the SPE bit.
+ (+@) With high bitrate frequencies, be careful when transmitting the CRC.
+ As the number of used CPU cycles has to be as low as possible in the CRC
+ transfer phase, it is forbidden to call software functions in the CRC
+ transmission sequence to avoid errors in the last data and CRC reception.
+ In fact, CRCNEXT bit has to be written before the end of the transmission/reception
+ of the last data.
+ (+@) For high bit rate frequencies, it is advised to use the DMA mode to avoid the
+ degradation of the SPI speed performance due to CPU accesses impacting the
+ SPI bandwidth.
+ (+@) When the STM32F0xx are configured as slaves and the NSS hardware mode is
+ used, the NSS pin needs to be kept low between the data phase and the CRC
+ phase.
+ (+@) When the SPI is configured in slave mode with the CRC feature enabled, CRC
+ calculation takes place even if a high level is applied on the NSS pin.
+ This may happen for example in case of a multislave environment where the
+ communication master addresses slaves alternately.
+ (+@) Between a slave deselection (high level on NSS) and a new slave selection
+ (low level on NSS), the CRC value should be cleared on both master and slave
+ sides in order to resynchronize the master and slave for their respective
+ CRC calculation.
+
+ -@- To clear the CRC, follow the procedure below:
+ (#@) Disable SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function
+ (#@) Disable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
+ (#@) Enable the CRC calculation using the SPI_CalculateCRC() function.
+ (#@) Enable SPI using the SPI_Cmd() function.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the CRC calculation length for the selected SPI.
+ * @note This function can be called only after the SPI_Init() function has
+ * been called.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param SPI_CRCLength: specifies the SPI CRC calculation length.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SPI_CRCLength_8b: Set CRC Calculation to 8 bits
+ * @arg SPI_CRCLength_16b: Set CRC Calculation to 16 bits
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_CRCLengthConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_CRCLength)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_CRC_LENGTH(SPI_CRCLength));
+
+ /* Clear CRCL bit */
+ SPIx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_CR1_CRCL);
+
+ /* Set new CRCL bit value */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_CRCLength;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the CRC value calculation of the transferred bytes.
+ * @note This function can be called only after the SPI_Init() function has
+ * been called.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the SPIx CRC value calculation.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_CalculateCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI CRC calculation */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_CR1_CRCEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI CRC calculation */
+ SPIx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)SPI_CR1_CRCEN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Transmit the SPIx CRC value.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_TransmitCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ /* Enable the selected SPI CRC transmission */
+ SPIx->CR1 |= SPI_CR1_CRCNEXT;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the transmit or the receive CRC register value for the specified SPI.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param SPI_CRC: specifies the CRC register to be read.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SPI_CRC_Tx: Selects Tx CRC register
+ * @arg SPI_CRC_Rx: Selects Rx CRC register
+ * @retval The selected CRC register value..
+ */
+uint16_t SPI_GetCRC(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_CRC)
+{
+ uint16_t crcreg = 0;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_CRC(SPI_CRC));
+
+ if (SPI_CRC != SPI_CRC_Rx)
+ {
+ /* Get the Tx CRC register */
+ crcreg = SPIx->TXCRCR;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Get the Rx CRC register */
+ crcreg = SPIx->RXCRCR;
+ }
+ /* Return the selected CRC register */
+ return crcreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the CRC Polynomial register value for the specified SPI.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @retval The CRC Polynomial register value.
+ */
+uint16_t SPI_GetCRCPolynomial(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+
+ /* Return the CRC polynomial register */
+ return SPIx->CRCPR;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup SPI_Group4 DMA transfers management functions
+ * @brief DMA transfers management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### DMA transfers management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides two functions that can be used only in DMA mode.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the SPIx/I2Sx DMA interface.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 in SPI mode or 1 in I2S mode to select
+ * the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * I2S mode is not supported for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param SPI_I2S_DMAReq: specifies the SPI DMA transfer request to be enabled or disabled.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Tx: Tx buffer DMA transfer request
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Rx: Rx buffer DMA transfer request
+ * @param NewState: new state of the selected SPI DMA transfer request.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_I2S_DMACmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_DMA_REQ(SPI_I2S_DMAReq));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI DMA requests */
+ SPIx->CR2 |= SPI_I2S_DMAReq;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI DMA requests */
+ SPIx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~SPI_I2S_DMAReq;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the number of data to transfer type(Even/Odd) for the DMA
+ * last transfers and for the selected SPI.
+ * @note This function have a meaning only if DMA mode is selected and if
+ * the packing mode is used (data length <= 8 and DMA transfer size halfword)
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param SPI_LastDMATransfer: specifies the SPI last DMA transfers state.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxEvenRxEven: Number of data for transmission Even
+ * and number of data for reception Even.
+ * @arg SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxOddRxEven: Number of data for transmission Odd
+ * and number of data for reception Even.
+ * @arg SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxEvenRxOdd: Number of data for transmission Even
+ * and number of data for reception Odd.
+ * @arg SPI_LastDMATransfer_TxOddRxOdd: Number of data for transmission Odd
+ * and number of data for reception Odd.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_LastDMATransferCmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_LastDMATransfer)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_LAST_DMA_TRANSFER(SPI_LastDMATransfer));
+
+ /* Clear LDMA_TX and LDMA_RX bits */
+ SPIx->CR2 &= CR2_LDMA_MASK;
+
+ /* Set new LDMA_TX and LDMA_RX bits value */
+ SPIx->CR2 |= SPI_LastDMATransfer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup SPI_Group5 Interrupts and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides a set of functions allowing to configure the SPI/I2S Interrupts
+ sources and check or clear the flags or pending bits status.
+ The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to manage
+ the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode or DMA mode.
+
+ *** Polling Mode ***
+ ====================
+ [..] In Polling Mode, the SPI/I2S communication can be managed by 9 flags:
+ (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register
+ (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register
+ (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_BSY : to indicate the state of the communication layer of the SPI.
+ (#) SPI_FLAG_CRCERR : to indicate if a CRC Calculation error occur
+ (#) SPI_FLAG_MODF : to indicate if a Mode Fault error occur
+ (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_OVR : to indicate if an Overrun error occur
+ (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_FRE: to indicate a Frame Format error occurs.
+ (#) I2S_FLAG_UDR: to indicate an Underrun error occurs.
+ (#) I2S_FLAG_CHSIDE: to indicate Channel Side.
+
+ [..]
+ (@)Do not use the BSY flag to handle each data transmission or reception. It is better
+ to use the TXE and RXNE flags instead.
+
+ [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
+ (+) FlagStatus SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG);
+ (+) void SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG);
+
+ *** Interrupt Mode ***
+ ======================
+ [..] In Interrupt Mode, the SPI/I2S communication can be managed by 3 interrupt sources
+ and 5 pending bits:
+ [..] Pending Bits:
+ (#) SPI_I2S_IT_TXE : to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register
+ (#) SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : to indicate the status of the receive buffer register
+ (#) SPI_I2S_IT_OVR : to indicate if an Overrun error occur
+ (#) I2S_IT_UDR : to indicate an Underrun Error occurs.
+ (#) SPI_I2S_FLAG_FRE : to indicate a Frame Format error occurs.
+
+ [..] Interrupt Source:
+ (#) SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: specifies the interrupt source for the Tx buffer empty
+ interrupt.
+ (#) SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE : specifies the interrupt source for the Rx buffer not
+ empty interrupt.
+ (#) SPI_I2S_IT_ERR : specifies the interrupt source for the errors interrupt.
+
+ [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
+ (+) void SPI_I2S_ITConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT, FunctionalState NewState);
+ (+) ITStatus SPI_I2S_GetITStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT);
+
+ *** FIFO Status ***
+ ===================
+ [..] It is possible to monitor the FIFO status when a transfer is ongoing using the
+ following function:
+ (+) uint32_t SPI_GetFIFOStatus(uint8_t SPI_FIFO_Direction);
+
+ *** DMA Mode ***
+ ================
+ [..] In DMA Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel
+ requests:
+ (#) SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request.
+ (#) SPI_I2S_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request.
+
+ [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following function:
+ (+) void SPI_I2S_DMACmd(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState).
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified SPI/I2S interrupts.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 in SPI mode or 1 in I2S mode to select
+ * the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * I2S mode is not supported for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI interrupt source to be enabled or disabled.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: Tx buffer empty interrupt mask
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE: Rx buffer not empty interrupt mask
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_ERR: Error interrupt mask
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified SPI interrupt.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_I2S_ITConfig(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ uint16_t itpos = 0, itmask = 0 ;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_CONFIG_IT(SPI_I2S_IT));
+
+ /* Get the SPI IT index */
+ itpos = SPI_I2S_IT >> 4;
+
+ /* Set the IT mask */
+ itmask = (uint16_t)1 << (uint16_t)itpos;
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected SPI interrupt */
+ SPIx->CR2 |= itmask;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected SPI interrupt */
+ SPIx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~itmask;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the current SPIx Transmission FIFO filled level.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @retval The Transmission FIFO filling state.
+ * - SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_Empty: when FIFO is empty
+ * - SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_1QuarterFull: if more than 1 quarter-full.
+ * - SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_HalfFull: if more than 1 half-full.
+ * - SPI_TransmissionFIFOStatus_Full: when FIFO is full.
+ */
+uint16_t SPI_GetTransmissionFIFOStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
+{
+ /* Get the SPIx Transmission FIFO level bits */
+ return (uint16_t)((SPIx->SR & SPI_SR_FTLVL));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the current SPIx Reception FIFO filled level.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @retval The Reception FIFO filling state.
+ * - SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_Empty: when FIFO is empty
+ * - SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_1QuarterFull: if more than 1 quarter-full.
+ * - SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_HalfFull: if more than 1 half-full.
+ * - SPI_ReceptionFIFOStatus_Full: when FIFO is full.
+ */
+uint16_t SPI_GetReceptionFIFOStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx)
+{
+ /* Get the SPIx Reception FIFO level bits */
+ return (uint16_t)((SPIx->SR & SPI_SR_FRLVL));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified SPI flag is set or not.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 in SPI mode or 1 in I2S mode to select
+ * the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * I2S mode is not supported for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param SPI_I2S_FLAG: specifies the SPI flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_FLAG_TXE: Transmit buffer empty flag.
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_FLAG_RXNE: Receive buffer not empty flag.
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_FLAG_BSY: Busy flag.
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_FLAG_OVR: Overrun flag.
+ * @arg SPI_FLAG_MODF: Mode Fault flag.
+ * @arg SPI_FLAG_CRCERR: CRC Error flag.
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_FLAG_FRE: TI frame format error flag.
+ * @arg I2S_FLAG_UDR: Underrun Error flag.
+ * @arg I2S_FLAG_CHSIDE: Channel Side flag.
+ * @retval The new state of SPI_I2S_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_GET_FLAG(SPI_I2S_FLAG));
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified SPI flag */
+ if ((SPIx->SR & SPI_I2S_FLAG) != (uint16_t)RESET)
+ {
+ /* SPI_I2S_FLAG is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* SPI_I2S_FLAG is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the SPI_I2S_FLAG status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the SPIx CRC Error (CRCERR) flag.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 to select the SPI peripheral.
+ * @note SPI2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * I2S mode is not supported for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param SPI_I2S_FLAG: specifies the SPI flag to clear.
+ * This function clears only CRCERR flag.
+ * @note OVR (OverRun error) flag is cleared by software sequence: a read
+ * operation to SPI_DR register (SPI_I2S_ReceiveData()) followed by
+ * a read operation to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()).
+ * @note MODF (Mode Fault) flag is cleared by software sequence: a read/write
+ * operation to SPI_SR register (SPI_I2S_GetFlagStatus()) followed by
+ * a write operation to SPI_CR1 register (SPI_Cmd() to enable the SPI).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SPI_I2S_ClearFlag(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint16_t SPI_I2S_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_CLEAR_FLAG(SPI_I2S_FLAG));
+
+ /* Clear the selected SPI CRC Error (CRCERR) flag */
+ SPIx->SR = (uint16_t)~SPI_I2S_FLAG;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified SPI/I2S interrupt has occurred or not.
+ * @param SPIx: where x can be 1 or 2 in SPI mode or 1 in I2S mode to select
+ * the SPI peripheral.
+ * @param SPI_I2S_IT: specifies the SPI interrupt source to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_TXE: Transmit buffer empty interrupt.
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_RXNE: Receive buffer not empty interrupt.
+ * @arg SPI_IT_MODF: Mode Fault interrupt.
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_OVR: Overrun interrupt.
+ * @arg I2S_IT_UDR: Underrun interrupt.
+ * @arg SPI_I2S_IT_FRE: Format Error interrupt.
+ * @retval The new state of SPI_I2S_IT (SET or RESET).
+ */
+ITStatus SPI_I2S_GetITStatus(SPI_TypeDef* SPIx, uint8_t SPI_I2S_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ uint16_t itpos = 0, itmask = 0, enablestatus = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_ALL_PERIPH(SPIx));
+ assert_param(IS_SPI_I2S_GET_IT(SPI_I2S_IT));
+
+ /* Get the SPI_I2S_IT index */
+ itpos = 0x01 << (SPI_I2S_IT & 0x0F);
+
+ /* Get the SPI_I2S_IT IT mask */
+ itmask = SPI_I2S_IT >> 4;
+
+ /* Set the IT mask */
+ itmask = 0x01 << itmask;
+
+ /* Get the SPI_I2S_IT enable bit status */
+ enablestatus = (SPIx->CR2 & itmask) ;
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified SPI interrupt */
+ if (((SPIx->SR & itpos) != (uint16_t)RESET) && enablestatus)
+ {
+ /* SPI_I2S_IT is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* SPI_I2S_IT is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the SPI_I2S_IT status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_syscfg.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_syscfg.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_syscfg.c
@@ -0,0 +1,420 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_syscfg.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the SYSCFG peripheral:
+ * + Remapping the memory mapped at 0x00000000
+ * + Remapping the DMA channels
+ * + Enabling I2C fast mode plus driving capability for I2C pins
+ * + Configuring the EXTI lines connection to the GPIO port
+ * + Configuring the CFGR2 features (Connecting some internal signal
+ * to the break input of TIM1)
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ The SYSCFG registers can be accessed only when the SYSCFG
+ interface APB clock is enabled.
+ To enable SYSCFG APB clock use:
+ RCC_APBPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBPeriph_SYSCFG, ENABLE).
+ * @endverbatim
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_syscfg.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup SYSCFG
+ * @brief SYSCFG driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup SYSCFG_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup SYSCFG_Group1 SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration functions
+ * @brief SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### SYSCFG Initialization and Configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the SYSCFG registers to their default reset values.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ * @note MEM_MODE bits are not affected by APB reset.
+ * @note MEM_MODE bits took the value from the user option bytes.
+ * @note CFGR2 register is not affected by APB reset.
+ * @note CLABBB configuration bits are locked when set.
+ * @note To unlock the configuration, perform a system reset.
+ */
+void SYSCFG_DeInit(void)
+{
+ /* Set SYSCFG_CFGR1 register to reset value without affecting MEM_MODE bits */
+ SYSCFG->CFGR1 &= SYSCFG_CFGR1_MEM_MODE;
+ /* Set EXTICRx registers to reset value */
+ SYSCFG->EXTICR[0] = 0;
+ SYSCFG->EXTICR[1] = 0;
+ SYSCFG->EXTICR[2] = 0;
+ SYSCFG->EXTICR[3] = 0;
+ /* Set CFGR2 register to reset value: clear SRAM parity error flag */
+ SYSCFG->CFGR2 |= (uint32_t) SYSCFG_CFGR2_SRAM_PE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the memory mapping at address 0x00000000.
+ * @param SYSCFG_MemoryRemap: selects the memory remapping.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_Flash: Main Flash memory mapped at 0x00000000
+ * @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SystemMemory: System Flash memory mapped at 0x00000000
+ * @arg SYSCFG_MemoryRemap_SRAM: Embedded SRAM mapped at 0x00000000
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SYSCFG_MemoryRemapConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_MemoryRemap)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpctrl = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameter */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_MEMORY_REMAP(SYSCFG_MemoryRemap));
+
+ /* Get CFGR1 register value */
+ tmpctrl = SYSCFG->CFGR1;
+
+ /* Clear MEM_MODE bits */
+ tmpctrl &= (uint32_t) (~SYSCFG_CFGR1_MEM_MODE);
+
+ /* Set the new MEM_MODE bits value */
+ tmpctrl |= (uint32_t) SYSCFG_MemoryRemap;
+
+ /* Set CFGR1 register with the new memory remap configuration */
+ SYSCFG->CFGR1 = tmpctrl;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the DMA channels remapping.
+ * @param SYSCFG_DMARemap: selects the DMA channels remap.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM17: Remap TIM17 DMA requests from channel1 to channel2
+ * @arg SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM16: Remap TIM16 DMA requests from channel3 to channel4
+ * @arg SYSCFG_DMARemap_USART1Rx: Remap USART1 Rx DMA requests from channel3 to channel5
+ * @arg SYSCFG_DMARemap_USART1Tx: Remap USART1 Tx DMA requests from channel2 to channel4
+ * @arg SYSCFG_DMARemap_ADC1: Remap ADC1 DMA requests from channel1 to channel2
+ * @param NewState: new state of the DMA channel remapping.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note When enabled, DMA channel of the selected peripheral is remapped
+ * @note When disabled, Default DMA channel is mapped to the selected peripheral
+ * @note By default TIM17 DMA requests is mapped to channel 1,
+ * use SYSCFG_DMAChannelRemapConfig(SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM17, Enable) to remap
+ * TIM17 DMA requests to channel 2 and use
+ * SYSCFG_DMAChannelRemapConfig(SYSCFG_DMARemap_TIM17, Disable) to map
+ * TIM17 DMA requests to channel 1 (default mapping)
+ * @note This function is only used for STM32F030, STM32F031, STM32F042, STM32F072 and STM32F051 devices.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SYSCFG_DMAChannelRemapConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_DMARemap, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_DMA_REMAP(SYSCFG_DMARemap));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Remap the DMA channel */
+ SYSCFG->CFGR1 |= (uint32_t)SYSCFG_DMARemap;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* use the default DMA channel mapping */
+ SYSCFG->CFGR1 &= (uint32_t)(~SYSCFG_DMARemap);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the I2C fast mode plus driving capability.
+ * @param SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus: selects the pin.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB6: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for PB6
+ * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB7: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for PB7
+ * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB8: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for PB8
+ * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PB9: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for PB9
+ * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PA9: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for PA9 (only for STM32F031 and STM32F030 devices)
+ * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_PA10: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for PA10 (only for STM32F031 and STM32F030 devices)
+ * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C1: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for PB10, PB11, PF6 and PF7(only for STM32F031 and STM32F030 devices)
+ * @arg SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C2: Configure fast mode plus driving capability for I2C2 pins, available only for STM32F072 devices
+ *
+ * @param NewState: new state of the DMA channel remapping.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note ENABLE: Enable fast mode plus driving capability for selected I2C pin
+ * @note DISABLE: Disable fast mode plus driving capability for selected I2C pin
+ * @note For I2C1, fast mode plus driving capability can be enabled on all selected
+ * I2C1 pins using SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C1 parameter or independently
+ * on each one of the following pins PB6, PB7, PB8 and PB9.
+ * @note For remaining I2C1 pins (PA14, PA15...) fast mode plus driving capability
+ * can be enabled only by using SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C1 parameter.
+ * @note For all I2C2 pins fast mode plus driving capability can be enabled
+ * only by using SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus_I2C2 parameter.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlusConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_I2C_FMP(SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable fast mode plus driving capability for selected pin */
+ SYSCFG->CFGR1 |= (uint32_t)SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable fast mode plus driving capability for selected pin */
+ SYSCFG->CFGR1 &= (uint32_t)(~SYSCFG_I2CFastModePlus);
+ }
+}
+
+/** @brief select the modulation envelope source
+ * @param SYSCFG_IRDAEnv: select the envelope source.
+ * This parameter can be a value
+ * @arg SYSCFG_IRDA_ENV_SEL_TIM16
+ * @arg SYSCFG_IRDA_ENV_SEL_USART1
+ * @arg SYSCFG_IRDA_ENV_SEL_USART4
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SYSCFG_IRDAEnvSelection(uint32_t SYSCFG_IRDAEnv)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_IRDA_ENV(SYSCFG_IRDAEnv));
+
+ SYSCFG->CFGR1 &= ~(SYSCFG_CFGR1_IRDA_ENV_SEL);
+ SYSCFG->CFGR1 |= (SYSCFG_IRDAEnv);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the GPIO pin used as EXTI Line.
+ * @param EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx: selects the GPIO port to be used as source
+ * for EXTI lines where x can be (A, B, C, D, E or F).
+ * @note GPIOE is available only for STM32F072.
+ * @note GPIOD is not available for STM32F031.
+ * @param EXTI_PinSourcex: specifies the EXTI line to be configured.
+ * @note This parameter can be EXTI_PinSourcex where x can be:
+ * For STM32F051 and STM32F030: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, (2) for GPIOD and (0..1, 4..7) for GIIOF.
+ * For STM32F072: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, GPIOC, GPIOD, GPIOE, (0..10) for GPIOF.
+ * For STM32F031: (0..15) for GPIOA, GPIOB, (13..15) for GPIOC and (0..1, 6..7) for GPIOF.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SYSCFG_EXTILineConfig(uint8_t EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx, uint8_t EXTI_PinSourcex)
+{
+ uint32_t tmp = 0x00;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_PORT_SOURCE(EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx));
+ assert_param(IS_EXTI_PIN_SOURCE(EXTI_PinSourcex));
+
+ tmp = ((uint32_t)0x0F) << (0x04 * (EXTI_PinSourcex & (uint8_t)0x03));
+ SYSCFG->EXTICR[EXTI_PinSourcex >> 0x02] &= ~tmp;
+ SYSCFG->EXTICR[EXTI_PinSourcex >> 0x02] |= (((uint32_t)EXTI_PortSourceGPIOx) << (0x04 * (EXTI_PinSourcex & (uint8_t)0x03)));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief check ISR wrapper: Allow to determine interrupt source per line .
+ * @param IT_Source: specifies the interrupt source to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg ITLINE_EWDG EWDG has expired
+ * @arg ITLINE_PVDOUT Power voltage detection Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_VDDIO2 VDDIO2 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_RTC_WAKEUP RTC WAKEUP -> exti[20] Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_RTC_TSTAMP RTC Time Stamp -> exti[19] interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_RTC_ALRA RTC Alarm -> exti[17] interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_FLASH_ITF Flash ITF Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_CRS CRS Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_CLK_CTRL CLK Control Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI0 External Interrupt 0
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI1 External Interrupt 1
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI2 External Interrupt 2
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI3 External Interrupt 3
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI4 External Interrupt 4
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI5 External Interrupt 5
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI6 External Interrupt 6
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI7 External Interrupt 7
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI8 External Interrupt 8
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI9 External Interrupt 9
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI10 External Interrupt 10
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI11 External Interrupt 11
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI12 External Interrupt 12
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI13 External Interrupt 13
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI14 External Interrupt 14
+ * @arg ITLINE_EXTI15 External Interrupt 15
+ * @arg ITLINE_TSC_EOA Touch control EOA Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TSC_MCE Touch control MCE Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA1_CH1 DMA1 Channel 1 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA1_CH2 DMA1 Channel 2 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA1_CH3 DMA1 Channel 3 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA2_CH1 DMA2 Channel 1 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA2_CH2 DMA2 Channel 2 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA1_CH4 DMA1 Channel 4 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA1_CH5 DMA1 Channel 5 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA1_CH6 DMA1 Channel 6 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA1_CH7 DMA1 Channel 7 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA2_CH3 DMA2 Channel 3 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA2_CH4 DMA2 Channel 4 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DMA2_CH5 DMA2 Channel 5 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_ADC ADC Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_COMP1 COMP1 Interrupt -> exti[21]
+ * @arg ITLINE_COMP2 COMP2 Interrupt -> exti[21]
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM1_BRK TIM1 BRK Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM1_UPD TIM1 UPD Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM1_TRG TIM1 TRG Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM1_CCU TIM1 CCU Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM1_CC TIM1 CC Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM2 TIM2 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM3 TIM3 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_DAC DAC Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM6 TIM6 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM7 TIM7 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM14 TIM14 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM15 TIM15 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM16 TIM16 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_TIM17 TIM17 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_I2C1 I2C1 Interrupt -> exti[23]
+ * @arg ITLINE_I2C2 I2C2 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_SPI1 I2C1 Interrupt -> exti[23]
+ * @arg ITLINE_SPI2 SPI1 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_USART1 USART1 GLB Interrupt -> exti[25]
+ * @arg ITLINE_USART2 USART2 GLB Interrupt -> exti[26]
+ * @arg ITLINE_USART3 USART3 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_USART4 USART4 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_USART5 USART5 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_USART6 USART6 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_USART7 USART7 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_USART8 USART8 Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_CAN CAN Interrupt
+ * @arg ITLINE_CEC CEC Interrupt
+ * @retval The new state of IT_LINE_SR.
+ */
+uint32_t SYSCFG_GetPendingIT(uint32_t ITSourceLine)
+{
+ assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_ITLINE(ITSourceLine));
+ return(SYSCFG->IT_LINE_SR[(ITSourceLine >> 0x18)] & (ITSourceLine & 0x00FFFFFF));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Connect the selected parameter to the break input of TIM1.
+ * @note The selected configuration is locked and can be unlocked by system reset
+ * @param SYSCFG_Break: selects the configuration to be connected to break
+ * input of TIM1
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg SYSCFG_Break_PVD: Connects the PVD event to the Break Input of TIM1,, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg SYSCFG_Break_SRAMParity: Connects the SRAM_PARITY error signal to the Break Input of TIM1 .
+ * @arg SYSCFG_Break_Lockup: Connects Lockup output of CortexM0 to the break input of TIM1.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SYSCFG_BreakConfig(uint32_t SYSCFG_Break)
+{
+ /* Check the parameter */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_LOCK_CONFIG(SYSCFG_Break));
+
+ SYSCFG->CFGR2 |= (uint32_t) SYSCFG_Break;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified SYSCFG flag is set or not.
+ * @param SYSCFG_Flag: specifies the SYSCFG flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg SYSCFG_FLAG_PE: SRAM parity error flag.
+ * @retval The new state of SYSCFG_Flag (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus SYSCFG_GetFlagStatus(uint32_t SYSCFG_Flag)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameter */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_FLAG(SYSCFG_Flag));
+
+ /* Check the status of the specified SPI flag */
+ if ((SYSCFG->CFGR2 & SYSCFG_CFGR2_SRAM_PE) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ /* SYSCFG_Flag is set */
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* SYSCFG_Flag is reset */
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ /* Return the SYSCFG_Flag status */
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clear the selected SYSCFG flag.
+ * @param SYSCFG_Flag: selects the flag to be cleared.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg SYSCFG_FLAG_PE: SRAM parity error flag.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void SYSCFG_ClearFlag(uint32_t SYSCFG_Flag)
+{
+ /* Check the parameter */
+ assert_param(IS_SYSCFG_FLAG(SYSCFG_Flag));
+
+ SYSCFG->CFGR2 |= (uint32_t) SYSCFG_Flag;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_tim.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_tim.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_tim.c
@@ -0,0 +1,3349 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_tim.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the TIM peripheral:
+ * + TimeBase management
+ * + Output Compare management
+ * + Input Capture management
+ * + Interrupts, DMA and flags management
+ * + Clocks management
+ * + Synchronization management
+ * + Specific interface management
+ * + Specific remapping management
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This driver provides functions to configure and program the TIM
+ of all STM32F0xx devices These functions are split in 8 groups:
+ (#) TIM TimeBase management: this group includes all needed functions
+ to configure the TM Timebase unit:
+ (++) Set/Get Prescaler.
+ (++) Set/Get Autoreload.
+ (++) Counter modes configuration.
+ (++) Set Clock division.
+ (++) Select the One Pulse mode.
+ (++) Update Request Configuration.
+ (++) Update Disable Configuration.
+ (++) Auto-Preload Configuration.
+ (++) Enable/Disable the counter.
+
+ (#) TIM Output Compare management: this group includes all needed
+ functions to configure the Capture/Compare unit used in Output
+ compare mode:
+ (++) Configure each channel, independently, in Output Compare mode.
+ (++) Select the output compare modes.
+ (++) Select the Polarities of each channel.
+ (++) Set/Get the Capture/Compare register values.
+ (++) Select the Output Compare Fast mode.
+ (++) Select the Output Compare Forced mode.
+ (++) Output Compare-Preload Configuration.
+ (++) Clear Output Compare Reference.
+ (++) Select the OCREF Clear signal.
+ (++) Enable/Disable the Capture/Compare Channels.
+
+ (#) TIM Input Capture management: this group includes all needed
+ functions to configure the Capture/Compare unit used in
+ Input Capture mode:
+ (++) Configure each channel in input capture mode.
+ (++) Configure Channel1/2 in PWM Input mode.
+ (++) Set the Input Capture Prescaler.
+ (++) Get the Capture/Compare values.
+
+ (#) Advanced-control timers (TIM1) specific features
+ (++) Configures the Break input, dead time, Lock level, the OSSI,
+ the OSSR State and the AOE(automatic output enable)
+ (++) Enable/Disable the TIM peripheral Main Outputs
+ (++) Select the Commutation event
+ (++) Set/Reset the Capture Compare Preload Control bit
+
+ (#) TIM interrupts, DMA and flags management.
+ (++) Enable/Disable interrupt sources.
+ (++) Get flags status.
+ (++) Clear flags/ Pending bits.
+ (++) Enable/Disable DMA requests.
+ (++) Configure DMA burst mode.
+ (++) Select CaptureCompare DMA request.
+
+ (#) TIM clocks management: this group includes all needed functions
+ to configure the clock controller unit:
+ (++) Select internal/External clock.
+ (++) Select the external clock mode: ETR(Mode1/Mode2), TIx or ITRx.
+
+ (#) TIM synchronization management: this group includes all needed.
+ functions to configure the Synchronization unit:
+ (++) Select Input Trigger.
+ (++) Select Output Trigger.
+ (++) Select Master Slave Mode.
+ (++) ETR Configuration when used as external trigger.
+
+ (#) TIM specific interface management, this group includes all
+ needed functions to use the specific TIM interface:
+ (++) Encoder Interface Configuration.
+ (++) Select Hall Sensor.
+
+ (#) TIM specific remapping management includes the Remapping
+ configuration of specific timers
+
+@endverbatim
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_tim.h"
+#include "stm32f0xx_rcc.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM
+ * @brief TIM driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* ---------------------- TIM registers bit mask ------------------------ */
+#define SMCR_ETR_MASK ((uint16_t)0x00FF)
+#define CCMR_OFFSET ((uint16_t)0x0018)
+#define CCER_CCE_SET ((uint16_t)0x0001)
+#define CCER_CCNE_SET ((uint16_t)0x0004)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+
+static void TI1_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint16_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint16_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TI2_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint16_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint16_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TI3_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint16_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint16_t TIM_ICFilter);
+static void TI4_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint16_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint16_t TIM_ICFilter);
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Group1 TimeBase management functions
+ * @brief TimeBase management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### TimeBase management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ *** TIM Driver: how to use it in Timing(Time base) Mode ***
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] To use the Timer in Timing(Time base) mode, the following steps are
+ mandatory:
+ (#) Enable TIM clock using
+ RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx, ENABLE) function.
+ (#) Fill the TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct with the desired parameters.
+ (#) Call TIM_TimeBaseInit(TIMx, &TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct) to configure
+ the Time Base unit with the corresponding configuration.
+ (#) Enable the NVIC if you need to generate the update interrupt.
+ (#) Enable the corresponding interrupt using the function
+ TIM_ITConfig(TIMx, TIM_IT_Update).
+ (#) Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
+ [..]
+ (@) All other functions can be used seperatly to modify, if needed,
+ a specific feature of the Timer.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the TIMx peripheral registers to their default reset values.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @retval None
+ *
+ */
+void TIM_DeInit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ if (TIMx == TIM1)
+ {
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM1, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (TIMx == TIM2)
+ {
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM2, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (TIMx == TIM3)
+ {
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM3, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (TIMx == TIM6)
+ {
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM6, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (TIMx == TIM7)
+ {
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM7, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (TIMx == TIM14)
+ {
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM14, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_TIM14, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (TIMx == TIM15)
+ {
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM15, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM15, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (TIMx == TIM16)
+ {
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM16, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM16, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (TIMx == TIM17)
+ {
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM17, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_TIM17, DISABLE);
+ }
+ }
+
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIMx Time Base Unit peripheral according to
+ * the specified parameters in the TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef
+ * structure that contains the configuration information for
+ * the specified TIM peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_TimeBaseInit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef* TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpcr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_CounterMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CKD_DIV(TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_ClockDivision));
+
+ tmpcr1 = TIMx->CR1;
+
+ if((TIMx == TIM1) || (TIMx == TIM2) || (TIMx == TIM3))
+ {
+ /* Select the Counter Mode */
+ tmpcr1 &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)(TIM_CR1_DIR | TIM_CR1_CMS)));
+ tmpcr1 |= (uint32_t)TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_CounterMode;
+ }
+
+ if(TIMx != TIM6)
+ {
+ /* Set the clock division */
+ tmpcr1 &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CR1_CKD));
+ tmpcr1 |= (uint32_t)TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_ClockDivision;
+ }
+
+ TIMx->CR1 = tmpcr1;
+
+ /* Set the Autoreload value */
+ TIMx->ARR = TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Period ;
+
+ /* Set the Prescaler value */
+ TIMx->PSC = TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Prescaler;
+
+ if ((TIMx == TIM1) || (TIMx == TIM15)|| (TIMx == TIM16) || (TIMx == TIM17))
+ {
+ /* Set the Repetition Counter value */
+ TIMx->RCR = TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_RepetitionCounter;
+ }
+
+ /* Generate an update event to reload the Prescaler and the Repetition counter
+ values immediately */
+ TIMx->EGR = TIM_PSCReloadMode_Immediate;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef structure
+ * which will be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_TimeBaseStructInit(TIM_TimeBaseInitTypeDef* TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Set the default configuration */
+ TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Period = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+ TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_Prescaler = 0x0000;
+ TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_ClockDivision = TIM_CKD_DIV1;
+ TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_CounterMode = TIM_CounterMode_Up;
+ TIM_TimeBaseInitStruct->TIM_RepetitionCounter = 0x0000;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Prescaler.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param Prescaler: specifies the Prescaler Register value
+ * @param TIM_PSCReloadMode: specifies the TIM Prescaler Reload mode
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_PSCReloadMode_Update: The Prescaler is loaded at the update event.
+ * @arg TIM_PSCReloadMode_Immediate: The Prescaler is loaded immediatly.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_PrescalerConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t Prescaler, uint16_t TIM_PSCReloadMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_PRESCALER_RELOAD(TIM_PSCReloadMode));
+
+ /* Set the Prescaler value */
+ TIMx->PSC = Prescaler;
+ /* Set or reset the UG Bit */
+ TIMx->EGR = TIM_PSCReloadMode;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Specifies the TIMx Counter Mode to be used.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_CounterMode: specifies the Counter Mode to be used
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_CounterMode_Up: TIM Up Counting Mode
+ * @arg TIM_CounterMode_Down: TIM Down Counting Mode
+ * @arg TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned1: TIM Center Aligned Mode1
+ * @arg TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned2: TIM Center Aligned Mode2
+ * @arg TIM_CounterMode_CenterAligned3: TIM Center Aligned Mode3
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_CounterModeConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_CounterMode)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpcr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COUNTER_MODE(TIM_CounterMode));
+
+ tmpcr1 = TIMx->CR1;
+ /* Reset the CMS and DIR Bits */
+ tmpcr1 &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)(TIM_CR1_DIR | TIM_CR1_CMS)));
+ /* Set the Counter Mode */
+ tmpcr1 |= TIM_CounterMode;
+ /* Write to TIMx CR1 register */
+ TIMx->CR1 = tmpcr1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the TIMx Counter Register value
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param Counter: specifies the Counter register new value.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SetCounter(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint32_t Counter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Counter Register value */
+ TIMx->CNT = Counter;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the TIMx Autoreload Register value
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param Autoreload: specifies the Autoreload register new value.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SetAutoreload(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint32_t Autoreload)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Autoreload Register value */
+ TIMx->ARR = Autoreload;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets the TIMx Counter value.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @retval Counter Register value.
+ */
+uint32_t TIM_GetCounter(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Counter Register value */
+ return TIMx->CNT;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets the TIMx Prescaler value.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @retval Prescaler Register value.
+ */
+uint16_t TIM_GetPrescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Prescaler Register value */
+ return TIMx->PSC;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or Disables the TIMx Update event.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the TIMx UDIS bit
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_UpdateDisableConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the Update Disable Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= TIM_CR1_UDIS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the Update Disable Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CR1_UDIS);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Update Request Interrupt source.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_UpdateSource: specifies the Update source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_UpdateSource_Regular: Source of update is the counter
+ * overflow/underflow or the setting of UG bit, or an update
+ * generation through the slave mode controller.
+ * @arg TIM_UpdateSource_Global: Source of update is counter overflow/underflow.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_UpdateRequestConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_UpdateSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_UPDATE_SOURCE(TIM_UpdateSource));
+
+ if (TIM_UpdateSource != TIM_UpdateSource_Global)
+ {
+ /* Set the URS Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= TIM_CR1_URS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the URS Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CR1_URS);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables TIMx peripheral Preload register on ARR.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload register
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ARRPreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the ARR Preload Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= TIM_CR1_ARPE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the ARR Preload Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CR1_ARPE);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the TIMx's One Pulse Mode.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OPMode: specifies the OPM Mode to be used.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OPMode_Single
+ * @arg TIM_OPMode_Repetitive
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SelectOnePulseMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OPMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OPM_MODE(TIM_OPMode));
+
+ /* Reset the OPM Bit */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CR1_OPM);
+ /* Configure the OPM Mode */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= TIM_OPMode;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the TIMx Clock Division value.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_CKD: specifies the clock division value.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following value:
+ * @arg TIM_CKD_DIV1: TDTS = Tck_tim
+ * @arg TIM_CKD_DIV2: TDTS = 2*Tck_tim
+ * @arg TIM_CKD_DIV4: TDTS = 4*Tck_tim
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SetClockDivision(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_CKD)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CKD_DIV(TIM_CKD));
+
+ /* Reset the CKD Bits */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CR1_CKD);
+ /* Set the CKD value */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= TIM_CKD;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified TIM peripheral.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 and 17to select the TIMx
+ * peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the TIMx peripheral.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_Cmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Counter */
+ TIMx->CR1 |= TIM_CR1_CEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Counter */
+ TIMx->CR1 &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CR1_CEN));
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Group2 Advanced-control timers (TIM1) specific features
+ * @brief Advanced-control timers (TIM1) specific features
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Advanced-control timers (TIM1) specific features #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ ===================================================================
+ *** TIM Driver: how to use the Break feature ***
+ ===================================================================
+ [..] After configuring the Timer channel(s) in the appropriate Output Compare mode:
+
+ (#) Fill the TIM_BDTRInitStruct with the desired parameters for the Timer
+ Break Polarity, dead time, Lock level, the OSSI/OSSR State and the
+ AOE(automatic output enable).
+
+ (#) Call TIM_BDTRConfig(TIMx, &TIM_BDTRInitStruct) to configure the Timer
+
+ (#) Enable the Main Output using TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs(TIM1, ENABLE)
+
+ (#) Once the break even occurs, the Timer's output signals are put in reset
+ state or in a known state (according to the configuration made in
+ TIM_BDTRConfig() function).
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the: Break feature, dead time, Lock level, OSSI/OSSR State
+ * and the AOE(automatic output enable).
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM
+ * @param TIM_BDTRInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef structure that
+ * contains the BDTR Register configuration information for the TIM peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_BDTRConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef *TIM_BDTRInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST2_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OSSR_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSRState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OSSI_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSIState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LOCK_LEVEL(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_LOCKLevel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_BREAK_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_Break));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_BREAK_POLARITY(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_BreakPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_AUTOMATIC_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_AutomaticOutput));
+ /* Set the Lock level, the Break enable Bit and the Ploarity, the OSSR State,
+ the OSSI State, the dead time value and the Automatic Output Enable Bit */
+ TIMx->BDTR = (uint32_t)TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSRState | TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSIState |
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_LOCKLevel | TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_DeadTime |
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_Break | TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_BreakPolarity |
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_AutomaticOutput;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each TIM_BDTRInitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param TIM_BDTRInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef structure which
+ * will be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_BDTRStructInit(TIM_BDTRInitTypeDef* TIM_BDTRInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Set the default configuration */
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSRState = TIM_OSSRState_Disable;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_OSSIState = TIM_OSSIState_Disable;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_LOCKLevel = TIM_LOCKLevel_OFF;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_DeadTime = 0x00;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_Break = TIM_Break_Disable;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_BreakPolarity = TIM_BreakPolarity_Low;
+ TIM_BDTRInitStruct->TIM_AutomaticOutput = TIM_AutomaticOutput_Disable;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the TIM peripheral Main Outputs.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIMx peripheral.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the TIM peripheral Main Outputs.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_CtrlPWMOutputs(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST2_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the TIM Main Output */
+ TIMx->BDTR |= TIM_BDTR_MOE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the TIM Main Output */
+ TIMx->BDTR &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_BDTR_MOE));
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Group3 Output Compare management functions
+ * @brief Output Compare management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Output Compare management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ *** TIM Driver: how to use it in Output Compare Mode ***
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] To use the Timer in Output Compare mode, the following steps are mandatory:
+ (#) Enable TIM clock using
+ RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx, ENABLE) function.
+ (#) Configure the TIM pins by configuring the corresponding GPIO pins
+ (#) Configure the Time base unit as described in the first part of this
+ driver, if needed, else the Timer will run with the default
+ configuration:
+ (++) Autoreload value = 0xFFFF.
+ (++) Prescaler value = 0x0000.
+ (++) Counter mode = Up counting.
+ (++) Clock Division = TIM_CKD_DIV1.
+ (#) Fill the TIM_OCInitStruct with the desired parameters including:
+ (++) The TIM Output Compare mode: TIM_OCMode.
+ (++) TIM Output State: TIM_OutputState.
+ (++) TIM Pulse value: TIM_Pulse.
+ (++) TIM Output Compare Polarity : TIM_OCPolarity.
+ (#) Call TIM_OCxInit(TIMx, &TIM_OCInitStruct) to configure the desired
+ channel with the corresponding configuration.
+ (#) Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
+ [..]
+ (@) All other functions can be used separately to modify, if needed,
+ a specific feature of the Timer.
+ (@) In case of PWM mode, this function is mandatory:
+ TIM_OCxPreloadConfig(TIMx, TIM_OCPreload_ENABLE).
+ (@) If the corresponding interrupt or DMA request are needed, the user should:
+ (#@) Enable the NVIC (or the DMA) to use the TIM interrupts (or DMA requests).
+ (#@) Enable the corresponding interrupt (or DMA request) using the function
+ TIM_ITConfig(TIMx, TIM_IT_CCx) (or TIM_DMA_Cmd(TIMx, TIM_DMA_CCx)).
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIMx Channel1 according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure
+ * that contains the configuration information for the specified TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC1Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity));
+ /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (uint16_t)(~(uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC1E);
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare Mode Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC1M));
+ tmpccmrx &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_CC1S));
+
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC1P));
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity;
+
+ /* Set the Output State */
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState;
+
+ if((TIMx == TIM1) || (TIMx == TIM15) || (TIMx == TIM16) || (TIMx == TIM17))
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUTN_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState));
+
+ /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC1NP));
+ /* Set the Output N Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity;
+
+ /* Reset the Output N State */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC1NE));
+ /* Set the Output N State */
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState;
+
+ /* Reset the Ouput Compare and Output Compare N IDLE State */
+ tmpcr2 &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_OIS1));
+ tmpcr2 &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_OIS1N));
+
+ /* Set the Output Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState;
+ /* Set the Output N Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState;
+ }
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR1 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIMx Channel2 according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure
+ * that contains the configuration information for the specified TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC2Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity));
+ /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC2E));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR1;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare mode and Capture/Compare selection Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC2M));
+ tmpccmrx &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_CC2S));
+
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode << 8);
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC2P));
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity << 4);
+
+ /* Set the Output State */
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState << 4);
+
+ if((TIMx == TIM1) || (TIMx == TIM15))
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState));
+
+ /* Reset the Ouput Compare State */
+ tmpcr2 &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_OIS2));
+
+ /* Set the Output Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState << 2);
+
+ if (TIMx == TIM1)
+ {
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUTN_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState));
+
+ /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC2NP));
+ /* Set the Output N Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity << 4);
+
+ /* Reset the Output N State */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC2NE));
+ /* Set the Output N State */
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState << 4);
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare N IDLE State */
+ tmpcr2 &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_OIS2N));
+
+ /* Set the Output N Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState << 2);
+ }
+ }
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR2 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIMx Channel3 according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure
+ * that contains the configuration information for the specified TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC3Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity));
+ /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC3E));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare mode and Capture/Compare selection Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_OC3M));
+ tmpccmrx &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_CC3S));
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC3P));
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity << 8);
+
+ /* Set the Output State */
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState << 8);
+
+ if(TIMx == TIM1)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUTN_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCNIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState));
+
+ /* Reset the Output N Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC3NP));
+ /* Set the Output N Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity << 8);
+ /* Reset the Output N State */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC3NE));
+
+ /* Set the Output N State */
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState << 8);
+ /* Reset the Ouput Compare and Output Compare N IDLE State */
+ tmpcr2 &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_OIS3));
+ tmpcr2 &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_OIS3N));
+ /* Set the Output Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState << 4);
+ /* Set the Output N Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState << 4);
+ }
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR3 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIMx Channel4 according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_OCInitStruct.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure
+ * that contains the configuration information for the specified TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC4Init(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmrx = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmpcr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_MODE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OUTPUT_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity));
+ /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC4E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC4E));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Get the TIMx CR2 register value */
+ tmpcr2 = TIMx->CR2;
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+ tmpccmrx = TIMx->CCMR2;
+
+ /* Reset the Output Compare mode and Capture/Compare selection Bits */
+ tmpccmrx &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_OC4M));
+ tmpccmrx &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_CC4S));
+
+ /* Select the Output Compare Mode */
+ tmpccmrx |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode << 8);
+
+ /* Reset the Output Polarity level */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC4P));
+ /* Set the Output Compare Polarity */
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity << 12);
+
+ /* Set the Output State */
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState << 12);
+
+ if(TIMx == TIM1)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCIDLE_STATE(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState));
+ /* Reset the Ouput Compare IDLE State */
+ tmpcr2 &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_OIS4));
+ /* Set the Output Idle state */
+ tmpcr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState << 6);
+ }
+ /* Write to TIMx CR2 */
+ TIMx->CR2 = tmpcr2;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmrx;
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR4 = TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse;
+
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each TIM_OCInitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param TIM_OCInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_OCInitTypeDef structure which will
+ * be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OCStructInit(TIM_OCInitTypeDef* TIM_OCInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Set the default configuration */
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCMode = TIM_OCMode_Timing;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputState = TIM_OutputState_Disable;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OutputNState = TIM_OutputNState_Disable;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_Pulse = 0x0000000;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCPolarity = TIM_OCPolarity_High;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNPolarity = TIM_OCPolarity_High;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCIdleState = TIM_OCIdleState_Reset;
+ TIM_OCInitStruct->TIM_OCNIdleState = TIM_OCNIdleState_Reset;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the TIM Output Compare Mode.
+ * @note This function disables the selected channel before changing the Output
+ * Compare Mode.
+ * User has to enable this channel using TIM_CCxCmd and TIM_CCxNCmd functions.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_Channel: specifies the TIM Channel
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_Channel_1: TIM Channel 1
+ * @arg TIM_Channel_2: TIM Channel 2
+ * @arg TIM_Channel_3: TIM Channel 3
+ * @arg TIM_Channel_4: TIM Channel 4
+ * @param TIM_OCMode: specifies the TIM Output Compare Mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCMode_Timing
+ * @arg TIM_OCMode_Active
+ * @arg TIM_OCMode_Toggle
+ * @arg TIM_OCMode_PWM1
+ * @arg TIM_OCMode_PWM2
+ * @arg TIM_ForcedAction_Active
+ * @arg TIM_ForcedAction_InActive
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SelectOCxM(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_Channel, uint16_t TIM_OCMode)
+{
+ uint32_t tmp = 0;
+ uint16_t tmp1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCM(TIM_OCMode));
+
+ tmp = (uint32_t) TIMx;
+ tmp += CCMR_OFFSET;
+
+ tmp1 = CCER_CCE_SET << (uint16_t)TIM_Channel;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel: Reset the CCxE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (uint16_t) ~tmp1;
+
+ if((TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_1) ||(TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_3))
+ {
+ tmp += (TIM_Channel>>1);
+
+ /* Reset the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC1M);
+
+ /* Configure the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp |= TIM_OCMode;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ tmp += (uint16_t)(TIM_Channel - (uint16_t)4)>> (uint16_t)1;
+
+ /* Reset the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC2M);
+
+ /* Configure the OCxM bits in the CCMRx register */
+ *(__IO uint32_t *) tmp |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCMode << 8);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the TIMx Capture Compare1 Register value
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param Compare1: specifies the Capture Compare1 register new value.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SetCompare1(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint32_t Compare1)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare1 Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR1 = Compare1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the TIMx Capture Compare2 Register value
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param Compare2: specifies the Capture Compare2 register new value.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SetCompare2(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint32_t Compare2)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare2 Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR2 = Compare2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the TIMx Capture Compare3 Register value
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @param Compare3: specifies the Capture Compare3 register new value.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SetCompare3(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint32_t Compare3)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare3 Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR3 = Compare3;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the TIMx Capture Compare4 Register value
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param Compare4: specifies the Capture Compare4 register new value.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SetCompare4(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint32_t Compare4)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Set the Capture Compare4 Register value */
+ TIMx->CCR4 = Compare4;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Forces the TIMx output 1 waveform to active or inactive level.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to the output waveform.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC1REF
+ * @arg TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on OC1REF.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ForcedOC1Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ForcedAction)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction));
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ /* Reset the OC1M Bits */
+ tmpccmr1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC1M);
+ /* Configure The Forced output Mode */
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_ForcedAction;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Forces the TIMx output 2 waveform to active or inactive level.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to the output waveform.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC2REF
+ * @arg TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on OC2REF.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ForcedOC2Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ForcedAction)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction));
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ /* Reset the OC2M Bits */
+ tmpccmr1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC2M);
+ /* Configure The Forced output Mode */
+ tmpccmr1 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ForcedAction << 8);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Forces the TIMx output 3 waveform to active or inactive level.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to the output waveform.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC3REF
+ * @arg TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on OC3REF.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ForcedOC3Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ForcedAction)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction));
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ /* Reset the OC1M Bits */
+ tmpccmr2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_OC3M);
+ /* Configure The Forced output Mode */
+ tmpccmr2 |= TIM_ForcedAction;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Forces the TIMx output 4 waveform to active or inactive level.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ForcedAction: specifies the forced Action to be set to the output waveform.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ForcedAction_Active: Force active level on OC4REF
+ * @arg TIM_ForcedAction_InActive: Force inactive level on OC4REF.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ForcedOC4Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ForcedAction)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr2 = 0;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_FORCED_ACTION(TIM_ForcedAction));
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ /* Reset the OC2M Bits */
+ tmpccmr2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_OC4M);
+ /* Configure The Forced output Mode */
+ tmpccmr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ForcedAction << 8);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets or Resets the TIM peripheral Capture Compare Preload Control bit.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 15 to select the TIMx peripheral
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the Capture Compare Preload Control bit
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_CCPreloadControl(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the CCPC Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 |= TIM_CR2_CCPC;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the CCPC Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_CCPC);
+ }
+}
+
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR1.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 and 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload register
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCPreload_Enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCPreload_Disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC1PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCPreload)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload));
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ /* Reset the OC1PE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC1PE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_OCPreload;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR2.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 and 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload register
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCPreload_Enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCPreload_Disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC2PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCPreload)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload));
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ /* Reset the OC2PE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC2PE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */
+ tmpccmr1 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCPreload << 8);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR3.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload register
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCPreload_Enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCPreload_Disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC3PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCPreload)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload));
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ /* Reset the OC3PE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_OC3PE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */
+ tmpccmr2 |= TIM_OCPreload;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the TIMx peripheral Preload register on CCR4.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCPreload: new state of the TIMx peripheral Preload register
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCPreload_Enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCPreload_Disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC4PreloadConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCPreload)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCPRELOAD_STATE(TIM_OCPreload));
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ /* Reset the OC4PE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_OC4PE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Preload feature */
+ tmpccmr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCPreload << 8);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Output Compare 1 Fast feature.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC1FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCFast)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ /* Reset the OC1FE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC1FE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_OCFast;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Output Compare 2 Fast feature.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC2FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCFast)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ /* Reset the OC2FE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC2FE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCFast << 8);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Output Compare 3 Fast feature.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC3FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCFast)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ /* Reset the OC3FE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_OC3FE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 |= TIM_OCFast;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Output Compare 4 Fast feature.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCFast: new state of the Output Compare Fast Enable Bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCFast_Enable: TIM output compare fast enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCFast_Disable: TIM output compare fast disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC4FastConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCFast)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCFAST_STATE(TIM_OCFast));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR2 register value */
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ /* Reset the OC4FE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_OC4FE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Fast Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCFast << 8);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears or safeguards the OCREF1 signal on an external event
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ClearOC1Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCClear)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear));
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ /* Reset the OC1CE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC1CE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_OCClear;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears or safeguards the OCREF2 signal on an external event
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ClearOC2Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCClear)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear));
+
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ /* Reset the OC2CE Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_OC2CE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */
+ tmpccmr1 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCClear << 8);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears or safeguards the OCREF3 signal on an external event
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ClearOC3Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCClear)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear));
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ /* Reset the OC3CE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_OC3CE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 |= TIM_OCClear;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears or safeguards the OCREF4 signal on an external event
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCClear: new state of the Output Compare Clear Enable Bit.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCClear_Enable: TIM Output clear enable
+ * @arg TIM_OCClear_Disable: TIM Output clear disable
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ClearOC4Ref(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCClear)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr2 = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCCLEAR_STATE(TIM_OCClear));
+
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ /* Reset the OC4CE Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_OC4CE);
+ /* Enable or Disable the Output Compare Clear Bit */
+ tmpccmr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCClear << 8);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 register */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx channel 1 polarity.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC1 Polarity
+ * This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+ * @arg TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC1PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCPolarity)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Set or Reset the CC1P Bit */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC1P);
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCPolarity;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Channel 1N polarity.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @param TIM_OCNPolarity: specifies the OC1N Polarity
+ * This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCNPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+ * @arg TIM_OCNPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC1NPolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCNPolarity)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccer = 0;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST2_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCNPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Set or Reset the CC1NP Bit */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC1NP);
+ tmpccer |= TIM_OCNPolarity;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx channel 2 polarity.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC2 Polarity
+ * This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+ * @arg TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC2PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCPolarity)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Set or Reset the CC2P Bit */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC2P);
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCPolarity << 4);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Channel 2N polarity.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @param TIM_OCNPolarity: specifies the OC2N Polarity
+ * This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCNPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+ * @arg TIM_OCNPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC2NPolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCNPolarity)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccer = 0;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST1_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCNPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Set or Reset the CC2NP Bit */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC2NP);
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCNPolarity << 4);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx channel 3 polarity.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC3 Polarity
+ * This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+ * @arg TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC3PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCPolarity)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Set or Reset the CC3P Bit */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC3P);
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCPolarity << 8);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Channel 3N polarity.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @param TIM_OCNPolarity: specifies the OC3N Polarity
+ * This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCNPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+ * @arg TIM_OCNPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC3NPolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCNPolarity)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST1_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OCN_POLARITY(TIM_OCNPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Set or Reset the CC3NP Bit */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC3NP);
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCNPolarity << 8);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx channel 4 polarity.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCPolarity: specifies the OC4 Polarity
+ * This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCPolarity_High: Output Compare active high
+ * @arg TIM_OCPolarity_Low: Output Compare active low
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_OC4PolarityConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCPolarity)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_OC_POLARITY(TIM_OCPolarity));
+
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Set or Reset the CC4P Bit */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC4P);
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_OCPolarity << 12);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER register */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the OCReference Clear source.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_OCReferenceClear: specifies the OCReference Clear source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_OCReferenceClear_ETRF: The internal OCreference clear input is connected to ETRF.
+ * @arg TIM_OCReferenceClear_OCREFCLR: The internal OCreference clear input is connected to OCREF_CLR input.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SelectOCREFClear(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_OCReferenceClear)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(TIM_OCREFERENCECECLEAR_SOURCE(TIM_OCReferenceClear));
+
+ /* Set the TIM_OCReferenceClear source */
+ TIMx->SMCR &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_SMCR_OCCS);
+ TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_OCReferenceClear;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the TIM Capture Compare Channel x.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_Channel: specifies the TIM Channel
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_Channel_1: TIM Channel 1
+ * @arg TIM_Channel_2: TIM Channel 2
+ * @arg TIM_Channel_3: TIM Channel 3
+ * @arg TIM_Channel_4: TIM Channel 4
+ * @param TIM_CCx: specifies the TIM Channel CCxE bit new state.
+ * This parameter can be: TIM_CCx_Enable or TIM_CCx_Disable.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_CCxCmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_Channel, uint16_t TIM_CCx)
+{
+ uint16_t tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCX(TIM_CCx));
+
+ tmp = CCER_CCE_SET << TIM_Channel;
+
+ /* Reset the CCxE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (uint16_t)~ tmp;
+
+ /* Set or reset the CCxE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER |= (uint16_t)(TIM_CCx << TIM_Channel);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the TIM Capture Compare Channel xN.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @param TIM_Channel: specifies the TIM Channel
+ * This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_Channel_1: TIM Channel 1
+ * @arg TIM_Channel_2: TIM Channel 2
+ * @arg TIM_Channel_3: TIM Channel 3
+ * @param TIM_CCxN: specifies the TIM Channel CCxNE bit new state.
+ * This parameter can be: TIM_CCxN_Enable or TIM_CCxN_Disable.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_CCxNCmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_Channel, uint16_t TIM_CCxN)
+{
+ uint16_t tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST2_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_COMPLEMENTARY_CHANNEL(TIM_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CCXN(TIM_CCxN));
+
+ tmp = CCER_CCNE_SET << TIM_Channel;
+
+ /* Reset the CCxNE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (uint16_t) ~tmp;
+
+ /* Set or reset the CCxNE Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER |= (uint16_t)(TIM_CCxN << TIM_Channel);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the TIM peripheral Commutation event.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIMx peripheral
+ * @param NewState: new state of the Commutation event.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SelectCOM(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST2_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the COM Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 |= TIM_CR2_CCUS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the COM Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_CCUS);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Group4 Input Capture management functions
+ * @brief Input Capture management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Input Capture management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+ *** TIM Driver: how to use it in Input Capture Mode ***
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] To use the Timer in Input Capture mode, the following steps are mandatory:
+ (#) Enable TIM clock using RCC_APBxPeriphClockCmd(RCC_APBxPeriph_TIMx, ENABLE)
+ function.
+ (#) Configure the TIM pins by configuring the corresponding GPIO pins.
+ (#) Configure the Time base unit as described in the first part of this
+ driver, if needed, else the Timer will run with the default configuration:
+ (++) Autoreload value = 0xFFFF.
+ (++) Prescaler value = 0x0000.
+ (++) Counter mode = Up counting.
+ (++) Clock Division = TIM_CKD_DIV1.
+ (#) Fill the TIM_ICInitStruct with the desired parameters including:
+ (++) TIM Channel: TIM_Channel.
+ (++) TIM Input Capture polarity: TIM_ICPolarity.
+ (++) TIM Input Capture selection: TIM_ICSelection.
+ (++) TIM Input Capture Prescaler: TIM_ICPrescaler.
+ (++) TIM Input CApture filter value: TIM_ICFilter.
+ (#) Call TIM_ICInit(TIMx, &TIM_ICInitStruct) to configure the desired
+ channel with the corresponding configuration and to measure only
+ frequency or duty cycle of the input signal,or, Call
+ TIM_PWMIConfig(TIMx, &TIM_ICInitStruct) to configure the desired
+ channels with the corresponding configuration and to measure the
+ frequency and the duty cycle of the input signal.
+ (#) Enable the NVIC or the DMA to read the measured frequency.
+ (#) Enable the corresponding interrupt (or DMA request) to read
+ the Captured value, using the function TIM_ITConfig(TIMx, TIM_IT_CCx)
+ (or TIM_DMA_Cmd(TIMx, TIM_DMA_CCx)).
+ (#) Call the TIM_Cmd(ENABLE) function to enable the TIM counter.
+ (#) Use TIM_GetCapturex(TIMx); to read the captured value.
+ [..]
+ (@) All other functions can be used separately to modify, if needed,
+ a specific feature of the Timer.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the TIM peripheral according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_ICInitStruct.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ICInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure
+ * that contains the configuration information for the specified TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ICInit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_ICInitTypeDef* TIM_ICInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CHANNEL(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_SELECTION(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity));
+
+ if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_1)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ /* TI1 Configuration */
+ TI1_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+ else if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_2)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ /* TI2 Configuration */
+ TI2_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+ else if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_3)
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ /* TI3 Configuration */
+ TI3_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC3Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ /* TI4 Configuration */
+ TI4_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC4Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each TIM_ICInitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param TIM_ICInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure which will
+ * be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ICStructInit(TIM_ICInitTypeDef* TIM_ICInitStruct)
+{
+ /* Set the default configuration */
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel = TIM_Channel_1;
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Rising;
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection = TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI;
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler = TIM_ICPSC_DIV1;
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter = 0x00;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIM peripheral according to the specified
+ * parameters in the TIM_ICInitStruct to measure an external PWM signal.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ICInitStruct: pointer to a TIM_ICInitTypeDef structure
+ * that contains the configuration information for the specified TIM
+ * peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_PWMIConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, TIM_ICInitTypeDef* TIM_ICInitStruct)
+{
+ uint16_t icoppositepolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Rising;
+ uint16_t icoppositeselection = TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ /* Select the Opposite Input Polarity */
+ if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity == TIM_ICPolarity_Rising)
+ {
+ icoppositepolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Falling;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ icoppositepolarity = TIM_ICPolarity_Rising;
+ }
+ /* Select the Opposite Input */
+ if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection == TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI)
+ {
+ icoppositeselection = TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ icoppositeselection = TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI;
+ }
+ if (TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_Channel == TIM_Channel_1)
+ {
+ /* TI1 Configuration */
+ TI1_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ /* TI2 Configuration */
+ TI2_Config(TIMx, icoppositepolarity, icoppositeselection, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* TI2 Configuration */
+ TI2_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICSelection,
+ TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ /* TI1 Configuration */
+ TI1_Config(TIMx, icoppositepolarity, icoppositeselection, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICFilter);
+ /* Set the Input Capture Prescaler value */
+ TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIMx, TIM_ICInitStruct->TIM_ICPrescaler);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets the TIMx Input Capture 1 value.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @retval Capture Compare 1 Register value.
+ */
+uint32_t TIM_GetCapture1(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Capture 1 Register value */
+ return TIMx->CCR1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets the TIMx Input Capture 2 value.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @retval Capture Compare 2 Register value.
+ */
+uint32_t TIM_GetCapture2(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Capture 2 Register value */
+ return TIMx->CCR2;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets the TIMx Input Capture 3 value.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @retval Capture Compare 3 Register value.
+ */
+uint32_t TIM_GetCapture3(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Capture 3 Register value */
+ return TIMx->CCR3;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Gets the TIMx Input Capture 4 value.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @retval Capture Compare 4 Register value.
+ */
+uint32_t TIM_GetCapture4(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+
+ /* Get the Capture 4 Register value */
+ return TIMx->CCR4;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the TIMx Input Capture 1 prescaler.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture1 prescaler new value.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SetIC1Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPSC)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC));
+
+ /* Reset the IC1PSC Bits */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_IC1PSC);
+ /* Set the IC1PSC value */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 |= TIM_ICPSC;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the TIMx Input Capture 2 prescaler.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture2 prescaler new value.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SetIC2Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPSC)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC));
+
+ /* Reset the IC2PSC Bits */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_IC2PSC);
+ /* Set the IC2PSC value */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ICPSC << 8);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the TIMx Input Capture 3 prescaler.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture3 prescaler new value.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SetIC3Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPSC)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC));
+
+ /* Reset the IC3PSC Bits */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_IC3PSC);
+ /* Set the IC3PSC value */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 |= TIM_ICPSC;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the TIMx Input Capture 4 prescaler.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ICPSC: specifies the Input Capture4 prescaler new value.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV1: no prescaler
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV2: capture is done once every 2 events
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV4: capture is done once every 4 events
+ * @arg TIM_ICPSC_DIV8: capture is done once every 8 events
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SetIC4Prescaler(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPSC)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_PRESCALER(TIM_ICPSC));
+
+ /* Reset the IC4PSC Bits */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_IC4PSC);
+ /* Set the IC4PSC value */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ICPSC << 8);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Group5 Interrupts DMA and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts, DMA and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts, DMA and flags management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified TIM interrupts.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIMx peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_IT: specifies the TIM interrupts sources to be enabled or disabled.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_IT_Update: TIM update Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_COM: TIM Commutation Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_Trigger: TIM Trigger Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_Break: TIM Break Interrupt source
+ *
+ * @note TIM6 and TIM7 can only generate an update interrupt.
+ * @note TIM15 can have only TIM_IT_Update, TIM_IT_CC1,TIM_IT_CC2 or TIM_IT_Trigger.
+ * @note TIM14, TIM16 and TIM17 can have TIM_IT_Update or TIM_IT_CC1.
+ * @note TIM_IT_Break is used only with TIM1 and TIM15.
+ * @note TIM_IT_COM is used only with TIM1, TIM15, TIM16 and TIM17.
+ *
+ * @param NewState: new state of the TIM interrupts.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ITConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IT(TIM_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Interrupt sources */
+ TIMx->DIER |= TIM_IT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Interrupt sources */
+ TIMx->DIER &= (uint16_t)~TIM_IT;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx event to be generate by software.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the
+ * TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_EventSource: specifies the event source.
+ * This parameter can be one or more of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_EventSource_Update: Timer update Event source
+ * @arg TIM_EventSource_CC1: Timer Capture Compare 1 Event source
+ * @arg TIM_EventSource_CC2: Timer Capture Compare 2 Event source
+ * @arg TIM_EventSource_CC3: Timer Capture Compare 3 Event source
+ * @arg TIM_EventSource_CC4: Timer Capture Compare 4 Event source
+ * @arg TIM_EventSource_COM: Timer COM event source
+ * @arg TIM_EventSource_Trigger: Timer Trigger Event source
+ * @arg TIM_EventSource_Break: Timer Break event source
+ *
+ * @note TIM6 and TIM7 can only generate an update event.
+ * @note TIM_EventSource_COM and TIM_EventSource_Break are used only with TIM1.
+ *
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_GenerateEvent(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_EventSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EVENT_SOURCE(TIM_EventSource));
+ /* Set the event sources */
+ TIMx->EGR = TIM_EventSource;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified TIM flag is set or not.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_Update: TIM update Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_COM: TIM Commutation Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_Trigger: TIM Trigger Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_Break: TIM Break Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC1OF: TIM Capture Compare 1 overcapture Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC2OF: TIM Capture Compare 2 overcapture Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC3OF: TIM Capture Compare 3 overcapture Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC4OF: TIM Capture Compare 4 overcapture Flag
+ *
+ * @note TIM6 and TIM7 can have only one update flag.
+ * @note TIM15 can have only TIM_FLAG_Update, TIM_FLAG_CC1, TIM_FLAG_CC2 or TIM_FLAG_Trigger.
+ * @note TIM14, TIM16 and TIM17 can have TIM_FLAG_Update or TIM_FLAG_CC1.
+ * @note TIM_FLAG_Break is used only with TIM1 and TIM15.
+ * @note TIM_FLAG_COM is used only with TIM1 TIM15, TIM16 and TIM17.
+ *
+ * @retval The new state of TIM_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus TIM_GetFlagStatus(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_FLAG)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_GET_FLAG(TIM_FLAG));
+
+ if ((TIMx->SR & TIM_FLAG) != (uint16_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the TIMx's pending flags.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_FLAG: specifies the flag bit to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_Update: TIM update Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_COM: TIM Commutation Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_Trigger: TIM Trigger Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_Break: TIM Break Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC1OF: TIM Capture Compare 1 overcapture Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC2OF: TIM Capture Compare 2 overcapture Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC3OF: TIM Capture Compare 3 overcapture Flag
+ * @arg TIM_FLAG_CC4OF: TIM Capture Compare 4 overcapture Flag
+ *
+ * @note TIM6 and TIM7 can have only one update flag.
+ * @note TIM15 can have only TIM_FLAG_Update, TIM_FLAG_CC1,TIM_FLAG_CC2 or
+ * TIM_FLAG_Trigger.
+ * @note TIM14, TIM16 and TIM17 can have TIM_FLAG_Update or TIM_FLAG_CC1.
+ * @note TIM_FLAG_Break is used only with TIM1 and TIM15.
+ * @note TIM_FLAG_COM is used only with TIM1, TIM15, TIM16 and TIM17.
+ *
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ClearFlag(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_CLEAR_FLAG(TIM_FLAG));
+
+ /* Clear the flags */
+ TIMx->SR = (uint16_t)~TIM_FLAG;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the TIM interrupt has occurred or not.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_IT: specifies the TIM interrupt source to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_IT_Update: TIM update Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_COM: TIM Commutation Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_Trigger: TIM Trigger Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_Break: TIM Break Interrupt source
+ *
+ * @note TIM6 and TIM7 can generate only an update interrupt.
+ * @note TIM15 can have only TIM_IT_Update, TIM_IT_CC1, TIM_IT_CC2 or TIM_IT_Trigger.
+ * @note TIM14, TIM16 and TIM17 can have TIM_IT_Update or TIM_IT_CC1.
+ * @note TIM_IT_Break is used only with TIM1 and TIM15.
+ * @note TIM_IT_COM is used only with TIM1, TIM15, TIM16 and TIM17.
+ *
+ * @retval The new state of the TIM_IT(SET or RESET).
+ */
+ITStatus TIM_GetITStatus(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_IT)
+{
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ uint16_t itstatus = 0x0, itenable = 0x0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_GET_IT(TIM_IT));
+
+ itstatus = TIMx->SR & TIM_IT;
+
+ itenable = TIMx->DIER & TIM_IT;
+ if ((itstatus != (uint16_t)RESET) && (itenable != (uint16_t)RESET))
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the TIMx's interrupt pending bits.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_IT: specifies the pending bit to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_IT_Update: TIM1 update Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_COM: TIM Commutation Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_Trigger: TIM Trigger Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_IT_Break: TIM Break Interrupt source
+ *
+ * @note TIM6 and TIM7 can generate only an update interrupt.
+ * @note TIM15 can have only TIM_IT_Update, TIM_IT_CC1, TIM_IT_CC2 or TIM_IT_Trigger.
+ * @note TIM14, TIM16 and TIM17 can have TIM_IT_Update or TIM_IT_CC1.
+ * @note TIM_IT_Break is used only with TIM1 and TIM15.
+ * @note TIM_IT_COM is used only with TIM1, TIM15, TIM16 and TIM17.
+ *
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ClearITPendingBit(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_IT)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ALL_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IT(TIM_IT));
+
+ /* Clear the IT pending Bit */
+ TIMx->SR = (uint16_t)~TIM_IT;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx's DMA interface.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_DMABase: DMA Base address.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_CR1
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_CR2
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_SMCR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_DIER
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_SR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_EGR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_CCMR1
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_CCMR2
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_CCER
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_CNT
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_PSC
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_ARR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_CCR1
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_CCR2
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_CCR3
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_CCR4
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_DCR
+ * @arg TIM_DMABase_OR
+ * @param TIM_DMABurstLength: DMA Burst length. This parameter can be one value
+ * between: TIM_DMABurstLength_1Transfer and TIM_DMABurstLength_18Transfers.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_DMAConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_DMABase, uint16_t TIM_DMABurstLength)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST4_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_BASE(TIM_DMABase));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_LENGTH(TIM_DMABurstLength));
+ /* Set the DMA Base and the DMA Burst Length */
+ TIMx->DCR = TIM_DMABase | TIM_DMABurstLength;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the TIMx's DMA Requests.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_DMASource: specifies the DMA Request sources.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_Update: TIM update Interrupt source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC1: TIM Capture Compare 1 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC2: TIM Capture Compare 2 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC3: TIM Capture Compare 3 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_CC4: TIM Capture Compare 4 DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_COM: TIM Commutation DMA source
+ * @arg TIM_DMA_Trigger: TIM Trigger DMA source
+ * @param NewState: new state of the DMA Request sources.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_DMACmd(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_DMASource, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST10_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_DMA_SOURCE(TIM_DMASource));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the DMA sources */
+ TIMx->DIER |= TIM_DMASource;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the DMA sources */
+ TIMx->DIER &= (uint16_t)~TIM_DMASource;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the TIMx peripheral Capture Compare DMA source.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the Capture Compare DMA source
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SelectCCDMA(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST5_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the CCDS Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 |= TIM_CR2_CCDS;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the CCDS Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_CCDS);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Group6 Clocks management functions
+ * @brief Clocks management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Clocks management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx internal Clock
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_InternalClockConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ /* Disable slave mode to clock the prescaler directly with the internal clock */
+ TIMx->SMCR &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_SMCR_SMS));
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Internal Trigger as External Clock
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ITRSource: Trigger source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR0: Internal Trigger 0
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR1: Internal Trigger 1
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR2: Internal Trigger 2
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR3: Internal Trigger 3
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ITRxExternalClockConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_InputTriggerSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_INTERNAL_TRIGGER_SELECTION(TIM_InputTriggerSource));
+ /* Select the Internal Trigger */
+ TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIMx, TIM_InputTriggerSource);
+ /* Select the External clock mode1 */
+ TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_SlaveMode_External1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Trigger as External Clock
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource: Trigger source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI1ED: TI1 Edge Detector
+ * @arg TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI1: Filtered Timer Input 1
+ * @arg TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI2: Filtered Timer Input 2
+ * @param TIM_ICPolarity: specifies the TIx Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Rising
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Falling
+ * @param ICFilter: specifies the filter value.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x0 and 0xF.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_TIxExternalClockConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource,
+ uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint16_t ICFilter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_ICPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_FILTER(ICFilter));
+
+ /* Configure the Timer Input Clock Source */
+ if (TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource == TIM_TIxExternalCLK1Source_TI2)
+ {
+ TI2_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI, ICFilter);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ TI1_Config(TIMx, TIM_ICPolarity, TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI, ICFilter);
+ }
+ /* Select the Trigger source */
+ TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIMx, TIM_TIxExternalCLKSource);
+ /* Select the External clock mode1 */
+ TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_SlaveMode_External1;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the External clock Mode1
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler: The external Trigger Prescaler.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF: ETRP Prescaler OFF.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2: ETRP frequency divided by 2.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4: ETRP frequency divided by 4.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8: ETRP frequency divided by 8.
+ * @param TIM_ExtTRGPolarity: The external Trigger Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted: active low or falling edge active.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted: active high or rising edge active.
+ * @param ExtTRGFilter: External Trigger Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ETRClockMode1Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity,
+ uint16_t ExtTRGFilter)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpsmcr = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_PRESCALER(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_POLARITY(TIM_ExtTRGPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_FILTER(ExtTRGFilter));
+
+ /* Configure the ETR Clock source */
+ TIM_ETRConfig(TIMx, TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, ExtTRGFilter);
+
+ /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+ tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+ /* Reset the SMS Bits */
+ tmpsmcr &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_SMCR_SMS));
+ /* Select the External clock mode1 */
+ tmpsmcr |= TIM_SlaveMode_External1;
+ /* Select the Trigger selection : ETRF */
+ tmpsmcr &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_SMCR_TS));
+ tmpsmcr |= TIM_TS_ETRF;
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the External clock Mode2
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler: The external Trigger Prescaler.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF: ETRP Prescaler OFF.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2: ETRP frequency divided by 2.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4: ETRP frequency divided by 4.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8: ETRP frequency divided by 8.
+ * @param TIM_ExtTRGPolarity: The external Trigger Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted: active low or falling edge active.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted: active high or rising edge active.
+ * @param ExtTRGFilter: External Trigger Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ETRClockMode2Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler,
+ uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, uint16_t ExtTRGFilter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_PRESCALER(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_POLARITY(TIM_ExtTRGPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_FILTER(ExtTRGFilter));
+
+ /* Configure the ETR Clock source */
+ TIM_ETRConfig(TIMx, TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, ExtTRGFilter);
+ /* Enable the External clock mode2 */
+ TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_SMCR_ECE;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Group7 Synchronization management functions
+ * @brief Synchronization management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Synchronization management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ *** TIM Driver: how to use it in synchronization Mode ***
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] Case of two/several Timers
+ (#) Configure the Master Timers using the following functions:
+ (++) void TIM_SelectOutputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx,
+ uint16_t TIM_TRGOSource).
+ (++) void TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx,
+ uint16_t TIM_MasterSlaveMode);
+ (#) Configure the Slave Timers using the following functions:
+ (++) void TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx,
+ uint16_t TIM_InputTriggerSource);
+ (++) void TIM_SelectSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_SlaveMode);
+ [..] Case of Timers and external trigger(ETR pin)
+ (#) Configure the Etrenal trigger using this function:
+ (++) void TIM_ETRConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler,
+ uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity, uint16_t ExtTRGFilter);
+ (#) Configure the Slave Timers using the following functions:
+ (++) void TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx,
+ uint16_t TIM_InputTriggerSource);
+ (++) void TIM_SelectSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_SlaveMode);
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the Input Trigger source
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_InputTriggerSource: The Input Trigger source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR0: Internal Trigger 0
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR1: Internal Trigger 1
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR2: Internal Trigger 2
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ITR3: Internal Trigger 3
+ * @arg TIM_TS_TI1F_ED: TI1 Edge Detector
+ * @arg TIM_TS_TI1FP1: Filtered Timer Input 1
+ * @arg TIM_TS_TI2FP2: Filtered Timer Input 2
+ * @arg TIM_TS_ETRF: External Trigger input
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SelectInputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_InputTriggerSource)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpsmcr = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRIGGER_SELECTION(TIM_InputTriggerSource));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+ tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+ /* Reset the TS Bits */
+ tmpsmcr &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_SMCR_TS));
+ /* Set the Input Trigger source */
+ tmpsmcr |= TIM_InputTriggerSource;
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the TIMx Trigger Output Mode.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM7 is applicable only for STM32F072 devices
+ * @note TIM6 is not applivable for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_TRGOSource: specifies the Trigger Output source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ *
+ * - For all TIMx
+ * @arg TIM_TRGOSource_Reset: The UG bit in the TIM_EGR register is used as the trigger output (TRGO).
+ * @arg TIM_TRGOSource_Enable: The Counter Enable CEN is used as the trigger output (TRGO).
+ * @arg TIM_TRGOSource_Update: The update event is selected as the trigger output (TRGO).
+ *
+ * - For all TIMx except TIM6 and TIM7
+ * @arg TIM_TRGOSource_OC1: The trigger output sends a positive pulse when the CC1IF flag
+ * is to be set, as soon as a capture or compare match occurs (TRGO).
+ * @arg TIM_TRGOSource_OC1Ref: OC1REF signal is used as the trigger output (TRGO).
+ * @arg TIM_TRGOSource_OC2Ref: OC2REF signal is used as the trigger output (TRGO).
+ * @arg TIM_TRGOSource_OC3Ref: OC3REF signal is used as the trigger output (TRGO).
+ * @arg TIM_TRGOSource_OC4Ref: OC4REF signal is used as the trigger output (TRGO).
+ *
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SelectOutputTrigger(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_TRGOSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST9_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_TRGO_SOURCE(TIM_TRGOSource));
+
+ /* Reset the MMS Bits */
+ TIMx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_MMS);
+ /* Select the TRGO source */
+ TIMx->CR2 |= TIM_TRGOSource;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the TIMx Slave Mode.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3 or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_SlaveMode: specifies the Timer Slave Mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_SlaveMode_Reset: Rising edge of the selected trigger signal (TRGI) re-initializes
+ * the counter and triggers an update of the registers.
+ * @arg TIM_SlaveMode_Gated: The counter clock is enabled when the trigger signal (TRGI) is high.
+ * @arg TIM_SlaveMode_Trigger: The counter starts at a rising edge of the trigger TRGI.
+ * @arg TIM_SlaveMode_External1: Rising edges of the selected trigger (TRGI) clock the counter.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SelectSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_SlaveMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_SLAVE_MODE(TIM_SlaveMode));
+
+ /* Reset the SMS Bits */
+ TIMx->SMCR &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_SMCR_SMS);
+ /* Select the Slave Mode */
+ TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_SlaveMode;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets or Resets the TIMx Master/Slave Mode.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_MasterSlaveMode: specifies the Timer Master Slave Mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_MasterSlaveMode_Enable: synchronization between the current timer
+ * and its slaves (through TRGO).
+ * @arg TIM_MasterSlaveMode_Disable: No action
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SelectMasterSlaveMode(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_MasterSlaveMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST6_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_MSM_STATE(TIM_MasterSlaveMode));
+
+ /* Reset the MSM Bit */
+ TIMx->SMCR &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_SMCR_MSM);
+
+ /* Set or Reset the MSM Bit */
+ TIMx->SMCR |= TIM_MasterSlaveMode;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx External Trigger (ETR).
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler: The external Trigger Prescaler.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_OFF: ETRP Prescaler OFF.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV2: ETRP frequency divided by 2.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV4: ETRP frequency divided by 4.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPSC_DIV8: ETRP frequency divided by 8.
+ * @param TIM_ExtTRGPolarity: The external Trigger Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_Inverted: active low or falling edge active.
+ * @arg TIM_ExtTRGPolarity_NonInverted: active high or rising edge active.
+ * @param ExtTRGFilter: External Trigger Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_ETRConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler, uint16_t TIM_ExtTRGPolarity,
+ uint16_t ExtTRGFilter)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpsmcr = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_PRESCALER(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_POLARITY(TIM_ExtTRGPolarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_EXT_FILTER(ExtTRGFilter));
+
+ tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+ /* Reset the ETR Bits */
+ tmpsmcr &= SMCR_ETR_MASK;
+ /* Set the Prescaler, the Filter value and the Polarity */
+ tmpsmcr |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ExtTRGPrescaler | (uint16_t)(TIM_ExtTRGPolarity | (uint16_t)(ExtTRGFilter << (uint16_t)8)));
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Group8 Specific interface management functions
+ * @brief Specific interface management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Specific interface management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIMx Encoder Interface.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_EncoderMode: specifies the TIMx Encoder Mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_EncoderMode_TI1: Counter counts on TI1FP1 edge depending on TI2FP2 level.
+ * @arg TIM_EncoderMode_TI2: Counter counts on TI2FP2 edge depending on TI1FP1 level.
+ * @arg TIM_EncoderMode_TI12: Counter counts on both TI1FP1 and TI2FP2 edges depending
+ * on the level of the other input.
+ * @param TIM_IC1Polarity: specifies the IC1 Polarity
+ * This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Falling: IC Falling edge.
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Rising: IC Rising edge.
+ * @param TIM_IC2Polarity: specifies the IC2 Polarity
+ * This parmeter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Falling: IC Falling edge.
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Rising: IC Rising edge.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_EncoderInterfaceConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_EncoderMode,
+ uint16_t TIM_IC1Polarity, uint16_t TIM_IC2Polarity)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpsmcr = 0;
+ uint16_t tmpccmr1 = 0;
+ uint16_t tmpccer = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_ENCODER_MODE(TIM_EncoderMode));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_IC1Polarity));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_IC_POLARITY(TIM_IC2Polarity));
+
+ /* Get the TIMx SMCR register value */
+ tmpsmcr = TIMx->SMCR;
+ /* Get the TIMx CCMR1 register value */
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ /* Get the TIMx CCER register value */
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Set the encoder Mode */
+ tmpsmcr &= (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_SMCR_SMS));
+ tmpsmcr |= TIM_EncoderMode;
+ /* Select the Capture Compare 1 and the Capture Compare 2 as input */
+ tmpccmr1 &= (uint16_t)(((uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_CC1S)) & (uint16_t)(~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_CC2S)));
+ tmpccmr1 |= TIM_CCMR1_CC1S_0 | TIM_CCMR1_CC2S_0;
+ /* Set the TI1 and the TI2 Polarities */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)(TIM_CCER_CC1P | TIM_CCER_CC1NP)) & (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)(TIM_CCER_CC2P | TIM_CCER_CC2NP));
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_IC1Polarity | (uint16_t)(TIM_IC2Polarity << (uint16_t)4));
+ /* Write to TIMx SMCR */
+ TIMx->SMCR = tmpsmcr;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+ /* Write to TIMx CCER */
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the TIMx's Hall sensor interface.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the TIMx Hall sensor interface.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_SelectHallSensor(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST3_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Set the TI1S Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 |= TIM_CR2_TI1S;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Reset the TI1S Bit */
+ TIMx->CR2 &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CR2_TI1S);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup TIM_Group9 Specific remapping management function
+ * @brief Specific remapping management function
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Specific remapping management function #####
+ ===============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the TIM14 Remapping input Capabilities.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 14 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @param TIM_Remap: specifies the TIM input reampping source.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM14_GPIO: TIM14 Channel 1 is connected to GPIO.
+ * @arg TIM14_RTC_CLK: TIM14 Channel 1 is connected to RTC input clock.
+ * RTC input clock can be LSE, LSI or HSE/div128.
+ * @arg TIM14_HSE_DIV32: TIM14 Channel 1 is connected to HSE/32 clock.
+ * @arg TIM14_MCO: TIM14 Channel 1 is connected to MCO clock.
+ * MCO clock can be HSI14, SYSCLK, HSI, HSE or PLL/2.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void TIM_RemapConfig(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_Remap)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_LIST11_PERIPH(TIMx));
+ assert_param(IS_TIM_REMAP(TIM_Remap));
+
+ /* Set the Timer remapping configuration */
+ TIMx->OR = TIM_Remap;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the TI1 as Input.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, 14, 15, 16 or 17 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ICPolarity: The Input Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Rising
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Falling
+ * @param TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 1 is selected to be connected to IC1.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 1 is selected to be connected to IC2.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 1 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+ * @param TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TI1_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint16_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint16_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr1 = 0, tmpccer = 0;
+ /* Disable the Channel 1: Reset the CC1E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC1E);
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ /* Select the Input and set the filter */
+ tmpccmr1 &= (uint16_t)(((uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_CC1S)) & ((uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_IC1F)));
+ tmpccmr1 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ICSelection | (uint16_t)(TIM_ICFilter << (uint16_t)4));
+
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC1E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)(TIM_CCER_CC1P | TIM_CCER_CC1NP));
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ICPolarity | (uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC1E);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the TI2 as Input.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2, 3, or 15 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ICPolarity: The Input Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Rising
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Falling
+ * @param TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 2 is selected to be connected to IC2.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 2 is selected to be connected to IC1.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 2 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+ * @param TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TI2_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint16_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint16_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr1 = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmp = 0;
+ /* Disable the Channel 2: Reset the CC2E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC2E);
+ tmpccmr1 = TIMx->CCMR1;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ tmp = (uint16_t)(TIM_ICPolarity << 4);
+ /* Select the Input and set the filter */
+ tmpccmr1 &= (uint16_t)(((uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_CC2S)) & ((uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR1_IC2F)));
+ tmpccmr1 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ICFilter << 12);
+ tmpccmr1 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ICSelection << 8);
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC2E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)(TIM_CCER_CC2P | TIM_CCER_CC2NP));
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(tmp | (uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC2E);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR1 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR1 = tmpccmr1 ;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the TI3 as Input.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ICPolarity: The Input Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Rising
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Falling
+ * @param TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 3 is selected to be connected to IC3.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 3 is selected to be connected to IC4.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 3 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+ * @param TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TI3_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint16_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint16_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr2 = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmp = 0;
+ /* Disable the Channel 3: Reset the CC3E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC3E);
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ tmp = (uint16_t)(TIM_ICPolarity << 8);
+ /* Select the Input and set the filter */
+ tmpccmr2 &= (uint16_t)(((uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_CC3S)) & ((uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_IC3F)));
+ tmpccmr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ICSelection | (uint16_t)(TIM_ICFilter << (uint16_t)4));
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC3E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)(TIM_CCER_CC3P | TIM_CCER_CC3NP));
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(tmp | (uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC3E);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the TI4 as Input.
+ * @param TIMx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the TIM peripheral.
+ * @note TIM2 is not applicable for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param TIM_ICPolarity: The Input Polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Rising
+ * @arg TIM_ICPolarity_Falling
+ * @param TIM_ICSelection: specifies the input to be used.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_DirectTI: TIM Input 4 is selected to be connected to IC4.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_IndirectTI: TIM Input 4 is selected to be connected to IC3.
+ * @arg TIM_ICSelection_TRC: TIM Input 4 is selected to be connected to TRC.
+ * @param TIM_ICFilter: Specifies the Input Capture Filter.
+ * This parameter must be a value between 0x00 and 0x0F.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+static void TI4_Config(TIM_TypeDef* TIMx, uint16_t TIM_ICPolarity, uint16_t TIM_ICSelection,
+ uint16_t TIM_ICFilter)
+{
+ uint16_t tmpccmr2 = 0, tmpccer = 0, tmp = 0;
+
+ /* Disable the Channel 4: Reset the CC4E Bit */
+ TIMx->CCER &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC4E);
+ tmpccmr2 = TIMx->CCMR2;
+ tmpccer = TIMx->CCER;
+ tmp = (uint16_t)(TIM_ICPolarity << 12);
+ /* Select the Input and set the filter */
+ tmpccmr2 &= (uint16_t)((uint16_t)(~(uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_CC4S) & ((uint16_t)~((uint16_t)TIM_CCMR2_IC4F)));
+ tmpccmr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ICSelection << 8);
+ tmpccmr2 |= (uint16_t)(TIM_ICFilter << 12);
+ /* Select the Polarity and set the CC4E Bit */
+ tmpccer &= (uint16_t)~((uint16_t)(TIM_CCER_CC4P | TIM_CCER_CC4NP));
+ tmpccer |= (uint16_t)(tmp | (uint16_t)TIM_CCER_CC4E);
+ /* Write to TIMx CCMR2 and CCER registers */
+ TIMx->CCMR2 = tmpccmr2;
+ TIMx->CCER = tmpccer;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_usart.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_usart.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_usart.c
@@ -0,0 +1,2168 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_usart.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Universal synchronous asynchronous receiver
+ * transmitter (USART):
+ * + Initialization and Configuration
+ * + STOP Mode
+ * + AutoBaudRate
+ * + Data transfers
+ * + Multi-Processor Communication
+ * + LIN mode
+ * + Half-duplex mode
+ * + Smartcard mode
+ * + IrDA mode
+ * + RS485 mode
+ * + DMA transfers management
+ * + Interrupts and flags management
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ (#) Enable peripheral clock using RCC_APB2PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, ENABLE)
+ function for USART1 or using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USARTx, ENABLE)
+ function for USART2 and USART3.
+ (#) According to the USART mode, enable the GPIO clocks using
+ RCC_AHBPeriphClockCmd() function. (The I/O can be TX, RX, CTS,
+ or and SCLK).
+ (#) Peripheral's alternate function:
+ (++) Connect the pin to the desired peripherals' Alternate
+ Function (AF) using GPIO_PinAFConfig() function.
+ (++) Configure the desired pin in alternate function by:
+ GPIO_InitStruct->GPIO_Mode = GPIO_Mode_AF.
+ (++) Select the type, pull-up/pull-down and output speed via
+ GPIO_PuPd, GPIO_OType and GPIO_Speed members.
+ (++) Call GPIO_Init() function.
+ (#) Program the Baud Rate, Word Length , Stop Bit, Parity, Hardware
+ flow control and Mode(Receiver/Transmitter) using the SPI_Init()
+ function.
+ (#) For synchronous mode, enable the clock and program the polarity,
+ phase and last bit using the USART_ClockInit() function.
+ (#) Enable the NVIC and the corresponding interrupt using the function
+ USART_ITConfig() if you need to use interrupt mode.
+ (#) When using the DMA mode:
+ (++) Configure the DMA using DMA_Init() function.
+ (++) Active the needed channel Request using USART_DMACmd() function.
+ (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
+ (#) Enable the DMA using the DMA_Cmd() function, when using DMA mode.
+ [..]
+ Refer to Multi-Processor, LIN, half-duplex, Smartcard, IrDA sub-sections
+ for more details.
+
+@endverbatim
+
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_usart.h"
+#include "stm32f0xx_rcc.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup USART
+ * @brief USART driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/*!< USART CR1 register clear Mask ((~(uint32_t)0xFFFFE6F3)) */
+#define CR1_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)(USART_CR1_M | USART_CR1_PCE | \
+ USART_CR1_PS | USART_CR1_TE | \
+ USART_CR1_RE))
+
+/*!< USART CR2 register clock bits clear Mask ((~(uint32_t)0xFFFFF0FF)) */
+#define CR2_CLOCK_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)(USART_CR2_CLKEN | USART_CR2_CPOL | \
+ USART_CR2_CPHA | USART_CR2_LBCL))
+
+/*!< USART CR3 register clear Mask ((~(uint32_t)0xFFFFFCFF)) */
+#define CR3_CLEAR_MASK ((uint32_t)(USART_CR3_RTSE | USART_CR3_CTSE))
+
+/*!< USART Interrupts mask */
+#define IT_MASK ((uint32_t)0x000000FF)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group1 Initialization and Configuration functions
+ * @brief Initialization and Configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Initialization and Configuration functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..]
+ This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to initialize the USART
+ in asynchronous and in synchronous modes.
+ (+) For the asynchronous mode only these parameters can be configured:
+ (++) Baud Rate.
+ (++) Word Length.
+ (++) Stop Bit.
+ (++) Parity: If the parity is enabled, then the MSB bit of the data written
+ in the data register is transmitted but is changed by the parity bit.
+ Depending on the frame length defined by the M bit (8-bits or 9-bits),
+ the possible USART frame formats are as listed in the following table:
+
+ +-------------------------------------------------------------+
+ | M bit | PCE bit | USART frame |
+ |---------------------|---------------------------------------|
+ | 0 | 0 | | SB | 8 bit data | STB | |
+ |---------|-----------|---------------------------------------|
+ | 0 | 1 | | SB | 7 bit data | PB | STB | |
+ |---------|-----------|---------------------------------------|
+ | 1 | 0 | | SB | 9 bit data | STB | |
+ |---------|-----------|---------------------------------------|
+ | 1 | 1 | | SB | 8 bit data | PB | STB | |
+ +-------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+ (++) Hardware flow control.
+ (++) Receiver/transmitter modes.
+ [..] The USART_Init() function follows the USART asynchronous configuration
+ procedure(details for the procedure are available in reference manual.
+ (+) For the synchronous mode in addition to the asynchronous mode parameters
+ these parameters should be also configured:
+ (++) USART Clock Enabled.
+ (++) USART polarity.
+ (++) USART phase.
+ (++) USART LastBit.
+ [..] These parameters can be configured using the USART_ClockInit() function.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the USARTx peripheral registers to their default reset values.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_DeInit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+
+ if (USARTx == USART1)
+ {
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART1, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (USARTx == USART2)
+ {
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART2, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (USARTx == USART3)
+ {
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART3, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (USARTx == USART4)
+ {
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART4, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART4, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (USARTx == USART5)
+ {
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART5, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_USART5, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (USARTx == USART6)
+ {
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART6, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART6, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else if (USARTx == USART7)
+ {
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART7, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART7, DISABLE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ if (USARTx == USART8)
+ {
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART8, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB2PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB2Periph_USART8, DISABLE);
+ }
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the USARTx peripheral according to the specified
+ * parameters in the USART_InitStruct .
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_InitStruct: pointer to a USART_InitTypeDef structure that contains
+ * the configuration information for the specified USART peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_Init(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, USART_InitTypeDef* USART_InitStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t divider = 0, apbclock = 0, tmpreg = 0;
+ RCC_ClocksTypeDef RCC_ClocksStatus;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_BAUDRATE(USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_WORD_LENGTH(USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_STOPBITS(USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_PARITY(USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_MODE(USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_HARDWARE_FLOW_CONTROL(USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl));
+
+ /* Disable USART */
+ USARTx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR1_UE);
+
+ /*---------------------------- USART CR2 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ tmpreg = USARTx->CR2;
+ /* Clear STOP[13:12] bits */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_STOP);
+
+ /* Configure the USART Stop Bits, Clock, CPOL, CPHA and LastBit ------------*/
+ /* Set STOP[13:12] bits according to USART_StopBits value */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits;
+
+ /* Write to USART CR2 */
+ USARTx->CR2 = tmpreg;
+
+ /*---------------------------- USART CR1 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ tmpreg = USARTx->CR1;
+ /* Clear M, PCE, PS, TE and RE bits */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)CR1_CLEAR_MASK);
+
+ /* Configure the USART Word Length, Parity and mode ----------------------- */
+ /* Set the M bits according to USART_WordLength value */
+ /* Set PCE and PS bits according to USART_Parity value */
+ /* Set TE and RE bits according to USART_Mode value */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength | USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity |
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode;
+
+ /* Write to USART CR1 */
+ USARTx->CR1 = tmpreg;
+
+ /*---------------------------- USART CR3 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ tmpreg = USARTx->CR3;
+ /* Clear CTSE and RTSE bits */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)CR3_CLEAR_MASK);
+
+ /* Configure the USART HFC -------------------------------------------------*/
+ /* Set CTSE and RTSE bits according to USART_HardwareFlowControl value */
+ tmpreg |= USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl;
+
+ /* Write to USART CR3 */
+ USARTx->CR3 = tmpreg;
+
+ /*---------------------------- USART BRR Configuration -----------------------*/
+ /* Configure the USART Baud Rate -------------------------------------------*/
+ RCC_GetClocksFreq(&RCC_ClocksStatus);
+
+ if (USARTx == USART1)
+ {
+ apbclock = RCC_ClocksStatus.USART1CLK_Frequency;
+ }
+ else if (USARTx == USART2)
+ {
+ apbclock = RCC_ClocksStatus.USART2CLK_Frequency;
+ }
+ else if (USARTx == USART3)
+ {
+ apbclock = RCC_ClocksStatus.USART3CLK_Frequency;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ apbclock = RCC_ClocksStatus.PCLK_Frequency;
+ }
+
+ /* Determine the integer part */
+ if ((USARTx->CR1 & USART_CR1_OVER8) != 0)
+ {
+ /* (divider * 10) computing in case Oversampling mode is 8 Samples */
+ divider = (uint32_t)((2 * apbclock) / (USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate));
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)((2 * apbclock) % (USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate));
+ }
+ else /* if ((USARTx->CR1 & CR1_OVER8_Set) == 0) */
+ {
+ /* (divider * 10) computing in case Oversampling mode is 16 Samples */
+ divider = (uint32_t)((apbclock) / (USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate));
+ tmpreg = (uint32_t)((apbclock) % (USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate));
+ }
+
+ /* round the divider : if fractional part i greater than 0.5 increment divider */
+ if (tmpreg >= (USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate) / 2)
+ {
+ divider++;
+ }
+
+ /* Implement the divider in case Oversampling mode is 8 Samples */
+ if ((USARTx->CR1 & USART_CR1_OVER8) != 0)
+ {
+ /* get the LSB of divider and shift it to the right by 1 bit */
+ tmpreg = (divider & (uint16_t)0x000F) >> 1;
+
+ /* update the divider value */
+ divider = (divider & (uint16_t)0xFFF0) | tmpreg;
+ }
+
+ /* Write to USART BRR */
+ USARTx->BRR = (uint16_t)divider;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each USART_InitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param USART_InitStruct: pointer to a USART_InitTypeDef structure
+ * which will be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_StructInit(USART_InitTypeDef* USART_InitStruct)
+{
+ /* USART_InitStruct members default value */
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_BaudRate = 9600;
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_WordLength = USART_WordLength_8b;
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_StopBits = USART_StopBits_1;
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_Parity = USART_Parity_No ;
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_Mode = USART_Mode_Rx | USART_Mode_Tx;
+ USART_InitStruct->USART_HardwareFlowControl = USART_HardwareFlowControl_None;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Initializes the USARTx peripheral Clock according to the
+ * specified parameters in the USART_ClockInitStruct.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_ClockInitStruct: pointer to a USART_ClockInitTypeDef
+ * structure that contains the configuration information for the specified
+ * USART peripheral.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_ClockInit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, USART_ClockInitTypeDef* USART_ClockInitStruct)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CLOCK(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CPOL(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CPHA(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_LASTBIT(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit));
+/*---------------------------- USART CR2 Configuration -----------------------*/
+ tmpreg = USARTx->CR2;
+ /* Clear CLKEN, CPOL, CPHA, LBCL and SSM bits */
+ tmpreg &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)CR2_CLOCK_CLEAR_MASK);
+ /* Configure the USART Clock, CPOL, CPHA, LastBit and SSM ------------*/
+ /* Set CLKEN bit according to USART_Clock value */
+ /* Set CPOL bit according to USART_CPOL value */
+ /* Set CPHA bit according to USART_CPHA value */
+ /* Set LBCL bit according to USART_LastBit value */
+ tmpreg |= (uint32_t)(USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock | USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL |
+ USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA | USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit);
+ /* Write to USART CR2 */
+ USARTx->CR2 = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Fills each USART_ClockInitStruct member with its default value.
+ * @param USART_ClockInitStruct: pointer to a USART_ClockInitTypeDef
+ * structure which will be initialized.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_ClockStructInit(USART_ClockInitTypeDef* USART_ClockInitStruct)
+{
+ /* USART_ClockInitStruct members default value */
+ USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_Clock = USART_Clock_Disable;
+ USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPOL = USART_CPOL_Low;
+ USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_CPHA = USART_CPHA_1Edge;
+ USART_ClockInitStruct->USART_LastBit = USART_LastBit_Disable;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified USART peripheral.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USARTx peripheral.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_Cmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected USART by setting the UE bit in the CR1 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 |= USART_CR1_UE;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected USART by clearing the UE bit in the CR1 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR1_UE);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's transmitter or receiver.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_Direction: specifies the USART direction.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_Mode_Tx: USART Transmitter
+ * @arg USART_Mode_Rx: USART Receiver
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USART transfer direction.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_DirectionModeCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_DirectionMode, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_MODE(USART_DirectionMode));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the USART's transfer interface by setting the TE and/or RE bits
+ in the USART CR1 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 |= USART_DirectionMode;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the USART's transfer interface by clearing the TE and/or RE bits
+ in the USART CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~USART_DirectionMode;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's 8x oversampling mode.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USART 8x oversampling mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note This function has to be called before calling USART_Init() function
+ * in order to have correct baudrate Divider value.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_OverSampling8Cmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the 8x Oversampling mode by setting the OVER8 bit in the CR1 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 |= USART_CR1_OVER8;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the 8x Oversampling mode by clearing the OVER8 bit in the CR1 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR1_OVER8);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's one bit sampling method.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USART one bit sampling method.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd() function.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_OneBitMethodCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the one bit method by setting the ONEBITE bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_CR3_ONEBIT;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the one bit method by clearing the ONEBITE bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_ONEBIT);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's most significant bit first
+ * transmitted/received following the start bit.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USART most significant bit first
+ * transmitted/received following the start bit.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd() function.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_MSBFirstCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the most significant bit first transmitted/received following the
+ start bit by setting the MSBFIRST bit in the CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_CR2_MSBFIRST;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the most significant bit first transmitted/received following the
+ start bit by clearing the MSBFIRST bit in the CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_MSBFIRST);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the binary data inversion.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new defined levels for the USART data.
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg ENABLE: Logical data from the data register are send/received in negative
+ * logic (1=L, 0=H). The parity bit is also inverted.
+ * @arg DISABLE: Logical data from the data register are send/received in positive
+ * logic (1=H, 0=L)
+ * @note This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd() function.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_DataInvCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the binary data inversion feature by setting the DATAINV bit in
+ the CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_CR2_DATAINV;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the binary data inversion feature by clearing the DATAINV bit in
+ the CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_DATAINV);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the Pin(s) active level inversion.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_InvPin: specifies the USART pin(s) to invert.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_InvPin_Tx: USART Tx pin active level inversion.
+ * @arg USART_InvPin_Rx: USART Rx pin active level inversion.
+ * @param NewState: new active level status for the USART pin(s).
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg ENABLE: pin(s) signal values are inverted (Vdd =0, Gnd =1).
+ * @arg DISABLE: pin(s) signal works using the standard logic levels (Vdd =1, Gnd =0).
+ * @note This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd() function.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_InvPinCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_InvPin, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_INVERSTION_PIN(USART_InvPin));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the active level inversion for selected pins by setting the TXINV
+ and/or RXINV bits in the USART CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_InvPin;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the active level inversion for selected requests by clearing the
+ TXINV and/or RXINV bits in the USART CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~USART_InvPin;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the swap Tx/Rx pins.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USARTx TX/RX pins pinout.
+ * This parameter can be:
+ * @arg ENABLE: The TX and RX pins functions are swapped.
+ * @arg DISABLE: TX/RX pins are used as defined in standard pinout
+ * @note This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd() function.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SWAPPinCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the SWAP feature by setting the SWAP bit in the CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_CR2_SWAP;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the SWAP feature by clearing the SWAP bit in the CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_SWAP);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the receiver Time Out feature.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USARTx receiver Time Out.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_ReceiverTimeOutCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the receiver time out feature by setting the RTOEN bit in the CR2
+ register */
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_CR2_RTOEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the receiver time out feature by clearing the RTOEN bit in the CR2
+ register */
+ USARTx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_RTOEN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the receiver Time Out value.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param USART_ReceiverTimeOut: specifies the Receiver Time Out value.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SetReceiverTimeOut(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_ReceiverTimeOut)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_TIMEOUT(USART_ReceiverTimeOut));
+
+ /* Clear the receiver Time Out value by clearing the RTO[23:0] bits in the RTOR
+ register */
+ USARTx->RTOR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_RTOR_RTO);
+ /* Set the receiver Time Out value by setting the RTO[23:0] bits in the RTOR
+ register */
+ USARTx->RTOR |= USART_ReceiverTimeOut;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the system clock prescaler.
+ * @note This function is not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1, 2 or 3 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param USART_Prescaler: specifies the prescaler clock.
+ * @note This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd() function.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SetPrescaler(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint8_t USART_Prescaler)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+
+ /* Clear the USART prescaler */
+ USARTx->GTPR &= USART_GTPR_GT;
+ /* Set the USART prescaler */
+ USARTx->GTPR |= USART_Prescaler;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group2 STOP Mode functions
+ * @brief STOP Mode functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### STOP Mode functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage
+ WakeUp from STOP mode.
+
+ [..] The USART is able to WakeUp from Stop Mode if USART clock is set to HSI
+ or LSI.
+
+ [..] The WakeUp source is configured by calling USART_StopModeWakeUpSourceConfig()
+ function.
+
+ [..] After configuring the source of WakeUp and before entering in Stop Mode
+ USART_STOPModeCmd() function should be called to allow USART WakeUp.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified USART peripheral in STOP Mode.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1 or 2 or 3 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USARTx peripheral state in stop mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @note This function has to be called when USART clock is set to HSI or LSE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_STOPModeCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the selected USART in STOP mode by setting the UESM bit in the CR1
+ register */
+ USARTx->CR1 |= USART_CR1_UESM;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the selected USART in STOP mode by clearing the UE bit in the CR1
+ register */
+ USARTx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR1_UESM);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the USART WakeUp method form stop mode.
+ * @note This function is not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1 or 2 or 3 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param USART_WakeUp: specifies the selected USART wakeup method.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_WakeUpSource_AddressMatch: WUF active on address match.
+ * @arg USART_WakeUpSource_StartBit: WUF active on Start bit detection.
+ * @arg USART_WakeUpSource_RXNE: WUF active on RXNE.
+ * @note This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd() function.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_StopModeWakeUpSourceConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_WakeUpSource)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_STOPMODE_WAKEUPSOURCE(USART_WakeUpSource));
+
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_WUS);
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_WakeUpSource;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group3 AutoBaudRate functions
+ * @brief AutoBaudRate functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### AutoBaudRate functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage
+ the AutoBaudRate detections.
+
+ [..] Before Enabling AutoBaudRate detection using USART_AutoBaudRateCmd ()
+ The character patterns used to calculate baudrate must be chosen by calling
+ USART_AutoBaudRateConfig() function. These function take as parameter :
+ (#)USART_AutoBaudRate_StartBit : any character starting with a bit 1.
+ (#)USART_AutoBaudRate_FallingEdge : any character starting with a 10xx bit pattern.
+
+ [..] At any later time, another request for AutoBaudRate detection can be performed
+ using USART_RequestCmd() function.
+
+ [..] The AutoBaudRate detection is monitored by the status of ABRF flag which indicate
+ that the AutoBaudRate detection is completed. In addition to ABRF flag, the ABRE flag
+ indicate that this procedure is completed without success. USART_GetFlagStatus ()
+ function should be used to monitor the status of these flags.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the Auto Baud Rate.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1or 2 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USARTx auto baud rate.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_AutoBaudRateCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the auto baud rate feature by setting the ABREN bit in the CR2
+ register */
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_CR2_ABREN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the auto baud rate feature by clearing the ABREN bit in the CR2
+ register */
+ USARTx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_ABREN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the USART auto baud rate method.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1or 2 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param USART_AutoBaudRate: specifies the selected USART auto baud rate method.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_AutoBaudRate_StartBit: Start Bit duration measurement.
+ * @arg USART_AutoBaudRate_FallingEdge: Falling edge to falling edge measurement.
+ * @note This function has to be called before calling USART_Cmd() function.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_AutoBaudRateConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_AutoBaudRate)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_AUTOBAUDRATE_MODE(USART_AutoBaudRate));
+
+ USARTx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_ABRMODE);
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_AutoBaudRate;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group4 Data transfers functions
+ * @brief Data transfers functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Data transfers functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage
+ the USART data transfers.
+ [..] During an USART reception, data shifts in least significant bit first
+ through the RX pin. When a transmission is taking place, a write instruction to
+ the USART_TDR register stores the data in the shift register.
+ [..] The read access of the USART_RDR register can be done using
+ the USART_ReceiveData() function and returns the RDR value.
+ Whereas a write access to the USART_TDR can be done using USART_SendData()
+ function and stores the written data into TDR.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Transmits single data through the USARTx peripheral.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param Data: the data to transmit.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SendData(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t Data)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_DATA(Data));
+
+ /* Transmit Data */
+ USARTx->TDR = (Data & (uint16_t)0x01FF);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Returns the most recent received data by the USARTx peripheral.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @retval The received data.
+ */
+uint16_t USART_ReceiveData(USART_TypeDef* USARTx)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+
+ /* Receive Data */
+ return (uint16_t)(USARTx->RDR & (uint16_t)0x01FF);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group5 MultiProcessor Communication functions
+ * @brief Multi-Processor Communication functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Multi-Processor Communication functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
+ multiprocessor communication.
+ [..] For instance one of the USARTs can be the master, its TX output is
+ connected to the RX input of the other USART. The others are slaves,
+ their respective TX outputs are logically ANDed together and connected
+ to the RX input of the master. USART multiprocessor communication is
+ possible through the following procedure:
+ (#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 9 bits, Stop bits, Parity,
+ Mode transmitter or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values
+ using the USART_Init() function.
+ (#) Configures the USART address using the USART_SetAddress() function.
+ (#) Configures the wake up methode (USART_WakeUp_IdleLine or
+ USART_WakeUp_AddressMark) using USART_WakeUpConfig() function only
+ for the slaves.
+ (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
+ (#) Enter the USART slaves in mute mode using USART_ReceiverWakeUpCmd()
+ function.
+ [..] The USART Slave exit from mute mode when receive the wake up condition.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the address of the USART node.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_Address: Indicates the address of the USART node.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SetAddress(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint8_t USART_Address)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+
+ /* Clear the USART address */
+ USARTx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_ADD);
+ /* Set the USART address node */
+ USARTx->CR2 |=((uint32_t)USART_Address << (uint32_t)0x18);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's mute mode.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USART mute mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_MuteModeCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the USART mute mode by setting the MME bit in the CR1 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 |= USART_CR1_MME;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the USART mute mode by clearing the MME bit in the CR1 register */
+ USARTx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR1_MME);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Selects the USART WakeUp method from mute mode.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_WakeUp: specifies the USART wakeup method.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_WakeUp_IdleLine: WakeUp by an idle line detection
+ * @arg USART_WakeUp_AddressMark: WakeUp by an address mark
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_MuteModeWakeUpConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_WakeUp)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_MUTEMODE_WAKEUP(USART_WakeUp));
+
+ USARTx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR1_WAKE);
+ USARTx->CR1 |= USART_WakeUp;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configure the the USART Address detection length.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_AddressLength: specifies the USART address length detection.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_AddressLength_4b: 4-bit address length detection
+ * @arg USART_AddressLength_7b: 7-bit address length detection
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_AddressDetectionConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_AddressLength)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ADDRESS_DETECTION(USART_AddressLength));
+
+ USARTx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_ADDM7);
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_AddressLength;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group6 LIN mode functions
+ * @brief LIN mode functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### LIN mode functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
+ LIN Mode communication.
+ [..] In LIN mode, 8-bit data format with 1 stop bit is required in accordance
+ with the LIN standard.
+ [..] Only this LIN Feature is supported by the USART IP:
+ (+) LIN Master Synchronous Break send capability and LIN slave break
+ detection capability : 13-bit break generation and 10/11 bit break
+ detection.
+ [..] USART LIN Master transmitter communication is possible through the
+ following procedure:
+ (#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8bits, Stop bits = 1bit, Parity,
+ Mode transmitter or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values
+ using the USART_Init() function.
+ (#) Enable the LIN mode using the USART_LINCmd() function.
+ (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
+ (#) Send the break character using USART_SendBreak() function.
+ [..] USART LIN Master receiver communication is possible through the
+ following procedure:
+ (#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8bits, Stop bits = 1bit, Parity,
+ Mode transmitter or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values
+ using the USART_Init() function.
+ (#) Configures the break detection length
+ using the USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig() function.
+ (#) Enable the LIN mode using the USART_LINCmd() function.
+ -@- In LIN mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
+ (+@) CLKEN in the USART_CR2 register.
+ (+@) STOP[1:0], SCEN, HDSEL and IREN in the USART_CR3 register.
+ (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the USART LIN Break detection length.
+ * @note This function is not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1or 2 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param USART_LINBreakDetectLength: specifies the LIN break detection length.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_LINBreakDetectLength_10b: 10-bit break detection
+ * @arg USART_LINBreakDetectLength_11b: 11-bit break detection
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_LINBreakDetectLengthConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_LINBreakDetectLength)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_LIN_BREAK_DETECT_LENGTH(USART_LINBreakDetectLength));
+
+ USARTx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_LBDL);
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_LINBreakDetectLength;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's LIN mode.
+ * @note This function is not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1or 2 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USART LIN mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_LINCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the LIN mode by setting the LINEN bit in the CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 |= USART_CR2_LINEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the LIN mode by clearing the LINEN bit in the CR2 register */
+ USARTx->CR2 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR2_LINEN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group7 Halfduplex mode function
+ * @brief Half-duplex mode function
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Half-duplex mode function #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
+ Half-duplex communication.
+ [..] The USART can be configured to follow a single-wire half-duplex protocol
+ where the TX and RX lines are internally connected.
+ [..] USART Half duplex communication is possible through the following procedure:
+ (#) Program the Baud rate, Word length, Stop bits, Parity, Mode transmitter
+ or Mode receiver and hardware flow control values using the USART_Init()
+ function.
+ (#) Configures the USART address using the USART_SetAddress() function.
+ (#) Enable the half duplex mode using USART_HalfDuplexCmd() function.
+ (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
+ -@- The RX pin is no longer used.
+ -@- In Half-duplex mode the following bits must be kept cleared:
+ (+@) LINEN and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register.
+ (+@) SCEN and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's Half Duplex communication.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the USART Communication.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_HalfDuplexCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the Half-Duplex mode by setting the HDSEL bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_CR3_HDSEL;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the Half-Duplex mode by clearing the HDSEL bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_HDSEL);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group8 Smartcard mode functions
+ * @brief Smartcard mode functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Smartcard mode functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
+ Smartcard communication.
+ [..] The Smartcard interface is designed to support asynchronous protocol
+ Smartcards as defined in the ISO 7816-3 standard. The USART can provide
+ a clock to the smartcard through the SCLK output. In smartcard mode,
+ SCLK is not associated to the communication but is simply derived from
+ the internal peripheral input clock through a 5-bit prescaler.
+ [..] Smartcard communication is possible through the following procedure:
+ (#) Configures the Smartcard Prsecaler using the USART_SetPrescaler()
+ function.
+ (#) Configures the Smartcard Guard Time using the USART_SetGuardTime()
+ function.
+ (#) Program the USART clock using the USART_ClockInit() function as following:
+ (++) USART Clock enabled.
+ (++) USART CPOL Low.
+ (++) USART CPHA on first edge.
+ (++) USART Last Bit Clock Enabled.
+ (#) Program the Smartcard interface using the USART_Init() function as
+ following:
+ (++) Word Length = 9 Bits.
+ (++) 1.5 Stop Bit.
+ (++) Even parity.
+ (++) BaudRate = 12096 baud.
+ (++) Hardware flow control disabled (RTS and CTS signals).
+ (++) Tx and Rx enabled
+ (#) Optionally you can enable the parity error interrupt using
+ the USART_ITConfig() function.
+ (#) Enable the Smartcard NACK using the USART_SmartCardNACKCmd() function.
+ (#) Enable the Smartcard interface using the USART_SmartCardCmd() function.
+ (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
+ [..]
+ Please refer to the ISO 7816-3 specification for more details.
+ [..]
+ (@) It is also possible to choose 0.5 stop bit for receiving but it is
+ recommended to use 1.5 stop bits for both transmitting and receiving
+ to avoid switching between the two configurations.
+ (@) In smartcard mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
+ (+@) LINEN bit in the USART_CR2 register.
+ (+@) HDSEL and IREN bits in the USART_CR3 register.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the specified USART guard time.
+ * @note This function is not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1or 2 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param USART_GuardTime: specifies the guard time.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SetGuardTime(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint8_t USART_GuardTime)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+
+ /* Clear the USART Guard time */
+ USARTx->GTPR &= USART_GTPR_PSC;
+ /* Set the USART guard time */
+ USARTx->GTPR |= (uint16_t)((uint16_t)USART_GuardTime << 0x08);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's Smart Card mode.
+ * @note This function is not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1or 2 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the Smart Card mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SmartCardCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the SC mode by setting the SCEN bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_CR3_SCEN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the SC mode by clearing the SCEN bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_SCEN);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables NACK transmission.
+ * @note This function is not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1or 2 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the NACK transmission.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SmartCardNACKCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the NACK transmission by setting the NACK bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_CR3_NACK;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the NACK transmission by clearing the NACK bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_NACK);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the Smart Card number of retries in transmit and receive.
+ * @note This function is not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1or 3 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param USART_AutoCount: specifies the Smart Card auto retry count.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SetAutoRetryCount(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint8_t USART_AutoCount)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_AUTO_RETRY_COUNTER(USART_AutoCount));
+ /* Clear the USART auto retry count */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_SCARCNT);
+ /* Set the USART auto retry count*/
+ USARTx->CR3 |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)USART_AutoCount << 0x11);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the Smart Card Block length.
+ * @note This function is not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1or 3 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param USART_BlockLength: specifies the Smart Card block length.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SetBlockLength(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint8_t USART_BlockLength)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+
+ /* Clear the Smart card block length */
+ USARTx->RTOR &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_RTOR_BLEN);
+ /* Set the Smart Card block length */
+ USARTx->RTOR |= (uint32_t)((uint32_t)USART_BlockLength << 0x18);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group9 IrDA mode functions
+ * @brief IrDA mode functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### IrDA mode functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
+ IrDA communication.
+ [..] IrDA is a half duplex communication protocol. If the Transmitter is busy,
+ any data on the IrDA receive line will be ignored by the IrDA decoder
+ and if the Receiver is busy, data on the TX from the USART to IrDA will
+ not be encoded by IrDA. While receiving data, transmission should be
+ avoided as the data to be transmitted could be corrupted.
+ [..] IrDA communication is possible through the following procedure:
+ (#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8 bits, Stop bits, Parity,
+ Transmitter/Receiver modes and hardware flow control values using
+ the USART_Init() function.
+ (#) Configures the IrDA pulse width by configuring the prescaler using
+ the USART_SetPrescaler() function.
+ (#) Configures the IrDA USART_IrDAMode_LowPower or USART_IrDAMode_Normal
+ mode using the USART_IrDAConfig() function.
+ (#) Enable the IrDA using the USART_IrDACmd() function.
+ (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
+ [..]
+ (@) A pulse of width less than two and greater than one PSC period(s) may or
+ may not be rejected.
+ (@) The receiver set up time should be managed by software. The IrDA physical
+ layer specification specifies a minimum of 10 ms delay between
+ transmission and reception (IrDA is a half duplex protocol).
+ (@) In IrDA mode, the following bits must be kept cleared:
+ (+@) LINEN, STOP and CLKEN bits in the USART_CR2 register.
+ (+@) SCEN and HDSEL bits in the USART_CR3 register.
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the USART's IrDA interface.
+ * @note This function is not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1or 2 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param USART_IrDAMode: specifies the IrDA mode.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_IrDAMode_LowPower
+ * @arg USART_IrDAMode_Normal
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_IrDAConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_IrDAMode)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_IRDA_MODE(USART_IrDAMode));
+
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_IRLP);
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_IrDAMode;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's IrDA interface.
+ * @note This function is not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be 1or 2 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART2 is available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART3 is available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the IrDA mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_IrDACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_123_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the IrDA mode by setting the IREN bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_CR3_IREN;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the IrDA mode by clearing the IREN bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_IREN);
+ }
+}
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group10 RS485 mode function
+ * @brief RS485 mode function
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### RS485 mode functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to manage the USART
+ RS485 flow control.
+ [..] RS485 flow control (Driver enable feature) handling is possible through
+ the following procedure:
+ (#) Program the Baud rate, Word length = 8 bits, Stop bits, Parity,
+ Transmitter/Receiver modes and hardware flow control values using
+ the USART_Init() function.
+ (#) Enable the Driver Enable using the USART_DECmd() function.
+ (#) Configures the Driver Enable polarity using the USART_DEPolarityConfig()
+ function.
+ (#) Configures the Driver Enable assertion time using USART_SetDEAssertionTime()
+ function and deassertion time using the USART_SetDEDeassertionTime()
+ function.
+ (#) Enable the USART using the USART_Cmd() function.
+ -@-
+ (+@) The assertion and dessertion times are expressed in sample time units (1/8 or
+ 1/16 bit time, depending on the oversampling rate).
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's DE functionality.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param NewState: new state of the driver enable mode.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_DECmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the DE functionality by setting the DEM bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_CR3_DEM;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the DE functionality by clearing the DEM bit in the CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_DEM);
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Configures the USART's DE polarity
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_DEPolarity: specifies the DE polarity.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_DEPolarity_Low
+ * @arg USART_DEPolarity_High
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_DEPolarityConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_DEPolarity)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_DE_POLARITY(USART_DEPolarity));
+
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_DEP);
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_DEPolarity;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the specified RS485 DE assertion time
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_DEAssertionTime: specifies the time between the activation of
+ * the DE signal and the beginning of the start bit
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SetDEAssertionTime(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_DEAssertionTime)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_DE_ASSERTION_DEASSERTION_TIME(USART_DEAssertionTime));
+
+ /* Clear the DE assertion time */
+ USARTx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR1_DEAT);
+ /* Set the new value for the DE assertion time */
+ USARTx->CR1 |=((uint32_t)USART_DEAssertionTime << (uint32_t)0x15);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the specified RS485 DE deassertion time
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_DeassertionTime: specifies the time between the middle of the last
+ * stop bit in a transmitted message and the de-activation of the DE signal
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_SetDEDeassertionTime(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_DEDeassertionTime)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_DE_ASSERTION_DEASSERTION_TIME(USART_DEDeassertionTime));
+
+ /* Clear the DE deassertion time */
+ USARTx->CR1 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR1_DEDT);
+ /* Set the new value for the DE deassertion time */
+ USARTx->CR1 |=((uint32_t)USART_DEDeassertionTime << (uint32_t)0x10);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group11 DMA transfers management functions
+ * @brief DMA transfers management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### DMA transfers management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This section provides two functions that can be used only in DMA mode.
+ [..] In DMA Mode, the USART communication can be managed by 2 DMA Channel
+ requests:
+ (#) USART_DMAReq_Tx: specifies the Tx buffer DMA transfer request.
+ (#) USART_DMAReq_Rx: specifies the Rx buffer DMA transfer request.
+ [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following function:
+ (+) void USART_DMACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_DMAReq,
+ FunctionalState NewState).
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's DMA interface.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_DMAReq: specifies the DMA request.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_DMAReq_Tx: USART DMA transmit request
+ * @arg USART_DMAReq_Rx: USART DMA receive request
+ * @param NewState: new state of the DMA Request sources.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_DMACmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_DMAReq, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_DMAREQ(USART_DMAReq));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the DMA transfer for selected requests by setting the DMAT and/or
+ DMAR bits in the USART CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_DMAReq;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the DMA transfer for selected requests by clearing the DMAT and/or
+ DMAR bits in the USART CR3 register */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~USART_DMAReq;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's DMA interface when reception error occurs.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_DMAOnError: specifies the DMA status in case of reception error.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_DMAOnError_Enable: DMA receive request enabled when the USART DMA
+ * reception error is asserted.
+ * @arg USART_DMAOnError_Disable: DMA receive request disabled when the USART DMA
+ * reception error is asserted.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_DMAReceptionErrorConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_DMAOnError)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_DMAONERROR(USART_DMAOnError));
+
+ /* Clear the DMA Reception error detection bit */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_DDRE);
+ /* Set the new value for the DMA Reception error detection bit */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_DMAOnError;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup USART_Group12 Interrupts and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ===============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
+ ===============================================================================
+ [..] This subsection provides a set of functions allowing to configure the
+ USART Interrupts sources, Requests and check or clear the flags or pending bits status.
+ The user should identify which mode will be used in his application to
+ manage the communication: Polling mode, Interrupt mode.
+
+ *** Polling Mode ***
+ ====================
+ [..] In Polling Mode, the SPI communication can be managed by these flags:
+ (#) USART_FLAG_REACK: to indicate the status of the Receive Enable
+ acknowledge flag
+ (#) USART_FLAG_TEACK: to indicate the status of the Transmit Enable
+ acknowledge flag.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_WU: to indicate the status of the Wake up flag.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_RWU: to indicate the status of the Receive Wake up flag.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_SBK: to indicate the status of the Send Break flag.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_CM: to indicate the status of the Character match flag.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_BUSY: to indicate the status of the Busy flag.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_ABRF: to indicate the status of the Auto baud rate flag.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_ABRE: to indicate the status of the Auto baud rate error flag.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_EOB: to indicate the status of the End of block flag.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_RTO: to indicate the status of the Receive time out flag.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_nCTSS: to indicate the status of the Inverted nCTS input
+ bit status.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_TXE: to indicate the status of the transmit buffer register.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_RXNE: to indicate the status of the receive buffer register.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_TC: to indicate the status of the transmit operation.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_IDLE: to indicate the status of the Idle Line.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_CTS: to indicate the status of the nCTS input.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_LBD: to indicate the status of the LIN break detection.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_NE: to indicate if a noise error occur.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_FE: to indicate if a frame error occur.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_PE: to indicate if a parity error occur.
+ (#) USART_FLAG_ORE: to indicate if an Overrun error occur.
+ [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
+ (+) FlagStatus USART_GetFlagStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG).
+ (+) void USART_ClearFlag(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_FLAG).
+
+ *** Interrupt Mode ***
+ ======================
+ [..] In Interrupt Mode, the USART communication can be managed by 8 interrupt
+ sources and 10 pending bits:
+ (+) Pending Bits:
+ (##) USART_IT_WU: to indicate the status of the Wake up interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_CM: to indicate the status of Character match interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_EOB: to indicate the status of End of block interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_RTO: to indicate the status of Receive time out interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_CTS: to indicate the status of CTS change interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_LBD: to indicate the status of LIN Break detection interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_TC: to indicate the status of Transmission complete interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_IDLE: to indicate the status of IDLE line detected interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_ORE: to indicate the status of OverRun Error interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_NE: to indicate the status of Noise Error interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_FE: to indicate the status of Framing Error interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_PE: to indicate the status of Parity Error interrupt.
+
+ (+) Interrupt Source:
+ (##) USART_IT_WU: specifies the interrupt source for Wake up interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_CM: specifies the interrupt source for Character match
+ interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_EOB: specifies the interrupt source for End of block
+ interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_RTO: specifies the interrupt source for Receive time-out
+ interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_CTS: specifies the interrupt source for CTS change interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_LBD: specifies the interrupt source for LIN Break
+ detection interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_TXE: specifies the interrupt source for Tansmit Data
+ Register empty interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_TC: specifies the interrupt source for Transmission
+ complete interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_RXNE: specifies the interrupt source for Receive Data
+ register not empty interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_IDLE: specifies the interrupt source for Idle line
+ detection interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_PE: specifies the interrupt source for Parity Error interrupt.
+ (##) USART_IT_ERR: specifies the interrupt source for Error interrupt
+ (Frame error, noise error, overrun error)
+ -@@- Some parameters are coded in order to use them as interrupt
+ source or as pending bits.
+ [..] In this Mode it is advised to use the following functions:
+ (+) void USART_ITConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT, FunctionalState NewState).
+ (+) ITStatus USART_GetITStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT).
+ (+) void USART_ClearITPendingBit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint16_t USART_IT).
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the specified USART interrupts.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_IT: specifies the USART interrupt sources to be enabled or disabled.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_IT_WU: Wake up interrupt, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_IT_CM: Character match interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_EOB: End of block interrupt, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_IT_RTO: Receive time out interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_IT_TXE: Tansmit Data Register empty interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_RXNE: Receive Data register not empty interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_IDLE: Idle line detection interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_PE: Parity Error interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_ERR: Error interrupt(Frame error, noise error, overrun error)
+ * @param NewState: new state of the specified USARTx interrupts.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_ITConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_IT, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ uint32_t usartreg = 0, itpos = 0, itmask = 0;
+ uint32_t usartxbase = 0;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CONFIG_IT(USART_IT));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ usartxbase = (uint32_t)USARTx;
+
+ /* Get the USART register index */
+ usartreg = (((uint16_t)USART_IT) >> 0x08);
+
+ /* Get the interrupt position */
+ itpos = USART_IT & IT_MASK;
+ itmask = (((uint32_t)0x01) << itpos);
+
+ if (usartreg == 0x02) /* The IT is in CR2 register */
+ {
+ usartxbase += 0x04;
+ }
+ else if (usartreg == 0x03) /* The IT is in CR3 register */
+ {
+ usartxbase += 0x08;
+ }
+ else /* The IT is in CR1 register */
+ {
+ }
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ *(__IO uint32_t*)usartxbase |= itmask;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ *(__IO uint32_t*)usartxbase &= ~itmask;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables the specified USART's Request.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_Request: specifies the USART request.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_Request_TXFRQ: Transmit data flush ReQuest
+ * @arg USART_Request_RXFRQ: Receive data flush ReQuest
+ * @arg USART_Request_MMRQ: Mute Mode ReQuest
+ * @arg USART_Request_SBKRQ: Send Break ReQuest
+ * @arg USART_Request_ABRRQ: Auto Baud Rate ReQuest
+ * @param NewState: new state of the DMA interface when reception error occurs.
+ * This parameter can be: ENABLE or DISABLE.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_RequestCmd(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_Request, FunctionalState NewState)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_REQUEST(USART_Request));
+ assert_param(IS_FUNCTIONAL_STATE(NewState));
+
+ if (NewState != DISABLE)
+ {
+ /* Enable the USART ReQuest by setting the dedicated request bit in the RQR
+ register.*/
+ USARTx->RQR |= USART_Request;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Disable the USART ReQuest by clearing the dedicated request bit in the RQR
+ register.*/
+ USARTx->RQR &= (uint32_t)~USART_Request;
+ }
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables or disables the USART's Overrun detection.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_OVRDetection: specifies the OVR detection status in case of OVR error.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_OVRDetection_Enable: OVR error detection enabled when
+ * the USART OVR error is asserted.
+ * @arg USART_OVRDetection_Disable: OVR error detection disabled when
+ * the USART OVR error is asserted.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_OverrunDetectionConfig(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_OVRDetection)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_OVRDETECTION(USART_OVRDetection));
+
+ /* Clear the OVR detection bit */
+ USARTx->CR3 &= (uint32_t)~((uint32_t)USART_CR3_OVRDIS);
+ /* Set the new value for the OVR detection bit */
+ USARTx->CR3 |= USART_OVRDetection;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified USART flag is set or not.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_FLAG: specifies the flag to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_REACK: Receive Enable acknowledge flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_TEACK: Transmit Enable acknowledge flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_WU: Wake up flag, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_RWU: Receive Wake up flag, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_SBK: Send Break flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_CM: Character match flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_BUSY: Busy flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_ABRF: Auto baud rate flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_ABRE: Auto baud rate error flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_EOB: End of block flag, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_RTO: Receive time out flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_nCTSS: Inverted nCTS input bit status.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_CTS: CTS Change flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_LBD: LIN Break detection flag, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_TXE: Transmit data register empty flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_TC: Transmission Complete flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_RXNE: Receive data register not empty flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_IDLE: Idle Line detection flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_ORE: OverRun Error flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_NE: Noise Error flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_FE: Framing Error flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_PE: Parity Error flag.
+ * @retval The new state of USART_FLAG (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus USART_GetFlagStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_FLAG)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_FLAG(USART_FLAG));
+
+ if ((USARTx->ISR & USART_FLAG) != (uint16_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the USARTx's pending flags.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_FLAG: specifies the flag to clear.
+ * This parameter can be any combination of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_WU: Wake up flag, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_CM: Character match flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_EOB: End of block flag, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_RTO: Receive time out flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_CTS: CTS Change flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_LBD: LIN Break detection flag, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_TC: Transmission Complete flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_IDLE: IDLE line detected flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_ORE: OverRun Error flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_NE: Noise Error flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_FE: Framing Error flag.
+ * @arg USART_FLAG_PE: Parity Errorflag.
+ *
+ * @note RXNE pending bit is cleared by a read to the USART_RDR register
+ * (USART_ReceiveData()) or by writing 1 to the RXFRQ in the register
+ * USART_RQR (USART_RequestCmd()).
+ * @note TC flag can be also cleared by software sequence: a read operation
+ * to USART_SR register (USART_GetFlagStatus()) followed by a write
+ * operation to USART_TDR register (USART_SendData()).
+ * @note TXE flag is cleared by a write to the USART_TDR register (USART_SendData())
+ * or by writing 1 to the TXFRQ in the register USART_RQR (USART_RequestCmd()).
+ * @note SBKF flag is cleared by 1 to the SBKRQ in the register USART_RQR
+ * (USART_RequestCmd()).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_ClearFlag(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_FLAG)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CLEAR_FLAG(USART_FLAG));
+
+ USARTx->ICR = USART_FLAG;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the specified USART interrupt has occurred or not.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_IT: specifies the USART interrupt source to check.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_IT_WU: Wake up interrupt, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_IT_CM: Character match interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_EOB: End of block interrupt, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_IT_RTO: Receive time out interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_IT_TXE: Tansmit Data Register empty interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_RXNE: Receive Data register not empty interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_IDLE: Idle line detection interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_ORE: OverRun Error interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_NE: Noise Error interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_FE: Framing Error interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_PE: Parity Error interrupt.
+ * @retval The new state of USART_IT (SET or RESET).
+ */
+ITStatus USART_GetITStatus(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_IT)
+{
+ uint32_t bitpos = 0, itmask = 0, usartreg = 0;
+ ITStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_GET_IT(USART_IT));
+
+ /* Get the USART register index */
+ usartreg = (((uint16_t)USART_IT) >> 0x08);
+ /* Get the interrupt position */
+ itmask = USART_IT & IT_MASK;
+ itmask = (uint32_t)0x01 << itmask;
+
+ if (usartreg == 0x01) /* The IT is in CR1 register */
+ {
+ itmask &= USARTx->CR1;
+ }
+ else if (usartreg == 0x02) /* The IT is in CR2 register */
+ {
+ itmask &= USARTx->CR2;
+ }
+ else /* The IT is in CR3 register */
+ {
+ itmask &= USARTx->CR3;
+ }
+
+ bitpos = USART_IT >> 0x10;
+ bitpos = (uint32_t)0x01 << bitpos;
+ bitpos &= USARTx->ISR;
+ if ((itmask != (uint16_t)RESET)&&(bitpos != (uint16_t)RESET))
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears the USARTx's interrupt pending bits.
+ * @param USARTx: where x can be from 1 to 8 to select the USART peripheral.
+ * @note USART3 and USART4 are available only for STM32F072 and STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART5, USART6, USART7 and USART8 are available only for STM32F091 devices.
+ * @note USART2 is not available for STM32F031 devices.
+ * @param USART_IT: specifies the interrupt pending bit to clear.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg USART_IT_WU: Wake up interrupt, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_IT_CM: Character match interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_EOB: End of block interrupt, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_IT_RTO: Receive time out interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_CTS: CTS change interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_LBD: LIN Break detection interrupt, not available for STM32F030 devices.
+ * @arg USART_IT_TC: Transmission complete interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_IDLE: IDLE line detected interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_ORE: OverRun Error interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_NE: Noise Error interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_FE: Framing Error interrupt.
+ * @arg USART_IT_PE: Parity Error interrupt.
+ *
+ * @note RXNE pending bit is cleared by a read to the USART_RDR register
+ * (USART_ReceiveData()) or by writing 1 to the RXFRQ in the register
+ * USART_RQR (USART_RequestCmd()).
+ * @note TC pending bit can be also cleared by software sequence: a read
+ * operation to USART_SR register (USART_GetITStatus()) followed by
+ * a write operation to USART_TDR register (USART_SendData()).
+ * @note TXE pending bit is cleared by a write to the USART_TDR register
+ * (USART_SendData()) or by writing 1 to the TXFRQ in the register
+ * USART_RQR (USART_RequestCmd()).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void USART_ClearITPendingBit(USART_TypeDef* USARTx, uint32_t USART_IT)
+{
+ uint32_t bitpos = 0, itmask = 0;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_USART_ALL_PERIPH(USARTx));
+ assert_param(IS_USART_CLEAR_IT(USART_IT));
+
+ bitpos = USART_IT >> 0x10;
+ itmask = ((uint32_t)0x01 << (uint32_t)bitpos);
+ USARTx->ICR = (uint32_t)itmask;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_wwdg.c b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_wwdg.c
new file mode 100644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/libraries/STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver/src/stm32f0xx_wwdg.c
@@ -0,0 +1,303 @@
+/**
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @file stm32f0xx_wwdg.c
+ * @author MCD Application Team
+ * @version V1.4.0
+ * @date 24-July-2014
+ * @brief This file provides firmware functions to manage the following
+ * functionalities of the Window watchdog (WWDG) peripheral:
+ * + Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration
+ * + WWDG activation
+ * + Interrupts and flags management
+ *
+ * @verbatim
+ *
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### WWDG features #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..] Once enabled the WWDG generates a system reset on expiry of a programmed
+ time period, unless the program refreshes the counter (downcounter)
+ before to reach 0x3F value (i.e. a reset is generated when the counter
+ value rolls over from 0x40 to 0x3F).
+ [..] An MCU reset is also generated if the counter value is refreshed
+ before the counter has reached the refresh window value. This
+ implies that the counter must be refreshed in a limited window.
+
+ [..] Once enabled the WWDG cannot be disabled except by a system reset.
+
+ [..] WWDGRST flag in RCC_CSR register can be used to inform when a WWDG
+ reset occurs.
+
+ [..] The WWDG counter input clock is derived from the APB clock divided
+ by a programmable prescaler.
+
+ [..] WWDG counter clock = PCLK1 / Prescaler.
+ [..] WWDG timeout = (WWDG counter clock) * (counter value).
+
+ [..] Min-max timeout value @32MHz (PCLK1): ~85us / ~43ms.
+
+ ##### How to use this driver #####
+ ==============================================================================
+ [..]
+ (#) Enable WWDG clock using RCC_APB1PeriphClockCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, ENABLE)
+ function.
+
+ (#) Configure the WWDG prescaler using WWDG_SetPrescaler() function.
+
+ (#) Configure the WWDG refresh window using WWDG_SetWindowValue() function.
+
+ (#) Set the WWDG counter value and start it using WWDG_Enable() function.
+ When the WWDG is enabled the counter value should be configured to
+ a value greater than 0x40 to prevent generating an immediate reset.
+
+ (#) Optionally you can enable the Early wakeup interrupt which is
+ generated when the counter reach 0x40.
+ Once enabled this interrupt cannot be disabled except by a system reset.
+
+ (#) Then the application program must refresh the WWDG counter at regular
+ intervals during normal operation to prevent an MCU reset, using
+ WWDG_SetCounter() function. This operation must occur only when
+ the counter value is lower than the refresh window value,
+ programmed using WWDG_SetWindowValue().
+
+ * @endverbatim
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ * @attention
+ *
+ * © COPYRIGHT 2014 STMicroelectronics
+ *
+ * Licensed under MCD-ST Liberty SW License Agreement V2, (the "License");
+ * You may not use this file except in compliance with the License.
+ * You may obtain a copy of the License at:
+ *
+ * http://www.st.com/software_license_agreement_liberty_v2
+ *
+ * Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software
+ * distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS,
+ * WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied.
+ * See the License for the specific language governing permissions and
+ * limitations under the License.
+ *
+ ******************************************************************************
+ */
+
+/* Includes ------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#include "stm32f0xx_wwdg.h"
+#include "stm32f0xx_rcc.h"
+
+/** @addtogroup STM32F0xx_StdPeriph_Driver
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup WWDG
+ * @brief WWDG driver modules
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/* Private typedef -----------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private define ------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* --------------------- WWDG registers bit mask ---------------------------- */
+/* CFR register bit mask */
+#define CFR_WDGTB_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFE7F)
+#define CFR_W_MASK ((uint32_t)0xFFFFFF80)
+#define BIT_MASK ((uint8_t)0x7F)
+
+/* Private macro -------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private variables ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private function prototypes -----------------------------------------------*/
+/* Private functions ---------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @defgroup WWDG_Private_Functions
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup WWDG_Group1 Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions
+ * @brief Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Prescaler, Refresh window and Counter configuration functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Deinitializes the WWDG peripheral registers to their default reset values.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void WWDG_DeInit(void)
+{
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, ENABLE);
+ RCC_APB1PeriphResetCmd(RCC_APB1Periph_WWDG, DISABLE);
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the WWDG Prescaler.
+ * @param WWDG_Prescaler: specifies the WWDG Prescaler.
+ * This parameter can be one of the following values:
+ * @arg WWDG_Prescaler_1: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/1
+ * @arg WWDG_Prescaler_2: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/2
+ * @arg WWDG_Prescaler_4: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/4
+ * @arg WWDG_Prescaler_8: WWDG counter clock = (PCLK1/4096)/8
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void WWDG_SetPrescaler(uint32_t WWDG_Prescaler)
+{
+ uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_WWDG_PRESCALER(WWDG_Prescaler));
+ /* Clear WDGTB[1:0] bits */
+ tmpreg = WWDG->CFR & CFR_WDGTB_MASK;
+ /* Set WDGTB[1:0] bits according to WWDG_Prescaler value */
+ tmpreg |= WWDG_Prescaler;
+ /* Store the new value */
+ WWDG->CFR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the WWDG window value.
+ * @param WindowValue: specifies the window value to be compared to the downcounter.
+ * This parameter value must be lower than 0x80.
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void WWDG_SetWindowValue(uint8_t WindowValue)
+{
+ __IO uint32_t tmpreg = 0;
+
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_WWDG_WINDOW_VALUE(WindowValue));
+ /* Clear W[6:0] bits */
+
+ tmpreg = WWDG->CFR & CFR_W_MASK;
+
+ /* Set W[6:0] bits according to WindowValue value */
+ tmpreg |= WindowValue & (uint32_t) BIT_MASK;
+
+ /* Store the new value */
+ WWDG->CFR = tmpreg;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables the WWDG Early Wakeup interrupt(EWI).
+ * @note Once enabled this interrupt cannot be disabled except by a system reset.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void WWDG_EnableIT(void)
+{
+ WWDG->CFR |= WWDG_CFR_EWI;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Sets the WWDG counter value.
+ * @param Counter: specifies the watchdog counter value.
+ * This parameter must be a number between 0x40 and 0x7F (to prevent
+ * generating an immediate reset).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void WWDG_SetCounter(uint8_t Counter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_WWDG_COUNTER(Counter));
+ /* Write to T[6:0] bits to configure the counter value, no need to do
+ a read-modify-write; writing a 0 to WDGA bit does nothing */
+ WWDG->CR = Counter & BIT_MASK;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup WWDG_Group2 WWDG activation functions
+ * @brief WWDG activation functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### WWDG activation function #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Enables WWDG and load the counter value.
+ * @param Counter: specifies the watchdog counter value.
+ * This parameter must be a number between 0x40 and 0x7F (to prevent
+ * generating an immediate reset).
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void WWDG_Enable(uint8_t Counter)
+{
+ /* Check the parameters */
+ assert_param(IS_WWDG_COUNTER(Counter));
+ WWDG->CR = WWDG_CR_WDGA | Counter;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/** @defgroup WWDG_Group3 Interrupts and flags management functions
+ * @brief Interrupts and flags management functions
+ *
+@verbatim
+ ==============================================================================
+ ##### Interrupts and flags management functions #####
+ ==============================================================================
+
+@endverbatim
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @brief Checks whether the Early Wakeup interrupt flag is set or not.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval The new state of the Early Wakeup interrupt flag (SET or RESET).
+ */
+FlagStatus WWDG_GetFlagStatus(void)
+{
+ FlagStatus bitstatus = RESET;
+
+ if ((WWDG->SR) != (uint32_t)RESET)
+ {
+ bitstatus = SET;
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ bitstatus = RESET;
+ }
+ return bitstatus;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @brief Clears Early Wakeup interrupt flag.
+ * @param None
+ * @retval None
+ */
+void WWDG_ClearFlag(void)
+{
+ WWDG->SR = (uint32_t)RESET;
+}
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/**
+ * @}
+ */
+
+/************************ (C) COPYRIGHT STMicroelectronics *****END OF FILE****/
diff --git a/libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/Release_Notes.html b/libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/Release_Notes.html
deleted file mode 100644
--- a/libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/Release_Notes.html
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,508 +0,0 @@
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/misc.h b/libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/misc.h
deleted file mode 100644
--- a/libraries/STM32L1xx_StdPeriph_Driver/inc/misc.h
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,202 +0,0 @@
-/**
- ******************************************************************************
- * @file misc.h
- * @author MCD Application Team
- * @version V1.2.0
- * @date 22-February-2013
- * @brief This file contains all the functions prototypes for the miscellaneous
- * firmware library functions (add-on to CMSIS functions).
- ******************************************************************************
- * @attention
- *
- *
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
|
-
